6.12.  System Command Reference

6.12.1. Command Hierarchies

  1. Configuration Commands

6.12.1.1. Configuration Commands

6.12.1.1.1. System Information Commands

config
— system
boot-bad-exec file-url
boot-good-exec file-url
chassis
allow-imm-family imm-family
clli-code clli-code
— no clli-code
config-backup count
contact contact-name
— no contact
coordinates coordinates
lacp-system-priority lacp-system-priority
lldp
location location
— no location
name system-name
— no name
[no] oper-group name [create]
[no] group-down time in seconds
[no] group-up time in seconds

6.12.1.1.2. Virtual Chassis (VC) Configuration Commands

config
— system
vc-stack-node slot-number mac-address mac-address [create]
— no vc-stack-node slot-number
vc-stack-mac-addr mac-address

6.12.1.2. VWM Shelf Management Commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

config
— system
[no] vwm-shelf vwm-shelf-id [create]
card card-id
[no] card-type card-type
[no] shutdown
[no] shutdown

6.12.1.3. VWM Shelf Management Commands for 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

config
— system
[no] vwm-shelf vwm-shelf-id [vwm-type vwm-type] [create]
card card-id
[no] card-type card-type
[no] shutdown
[no] shutdown

6.12.1.4. System Alarm Commands

config
— system
cflash-cap-alarm cflash-id rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
— no cflash-cap-alarm cflash-id
cflash-cap-warn cflash-id rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
— no cflash-cap-warn cflash-id
kb-memory-use-alarm rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
kb-memory-use-warn rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
memory-use-alarm rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
memory-use-warn rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
[no] rmon
alarm rmon-alarm-id variable-oid oid-string interval seconds [sample-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type] [rising-event rmon-event-id rising-threshold threshold] [falling event rmon-event-id falling-threshold threshold] [owner owner-string]
— no alarm rmon-alarm-id
event rmon-event-id [event-type] [description description-string] [owner owner-string]
— no event rmon-event-id

6.12.1.5. PTP Commands

config
— system
ptp
anno-rx-timeout count
clock
freq-source freq-source
clock-type boundary
clock-type ordinary {slave}
domain domain-value
— no domain
local-priority priority
log-anno-interval log-interval
network-type {sdh | sonet}
peer ip-address [create]
— no peer ip-address
local-priority priority
[no] shutdown
port port-id [create]
— no port port-id
address {01:1b:19:00:00:00 | 01:80:c2:00:00:0e}
local-priority priority
master-only {true | false}
[no] shutdown
priority1 priority-value
— no priority1
priority2 priority-value
— no priority2
profile {g8265dot1-2010 | ieee1588-2008 | g8275dot1-2014}
[no] shutdown

6.12.1.6. System Time Commands

root
— admin
set-time [date] [time]
config
— system
time
[no] ntp
authentication-key key-id key key [hash | hash2] type {des | message-digest}
— no authentication-keykey-id
[no] broadcast [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name} [key-id key-id] [version version] [ttl ttl]
[no] broadcast [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name}
broadcastclient [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name} [authenticate]
[no] broadcastclient [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name}
[no] ntp-server [authenticate]
[no] peer ip-address [version version] [key-id key-id] [prefer]
[no] server {ip-address| ptp} [version version] [key-id key-id] [prefer]
[no] shutdown
[no] sntp
server-address ip-address [version version-number] [normal | preferred] [interval seconds]
— no server-address ip-address
[no] shutdown
[no] dst-zone [std-zone-name | non-std-zone-name]
end {end-week} {end-day} {end-month} [hours-minutes]
offset offset
start {start-week} {start-day} {start-month} [hours-minutes]
zone std-zone-name | non-std-zone-name [hh [:mm]]
— no zone

6.12.1.7. CRON Commands

config
system
cron
schedule schedule-name [owner schedule-owner]
— no schedule
count number
— no count
day-of-month {day-number [..day-number] | all}
— no day-of-month
description description-string
— no description
end-time [date | day-name] time
— no end-time
hour {..hour-number [..hour-number]|all}
— no hour
interval seconds
— no interval
minute {minute-number [..minute-number]|all}
— no minute
month {month-number [..month-number]|month-name [..month-name]|all}
— no month
script-policy script-policy-name [owner script-policy-owner]
no shutdown
type schedule-type
weekday {weekday-number [..weekday-number]|day-name [..day-name]|all}
— noweekday
time-range name [create]
— no time-range
absolute start start-absolute-time end end-absolute-time
— no absolute start start-absolute-time
daily start start-time-of-day end end-time-of-day
— no daily start start-time-of-day
description description-string
weekdays start start-time-of-day end end-time-of-day
— no weekdays start start-time-of-day
weekend start start-time-of-day end end-time-of-day
— no weekend start start-time-of-day
weekly start start-time-in-week end end-time-in-week
— no weekly start start-time-in-week
[no] tod-suite tod-suite-name[create]
[no] description description-string
egress
filter ip ip-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
filter ipv6 ipv6-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
filter mac mac-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
— no filter ip ip-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
— no filter ipv6 ipv6-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
— no filter mac mac-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
filter ip ip-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
filter ipv6 ipv6-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
filter mac mac-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
— no filter ip ip-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
— no filter ipv6 ipv6-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
— no filter mac mac-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
qos policy-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
— no qos policy-id [time-range time-range-name]

6.12.1.8. Script Control Commands

config
— system
[no] script script-name [owner script-owner]
description description-string
location file-url
— no location
[no] shutdown
[no] script-policy policy-name [owner policy-owner]
expire-time {seconds | forever}
lifetime {seconds | forever}
max-completed unsigned
results file-url
— no results
script script-name [owner script-owner]
— no script
[no] shutdown

6.12.1.9. System Administration (Admin) Commands

root
admin
auto-init stop
debug-save file-url
disconnect {address ip-address | username user-name | console | telnet | ftp | ssh}
display-config [detail | index]
[no] enable-tech
— radius-discovery
reboot [upgrade] [auto-init] [now]
reboot [active | standby | upgrade] [auto-init {chassis-role factory-default | satellite | standalone}] [now]
reboot [file-url] [detail] [index]
set-time date / time
tech-support [file-url]
update-golden-bootstrap [file-url]
virtual-chassis {slotid | slotid-range} image-sync

6.12.1.10. High Availability (Redundancy) Commands

root
admin
display-config [detail | index]
synchronize {boot-env | config}

6.12.1.11. Configuration Rollback Commands for the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

root
admin
— rollback
compare [to checkpoint2]
compare checkpoint1 to checkpoint2
delete checkpoint | rescue
revert checkpoint | rescue [now]
save [comment comment] [rescue]
view [checkpoint | rescue]
config
system
— rollback
rescue-location file-url
rollback-location file-url/rollback filename
switchover-exec file-url
— redundancy
synchronize {boot-env | config}

6.12.1.12. Multi-chassis LAG Commands

config
peer ip-address [create]
no peer ip-address
authentication-key authentication-key | hash-key [hash | hash2]
description description-string
[no] mc-lag
keep-alive-interval interval
lag lag-id lacp-key admin-key system-id system-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id] system-priority system-priority
lag lag-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id]
no lag lag-id
[no] shutdown
peer-name name
no peer-name
[no] shutdown
source-address ip-address
[no] sync
[no] igmp
[no] igmp-snooping
port port-id [sync-tag sync-tag] [create]
no port port-id
range encap-range sync-tag sync-tag
no range encap-range
[no] shutdown

6.12.1.13. System Port LAG MAC Assignment Commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp standalone, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

config
— system
port-lag-mac-assignment [v1-enable]

6.12.1.14. System Alarm Contact Commands

config
— system
alarm-contact-input alarm-contact-input-id
[no] alarm-output-severity [critical | major | minor | none]
[no] clear-alarm-msg {alarm-msg-txt}
description description-string
normal-state [open | closed]
[no] shutdown
[no] trigger-alarm-msg {alarm-msg-txt}

6.12.1.15. System Synchronization Commands for 7210 SAS-M

config
system
abort
begin
commit
ref-order first second third
— no ref-order
ptp
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec}
[no] shutdown
ref1
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
ref2
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
[no] ql-selection
[no] revert

6.12.1.16. System Synchronization Commands for 7210 SAS-T

config
system
abort
begin
bits1
input
— no shutdown
interface-type {ds1 [{esf|sf}] | e1 [{pcm30crc|pcm31crc}]}
output
line-length {110|220|330|440|550|660}
— no shutdown
ql-override {prs|stu|st2|tnc|st3e|st3|prc|ssua|ssub|sec}
ssm-bit sa-bit
bits2
input
— no shutdown
output
— no shutdown
commit
ref-order first second [third] [fourth] [fifth]
— no ref-order
ptp
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec}
[no] shutdown
ref1
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
ref2
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
[no] ql-selection
[no] revert

6.12.1.17. System Synchronization Commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp

config
system
abort
begin
bits1
input
— no shutdown
interface-type {ds1 [{esf | sf}] | e1 [{pcm30crc | pcm31crc}]}
output
line-length {110 | 220 | 330 | 440 | 550 | 660}
— no shutdown
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec}
ssm-bit sa-bit
bits2
input
— no shutdown
output
— no shutdown
commit
ref-order first second [third] [fourth] [fifth]
— no ref-order
ref1
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
ref2
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
[no] ql-selection
[no] revert

6.12.1.18. System Synchronization Commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

config
system
abort
begin
bits1
input
— no shutdown
interface-type {ds1 [{esf | sf}] | e1 [{pcm30crc | pcm31crc}]}
output
line-length {110 | 220 | 330 | 440 | 550 | 660}
— no shutdown
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec}
ssm-bit sa-bit
commit
ref-order first second [third] [fourth]
— no ref-order
ptp
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec}
[no] shutdown
ref1
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
ref2
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
[no] ql-selection
[no] revert

6.12.1.19. System Synchronization Commands for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

config
system
abort
begin
commit
ref-order first second third
— no ref-order
ref1
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
ref2
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | prc | ssua | ssub | sec | eec1 | eec2}
[no] shutdown
source-port port-id
[no] ql-selection
[no] revert

6.12.1.20. LLDP System Commands

configure
system
lldp
network-policy network-policy-id [create]
— no network-policy network-policy-id
application-type {voice | voice-signaling | guest-voice | guest-voice-signaling | soft-phone-voice | video-conferencing | streaming-video | video-signaling}
dot1p dot1p-value
— no dot1p
ip-dscp ip-dscp
— no ip-dscp
vlan-id 0..4094
— no vlan-id
reinit-delay time
[no] shutdown
tx-credit-max count
tx-hold-multiplier multiplier
tx-interval interval

6.12.1.21. System Resource-Profile Commands for 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

configure
— system
entry entry-id port port-range to port-range
— no entry entry-id
acl-sap-egress [num-resources]
ipv4-ipv6-128-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv6-64bit-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
— no egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
acl-sap-ingress [num-resources]
ipv4-ipv6-128-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-64-only-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
eth-cfm [num-resources]
— no eth-cfm
down-mep num-resources
— no down-mep
up-mep num-resources
— no up-mep
ip-mpls-protocols num-resources
qos-sap-egress-resource num-resources
qos-sap-ingress-resource num-resources
ip-dscp-port-if-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-mac-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
qos
mbs-pool {node | port}
— no mbs-pool

6.12.1.22. System Resource-Profile Router Commands for 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

configure
— system
router
ecmp max-routes-dest
— no ecmp
ldp-ecmp percent-value
— no ldp-ecmp
max-ipv6-routes number
max-ip-subnets number

6.12.1.23. System Resource-Profile Commands for 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

6.12.1.24. System Resource-Profile Commands for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

configure
— system
acl-sap-egress [num-resources]
[no] ipv6-128bit-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv6-64bit-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
— no egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
acl-sap-ingress [num-resources]
ipv4-ipv6-128-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-64-only-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
eth-cfm [num-resources]
— no eth-cfm
up-mep num-resources
— no up-mep
down-mep num-resources
— no down-mep
qos-sap-ingress-resource [num-resources]
ipv4-mac-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
sap-aggregate-meter num-resources

6.12.1.25. System Resource-Profile Commands for a Virtual Chassis

configure
— system
description description-string
acl-sap-egress [num-resources]
[no] ipv6-128bit-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv6-64bit-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
— no egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
g8032-control-sap-tags vlan-range
acl-sap-ingress [num-resources]
ipv4-ipv6-128-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-64-only-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
eth-cfm [num-resources]
— no eth-cfm
up-mep num-resources
— no up-mep
sap-down-mep num-resources
— no sap-down-mep
sdp-down-mep-ing-mip num-resources
qos-sap-ingress-resource [num-resources]
ipv4-mac-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
sap-aggregate-meter num-resources

6.12.1.26. System Resource-Profile Commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

configure
— system
resource-profile policy-id [create]
— no resource-profile policy-id
description description-string
acl-sap-egress [num-resources]
[no] ipv6-128bit-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-ipv6-64bit-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
— no egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
eth-cfm [num-resources]
— no eth-cfm
bidir-mip-egress [num-resources]
g8032-control-sap-tags vlan-range
acl-sap-ingress [num-resources]
ipv4-ipv6-128-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-64-only-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
cpu-protection [num-resources]
eth-cfm [num-resources]
— no eth-cfm
up-mep num-resources
— no up-mep
down-mep num-resources
— no down-mep
qos-network-ingress-resource [num-resources]
qos-sap-egress-resource num-resources
qos-sap-ingress-resource [num-resources]
ip-dscp-port-if-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-mac-match-enable num-resources
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
ipv6-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
mac-match-enable num-resources
sap-aggregate-meter num-resources

6.12.1.27. System Resource Profile Commands for MAC Authentication

configure
— system
resource-profile policy-id [create]
— no resource-profile policy-id
mac-auth-res num-resources
mac-auth-res num-resources

6.12.1.28. Global System Resource Profile Commands for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

6.12.1.29. Global System Resource Profile Commands for a Virtual Chassis

configure
— system
router
— no ecmp
ecmp
ldp-ecmp percent-value
— no ldp-ecmp
max-ipv6-routes number
max-ip-subnets number

6.12.1.30. Show Commands

show
alarm-contact-input alarm-contact-input-id [detail]
chassis [environment] [power-supply]
— system
chassis [imm-family]
chassis {active | configured}
connection [address ip-address [interface interface-name]] [port port-number] [detail]
cpu [sample-period seconds]
cron
schedule action-name [owner owner-name]
tod-suite tod-suite-name [detail] associations failed-associations
time-range name associations [detail]
global-res-profile [detail]
global-res-profile {active | configured}
lldp
ntp [{peers | peer peer-address} | {servers | server server-address} | [all]] [detail]
rollback [rescue]
resource-profile [active|configured] policy-id [detail]
ptp
peer ip-address [router router-instance | service-name service-name] [detail]
peers [router router-instance | service-name service-name] [detail]
port port-id [detail]
unicast [router router-instance | service-name service-name]
sntp
script [script-name] [owner script-owner]
script-policy script-policy-name [owner owner-name]
script-policy run-history [run-state]
time
vwm-shelf vwm-shelf-id [detail]
time
all [detail]
mc-lag peer [ip-address] [lag lag-id]
mc-lag [peer ip-address [lag lag-id]] statistics
sync [peer ip-address]
sync peer ip-address detail
pools
oper-group [group-name]
oper-group group-name [detail]
oper-group group-name [monitoring]
uptime

6.12.1.31. Clear Commands

clear
screen action-name [owner owner-name]
— system
ptp inactive-peers
ptp peer ip-address statistics
ptp statistics
port port-id statistics
completed [script-policy-name] [owner owner-name]
sync-if-timing {ref1 | ref2}
sync-if-timing {ref1 | ref2 | bits1 | bits2}

6.12.1.32. Debug Commands

debug
force-reference {ref1 | ref2 | ptp}
force-reference {ref1 | ref2 | bits1 | bits2 | ptp}
[no] system
ntp [router router-name] [interface ip-int-name]

6.12.2. Command Descriptions

6.12.2.1. Configuration Commands

6.12.2.1.1. Generic Commands

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>ptp
config>system>time>ntp
config>system>time>sntp
config>system>cron>sched
config>system>script-control>script-policy
config>system>script-control>script
config>system>sync-if-timing>ref1
config>system>sync-if-timing>ref2
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>mc-lag
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 
Note:

The config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer and config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>mc-lag contexts are not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

This command administratively disables the entity. When disabled, an entity does not change, reset, or remove any configuration settings or statistics.

The operational state of the entity is disabled as well as the operational state of any entities contained within. Many objects must be shut down before they may be deleted.

The no form of this command places the entity into an administratively enabled state.

Default 

no shutdown

Special Cases 
PTP Protocol Handling —
Applies only to 7210 SAS-Mxp. When the no shutdown command is issued in the configure>system>ptp context, resources are allocated to enable processing of the protocol by the node. When the shutdown command is issued in the configure>system>ptp context, the resources are deallocated.
Note:

Resources for PTP are allocated when the protocol is enabled in the base routing instance. Resources are deallocated when the configuration of the last PTP context under the base routing instance is shutdown

description

Syntax 
description description-string
no description
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
config>system>cron>time-range
config>system>cron>tod-suite
config>system>script-control>script
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 
Note:

The config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer context is not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

This command creates a text description stored in the configuration file for a configuration context.

The description command associates a text string with a configuration context to help identify the content in the configuration file.

The no form of this command removes the string from the configuration.

Parameters 
string—
Specifies the description character string. Allowed values are any string up to 80 characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

6.12.2.1.2. System Information Commands

boot-bad-exec

Syntax 
boot-bad-exec file-url
no boot-bad-exec
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures a URL for a CLI script to exec following a failure of a boot-up configuration. The command specifies a URL for the CLI scripts to be run following the completion of the boot-up configuration. A URL must be specified or no action is taken.

The commands are persistent between router reboots and are included in the configuration saves (admin save).

See the exec command for related commands. This command executes the contents of a text file as if they were commands entered at the console.

Default 

no boot-bad-exec

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the location and name of the CLI script file executed following failure of the boot-up configuration file execution. When this parameter is not specified, no CLI script file is executed.
Values—
file url local-url | remote-url: 255 chars max
local-url — [cflash-id/ | usb-flash-id][file-path]
remote-url — [{ftp://} login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]
remote-locn — [hostname | ipv4-address]
                         ipv4-address — a.b.c.d

usb-flash-id

uf1: (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)

uf1:, uf1-A:, uf1-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

cflash-id

cf1:, cf2: (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC)

cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

 

boot-good-exec

Syntax 
boot-good-exec file-url
no boot-good-exec
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

Use this command to configure a URL for a CLI script to exec following the success of a boot-up configuration.

See the exec command for related commands. This command executes the contents of a text file as if they were commands entered at the console.

Default 

no boot-good-exec

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the location and name of the CLI script file executed following failure of the boot-up configuration file execution. When this parameter is not specified, no CLI script file is executed.
Values—
file url local-url | remote-url: 255 chars max
local-url — [cflash-id/ | usb-flash-id][file-path]
remote-url — [{ftp://} login:pswd@remote-locn/][file-path]
remote-locn — [hostname | ipv4-address]
                         ipv4-address — a.b.c.d

usb-flash-id

uf1: (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)

uf1:, uf1-A:, uf1-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

cflash-id

cf1:, cf2: (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC)

cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

 

allow-imm-family

Syntax 
allow-imm-family imm-family
no allow-imm-family
Context 
config>system>chassis
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allows the users to configure the type of IMM they plan to use with the chassis. On the 7210 SAS-R6, a mix of IMMv1 and IMMv2 is not allowed to be used in the same chassis. In other words, the user can populate the chassis with either all IMMv1 IMMs or with all IMMv2 IMMs. The type of IMM planned to be used in a chassis needs to be configured up-front, so that on system boot, the software can allocate appropriate resources based on the IMM type.

The software checks that the IMMs provisioned (and equipped) in the chassis is a member of the IMM family type currently configured (active value) by the user. If the user provisioned IMM does not match the IMM types allowed, the software detects a errors in provisioning mismatch and marks the operational state of the IMM to be down.

Note:

  1. The chassis by default will support IMMv1 family (that is, 1st generation of 7210 SAS-R6 IMMs). The default profile of the chassis remains the same, unless modified by the user.
  2. The user can add in support for any IMM family type by repeated execution of this command. IMM Family type will be added, only if the current supported family types are compatible with each other, else an error is returned. In other words, if the user specifies both IMMv1 and IMMv2 the command errors out when the user executes the command to add the IMM family IMMv2.
  3. A change in the current value of IMM family requires a reboot of the node to take effect. therefore, the user configured value for IMM family type takes effect only after the next reboot.
Default 

no allow-imm-family

Parameters 
imm-family—
Specifies the type of IMM family type to be used in a chassis.
Values—
imm-sas-r, imm-sas-r-b, imm-sas-r-c

 

clli-code

Syntax 
clli-code clli-code
no clli-code
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates a Common Language Location Identifier (CLLI) code string for the router. A CLLI code is an 11-character standardized geographic identifier that uniquely identifies geographic locations and certain functional categories of equipment unique to the telecommunications industry.

No CLLI validity checks other than truncating or padding the string to eleven characters are performed.

Only one CLLI code can be configured, if multiple CLLI codes are configured the last one entered overwrites the previous entry.

The no form of this command removes the CLLI code.

Parameters 
clli-code—
Specifies the 11 character string CLLI code. Any printable, seven bit ASCII characters can be used within the string. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes. If more than 11 characters are entered, the string is truncated. If less than 11 characters are entered the string is padded with spaces.

config-backup

Syntax 
config-backup count
no config-backup
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the maximum number of backup versions maintained for configuration files and BOF.

For example, assume count is set to 5, and the configuration file is called xyz.cfg. When a save command is executed, the file xyz.cfg is saved with a .1 extension. Each subsequent config-backup command increments the numeric extension until the maximum count is reached.

xyz.cfg xyz.cfg.1 xyz.cfg.2 xyz.cfg.3 xyz.cfg.4 xyz.cfg.5 xyz.ndx

Each persistent index file is updated at the same time as the associated configuration file. When the index file is updated, the save is performed to xyz.cfg and the index file is created as xyz.ndx. Synchronization between the active and standby is performed for all configurations and their associated persistent index files.

The no form of this command reverts the configuration to the default value.

Default 

5

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum number of backup revisions.
Values—
1 to 9

 

contact

Syntax 
contact contact-name
no contact
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates a text string that identifies the contact name for the device.

Only one contact can be configured, if multiple contacts are configured the last one entered will overwrite the previous entry.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
contact-name—
Specifies the contact name character string. The string may be up to 80 characters. Any printable, seven-bit ASCII characters can be used within the string. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

coordinates

Syntax 
coordinates coordinates
no coordinates
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates a text string that identifies the system coordinates for the device location. For example, the command coordinates37.390 -122.0550" is read as latitude 37.390 north and longitude 122.0550 west.

Only one set of coordinates can be configured. If multiple coordinates are configured, the last one entered overwrites the previous entry.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters 
coordinates—
Specifies the coordinates describing the device location character string. The string may be up to 80 characters. Any printable, seven-bit ASCII characters can be used within the string. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes. If the coordinates are subsequently used by an algorithm that locates the exact position of this node then the string must match the requirements of the algorithm.

lacp-system-priority

Syntax 
lacp-system-priority lacp-system-priority
no lacp-system-priority
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) system priority on aggregated Ethernet interfaces. LACP allows the operator to aggregate multiple physical interfaces to form one logical interface.

Default 

32768

Parameters 
lacp-system-priority—
Specifies the LACP system priority.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

location

Syntax 
location location
no location
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates a text string that identifies the system location for the device.

Only one location can be configured. If multiple locations are configured, the last one entered overwrites the previous entry.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Parameters 
location—
Specifies the location as a character string. The string may be up to 80 characters. Any printable, seven-bit ASCII characters can be used within the string. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

login-control

Syntax 
login-control
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure login control.

name

Syntax 
name system-name
no name
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates a system name string for the device.

For example, system-name parameter ALA-1 for the name command configures the device name as ALA-1.

Only one system name can be configured. If multiple system names are configured, the last one encountered overwrites the previous entry.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

the default system name is set to the chassis serial number which is read from the backplane EEPROM

Parameters 
system-name—
Specifies the system name as a character string. The string may be up to 32 characters. Any printable, seven-bit ASCII characters can be used within the string. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

oper-group

Syntax 
oper-group name [create]
no oper-group
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Only supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates a system-wide group name which can be used to associate a number of service objects (for example, ports). The status of the group is derived from the status of its members. The status of the group can then be used to influence the status of non-member objects. For example, when a group status is marked as down, the objects that monitor the group change their status accordingly.

The no form of this command removes the group. All the object associations need to be removed before the no form of the command can be executed.

Default 

no oper-group

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the operational group identifier, up to 32 characters.
create—
Keyword to create the configuration context. Once the context is created, it is possible to navigate into the context without the create keyword.

hold-time

Syntax 
hold-time
Context 
config>system>oper-group
Supported Platforms 

Only supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure hold time information.

group-down

Syntax 
[no] group-down time in seconds
Context 
config>system>oper-group>hold-time
Supported Platforms 

Only supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the number of seconds to wait before notifying clients monitoring this group when its operational status transitions from down to up. A value of zero indicates that transitions are reported immediately to monitoring clients.

The no form reverts the value to the default.

Default 

0

Parameters 
time in seconds—
Specifies the time, in seconds.
Values—
0 to 3600

 

group-up

Syntax 
[no] group-up time in seconds
Context 
config>system>oper-group>hold-time
Supported Platforms 

Only supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the number of seconds to wait before notifying clients monitoring this group when its operational status transitions from up to down.

The no form reverts the value to the default.

Default 

4

Parameters 
time in seconds—
Specifies the time, in seconds.
Values—
0 to 3600

 

vwm-shelf

Syntax 
[no] vwm-shelf vwm-shelf-id [create]
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the shelf information for 1830 VWM clip-on device.

The user must create the VWM clip-on device and provision the shelf ID to allow the 7210 SAS software to communicate with the shelf and retrieve information. The value specified in the vwm-shelf-id parameter must match the shelf ID set using the rotary dial on the clip-on device. If these shelf IDs do not match, the 7210 SAS devices will not be able to interact to the device and does not provide any information about the device. The software cannot detect a mismatch between the value of the configured vwm-shelf-id and the shelf ID set on the rotary dial.

In prior releases, the software allows user to configure only a single clip-on device for management by specifying a single shelf ID. The software does not allow for configuration of more than a single clip-on shelf.

A fixed number of 1830 VWM devices can be managed by the 7210 SAS devices. The limit depends on the interface used to connect to the 1830 device. The user must provision all the shelves that are connected to the 7210 SAS device.

The no form of this command removes the configured shelf ID and the software removes all the information it has for the shelf.

Parameters 
vwm-shelf-id—
Specifies the 1830 VWM clip-on device attached to a 7210 SAS device.
Values—
1 to 7
Note:

The vwm-shelf-id can take values in the range 1 to 7. This implies that the rotary switch on the connected optical clip-on device must be set to a value in this range.

 

create—
Keyword to create the shelf ID.

vwm-shelf

Syntax 
[no] vwm-shelf vwm-shelf-id [vwm-type vwm-type] [create]
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the shelf information for 1830 VWM clip-on device.

The user must create the VWM clip-on device and provision the shelf ID to allow the 7210 SAS software to communicate with the shelf and retrieve information. The value specified in the vwm-shelf-id parameter must match the shelf ID set using the rotary dial on the clip-on device. If these shelf IDs do not match, the 7210 SAS devices will not be able to interact to the device and does not provide any information about the device. 7210 SAS software cannot detect a mismatch between the value of the configured vwm-shelf-id and the shelf ID set on the rotary dial.

A fixed number of 1830 VWM devices can be managed by the 7210 SAS devices. The limit depends on the interface used to connect to the 1830 device. The user must provision all the shelves that are connected to the 7210 SAS device.

The vmw-type enables the context to configure the shelf type information for 1830 VWM clip-on device. The user must provision the shelf-type of the connected 1830 device. The software uses this information to match with the shelf-type retrieved from the device and raise a trap/event when there is a mismatch and marks the shelf as operationally down. Additionally, in a cascaded configuration, if there is a mismatch in provisioning of the shelf, the 7210 SAS does not attempt to retrieve information of the shelves that follow the mis-configured shelf.

The no form of this command removes the configured shelf ID and the software removes all the information it has for the shelf.

Parameters 
vwm-shelf-id—
Specifies the 1830 VWM clip-on device attached to 7210 SAS device.
Values—
1 to 7

 

vwm-type—
Specifies the shelf type information for 1830 VWM clip-on device.
Values—
ec-cw, ec-dw, ec-dwa

 

ec-cw—
Specifies the controller card to be of type passive 1830 VWM CWDM controller.
ec-dw—
Specifies the controller type to be passive 1830 VWM DWDM controller.
ec-dwa—
Specifies the controller type to be active 1830 VWM DWDM controller.
Note:

  1. The vwm-shelf-id can take values in the range 1 to 7. This implies that the rotary switch on the connected optical clip-on device must be set to a value in this range.
  2. For management of DWDM using the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 through OMC interface, the main shelf (that is, the first shelf) to which the node is connected should have EC-DWA. If connected through OMC interface, the shelf ID can be 1 to 7 and if connected through USB interface, the shelf ID should be 0.
  3. If the main shelf has any other shelf ID (that is, 1 to 7), the shelf will not become operational.
create—
Keyword to create the vwm-shelf-id.

card

Syntax 
card card-id
Context 
config>system>vwm-shelf
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to provision the information for the modules that can be plugged into the slots on the 1830 VWM clip-on device.

This command provides the user better control over the modules plugged into the 1830 CWDM device slots. The user can preprovision acceptable modules by configuring the card-type parameter with the appropriate vwm-acronym. Modules are identified using the card type acronyms listed in Table 42 and Table 43.

The no form of this command removes the configured card ID and the software forgets all the information it has for the card. The software will not raise any events/traps/alarms for the card and clear all pending events/traps/alarms/LEDs.

Parameters 
card-id—
Specifies the card on the 1830 VWM clip-on device attached to 7210 SAS. Card ID 1 identifies the module in slot #1 of the 1830 CWDM device and Card ID 2 identifies the module in slot #2 of the 1830 CWDM device.
Values—
1, 2

 

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>vwm-shelf
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command administratively disables the management of the clip-on device identified by the parameter vwm-shelf-id. When this command is executed, the software will clear all pending events/traps/alarms related to this shelf.

The no form of this command administratively enables the management of the clip-on device. The software raises appropriate events/traps/alarms for the device.

Default 

no shutdown

card-type

Syntax 
[no] card-type card-type
Context 
config>system>vwm-shelf>card
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command provides the user a better control over the modules plugged into the 1830 CWDM device slots. The user can preprovision acceptable modules by configuring the card-type parameter with the appropriate card-type vwm-acronym. The modules are identified using the acronyms listed below.

The 7210 SAS validates the configured card-types with the card-type acronym retrieved from the clip-on device and checks the following.

  1. If the configured card-type matches the card type acronym retrieved from the clip-on device, the 7210 SAS allows management of the module.
  2. If the configured card-type does not match the card type acronym retrieved from the clip-on device, the 7210 SAS raises an event to alert the user of mismatch in configuration. The event results in a major alarm with the major LED set. In such a case, the card status displays “Provisioning Mismatch” error.
  3. The mismatch event/trap is cleared if the module is replaced with the one that has a correct card type acronym. Any pending trap/event, major alarm and major LED is cleared.

If the user set the card to administratively up and the module is missing, the 7210 SAS raises an event/trap. The event results in a major alarm with the major LED set to the appropriate color. If the user has preprovisioned the card and administratively shut it down, the software does not attempt to match the module’s identifier (if the module is equipped in the slot) and clears any pending alarms. The software retrieves any information about the equipped module to aid the user with provisioning.

The no form of this command removes and clears the card-type information. Until the card-type is provisioned, the software does not raise any events/traps/alarms for the card and clears all pending events/traps/alarms/LEDs.

Table 42 lists the acronyms defined by the optical group. For more information, see the Product overview guide for 1830 VWM. This is used to preprovision the acceptable modules that can be equipped in the slots of the clip-on device.

Table 42:  Card Type Acronyms for 1830 CWDM Devices 

Module Description

Acronym

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AB VARIANT) - CH1 (1471nm)

SFC1A

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AC VARIANT) - CH1 (1491nm)

SFC1B

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AD VARIANT) - CH1 (1511nm)

SFC1C

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AE VARIANT) - CH1 (1531nm)

SFC1D

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AF VARIANT) - CH1 (1551nm)

SFC1E

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AG VARIANT) - CH1 (1571nm)

SFC1F

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AH VARIANT) - CH1 (1591nm)

SFC1G

1830 VWM 1-CH CWDM FILTER (AI VARIANT) - CH1 (1611nm)

SFC1H

1830 VWM 2-CH CWDM FILTER (AK VARIANT) - CH1,2

SFC2A&B

1830 VWM 2-CH CWDM FILTER (AL VARIANT) – CH3,4

SFC2C&D

1830 VWM 2-CH CWDM FILTER (AM VARIANT) – CH5,6

SFC2E&F

1830 VWM 2-CH CWDM FILTER (AN VARIANT) – CH7,8

SFC2G&H

1830 VWM 4-CH CWDM FILTER (AP VARIANT) - CH1,2,3,4

SFC4A-D

1830 VWM 4-CH CWDM FILTER (AP VARIANT) – CH5,6,7,8

SFC4E-H

1830 VWM 8-CH CWDM FILTER (AA VARIANT) - CH1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8

SFC8

Table 43:  Card Type Acronyms for 1830 DWDM Devices 

Module Description

Acronym

1830VWM Fan Unit (AA variant)

FANCLIP

Inventory Extension Module

INVMOD

1830VWM EC-DW (AA variant)

EC-DW

1830VWM EC-DW Active (AA variant)

EC-DWA

Remote Filer Modules

1830VWM Remote Filter 8CH (AA VAR)

SFD8A_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 8CH (AB Var)

SFD8B_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 8CH (AC Var)

SFD8C_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 8CH (AD Var)

SFD8D_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AE Var)

SFD4A_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AF Var)

SFD4B_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AG Var)

SFD4C_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AH Var)

SFD4D_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AJ Var)

SFD4E_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AK Var)

SFD4F_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AL Var)

SFD4G_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 4CH (AM Var)

SFD4H_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AN Var)

SFD2A_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AP Var)

SFD2B_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AQ Var)

SFD2C_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AR Var)

SFD2D_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AS Var)

SFD2E_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AT Var)

SFD2F_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AU Var)

SFD2G_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AV Var)

SFD2H_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AW Var)

SFD2I_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (AZ Var)

SFD2L_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (BA Var)

SFD2M_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (BB Var)

SFD2N_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (BC Var)

SFD2O_R

1830VWM Remote Filter 2CH (BD Var)

SFD2P_R

1830 VWM SSY SFD Automatic

2CH (BC Var)

SFD2Q_R

1830 VWM SSY SFD Automatic

2CH (BD Var)

SFD2R_R

DWDM Filters with manual control

1830VWM Manual Filter 8CH (AAVar)

SFD8A

1830VWM Manual Filter 8CH (AB Var)

SFD8B

1830VWM Manual Filter 8CH (AC Var)

SFD8C

1830VWM Manual Filter 8CH (AD Var)

SFD8D

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AE Var)

SFD4A

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AF Var)

SFD4B

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AG Var)

SFD4C

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AH Var)

SFD4D

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AJ Var)

SFD4E

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AK Var)

SFD4F

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AL Var)

SFD4G

1830VWM Manual Filter 4CH (AM Var)

SFD4H

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AN Var)

SFD2A

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AP Var)

SFD2B

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AQ Var)

SFD2C

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AR Var)

SFD2D

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AS Var)

SFD2E

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AT Var)

SFD2F

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AU Var)

SFD2G

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AV Var)

SFD2H

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AWVar)

SFD2I

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AX Var)

SFD2L

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AY Var)

SFD2M

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (AZ Var)

SFD2N

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (BAVar)

SFD2O

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (BB Var)

SFD2P

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (BC Var)

SFD2Q

1830VWM Manual Filter 2CH (BD Var)

SFD2R

Amplifier Modules

1830 VWM Fixed Gain Ampl (AAVar)

EALPFG

Parameters 
card-type—
Specifies an identifier used to match the configured slot module with the equipped slot module. Table 42 and Table 43 provides the list of acronyms that can be used to identify the supported modules usable with the clip-on device.
Values—
SFC1A, SFC1B, SFC1C, SFC1D, SFC1E, SFC1F, SFC1G, SFC1H, SFC2A&B, SFC2C&D, SFC2E&F, SFC2G&H, SFC4A-D, SFC4E-H, SFC8 (CWDM) ANY, EALPFG SFD8A_R, SFD8B_R, SFD8C_R, SFD8D_R, SFD4A_R, SFD4B_R, SFD4C_R, SFD4D_R, SFD4E_R, SFD4F_R, SFD4G_R, SFD4H_R, SFD2A_R, SFD2B_R, SFD2C_R, SFD2D_R, SFD2E_R, SFD2F_R, SFD2G_R, SFD2H_R,SFD2I_R, SFD2L_R, SFD2M_R, SFD2N_R, SFD2O_R, SFD2P_R, SFD2Q_R, SFD2R_R, SFD8A, SFD8B, SFD8C, SFD8D, SFD4A, SFD4B, SFD4C, SFD4D, SFD4E, SFD4F, SFD4G, SFD4H, SFD2A, SFD2B, SFD2C, SFD2D, SFD2E, SFD2F, SFD2G, SFD2H, SFD2I, SFD2L, SFD2M, SFD2N, SFD2O, SFD2P, SFD2Q, SFD2R (DWDM) ascii-string — Can use ASCII alphabets or numbers. Valid card-type acronyms are listed in the Table 43.

 

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>vwm-shelf>card
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allows the user to administratively disable the management of a specific module inserted in a slot on the clip-on device. When this command is executed, the 7210 SAS software clears all pending events/traps/alarms/LED related to this card.

The no form of this command allows the user to administratively enable the management of the card on the clip-on device. The software raises appropriate events/traps/alarms for the card.

Default 

no shutdown

6.12.2.1.3. Virtual Chassis (VC) Configuration Commands

vc-stack

Syntax 
vc-stack
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone-VC and 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command enables the context to configure VC parameters.

vc-stack-node

Syntax 
vc-stack-node slot-number mac-address mac-address [create]
no vc-stack-node slot-number
Context 
config>system>vc-stack
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC) and 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

Description 

This command configures an IMM-only node in a virtual chassis (VC) configuration. This command is performed on the active CPM node in the VC to which the IMM-only node belongs.

An IMM-only node in a VC is identified by its slot-number and its MAC address. The slot number assigned to the node can be an arbitrary number from 1 to 8. It is used in service provisioning to identify ports on a VC member node, and on service objects on those ports. The port on a VC member node is identified using the format slot-id/1/port-id. For example, port 20 on the front panel of a VC member node in slot 4 is identified as 4/1/20; SAPs configured on those ports are identified as 4/1/20:300.

Slot numbers are unique to each VC which are identified by their vc-stack-node, and can be reused across different VCs. The software ensures the uniqueness of the slot number in each VC by raising an error if two nodes in the same VC are assigned the same slot number.

The MAC address used for VC configuration is the chassis MAC address printed on the label of the node. The MAC address of the IMM-only node is also visible using the console connection.

When an IMM-only node boots up, it uses the MAC address and slot number received in the VC discovery messages sent by the CPM node so that it can boot up in VC mode.

The no form of this command removes the IMM-node from the VC.

Parameters 
slot-number—
Specifies the slot assigned to an IMM-only node in a VC.
Values—
1 to 8

 

create—
Keyword to create the node in a VC.
mac-address—
Specifies the chassis MAC address of the IMM-only node.

vc-stack-mac-addr

Syntax 
vc-stack-mac-addr mac-address
no vc-stack-node
Context 
config>system>vc-stack
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC) and 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

Description 

This command configures a MAC address for a VC. This command provides an option to assign a MAC address other than the chassis MAC belonging to the CPM-A node. By assigning the MAC address instead of using the chassis MAC address belonging to the CPM-A node, operators do not need to change the MAC address when the CPM-A card is physically replaced with another card.

The no form of this command reverts the value to the default MAC address specified in the BOF.

Parameters 
mac-address—
Specifies the MAC address of the VC.

6.12.2.1.4. System Alarm Commands

thresholds

Syntax 
thresholds
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure monitoring thresholds.

kb-memory-use-alarm

Syntax 
kb-memory-use-alarm rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no kb-memory-use-warn
Context 
config>system>thresholds
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures memory use, in kilobytes, alarm thresholds.

The no form of this command removes the parameters from the configuration.

Parameters 
rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

Default—
0
Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a falling threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value rises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

Default—
0
Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

interval seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

rmon-event-type—
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds command.
trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

Default—
either

kb-memory-use-warn

Syntax 
kb-memory-use-warn rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no kb-memory-use-warn
Context 
config>system>thresholds
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures memory usage, in kilobytes, for warning thresholds

Parameters 
rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a falling threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value rises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
interval seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

rmon-event-type—
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds command.
trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

Default—
either

cflash-cap-alarm

Syntax 
cflash-cap-alarm cflash-id rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no cflash-cap-alarm cflash-id
Context 
config>system>thresholds
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables capacity monitoring of the compact flash specified in this command. The severity level is alarm. Both a rising and falling threshold can be specified.

The no form of this command removes the configured compact flash threshold alarm.

Parameters 
cflash-id—
Specifies the name of the cflash device to be monitored.
Values—
uf1: (7210 SAS-M)
cf1:, cf2:, uf1: (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp)
cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, uf1:, uf1-A:, uf1-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)
cf1:, cf2: (7210 SAS-S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC)

 

rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value raises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
interval seconds
Specifies the polling period, in seconds, over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

rmon-event-type—
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds command.
trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created.

If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, a single rising threshold crossing event is generated.

If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.

Default—
either
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

cflash-cap-warn

Syntax 
cflash-cap-warn cflash-id rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no cflash-cap-warn cflash-id
Context 
config>system>thresholds
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables capacity monitoring of the compact flash specified in this command. The severity level is warning. Both a rising and falling threshold can be specified.

The no form of this command removes the configured compact flash threshold warning.

Parameters 
cflash-id—
Specifies the name of the cflash device to be monitored.
Values—
uf1: (7210 SAS-M)
cf1:, cf2:, uf1: (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp)
cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, uf1:, uf1-A:, uf1-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)
cf1:, cf2: (7210 SAS-S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC)

 

rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value raises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
interval seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

rmon-event-type—
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds command.
trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

Default—
either

memory-use-alarm

Syntax 
memory-use-alarm rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no memory-use-alarm
Context 
config>system>thresholds
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

The memory thresholds are based on monitoring the TIMETRA-SYSTEM-MIB sgiMemoryUsed object. This object contains the amount of memory currently used by the system. The severity level is Alarm. The absolute sample type method is used.

The no form of this command removes the configured memory threshold warning.

Parameters 
rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

Default—
0
Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value raises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
interval seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

rmon-event-type —
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds CLI command.
trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both a entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

Default—
either

memory-use-warn

Syntax 
memory-use-warn rising-threshold threshold [falling-threshold threshold] interval seconds [rmon-event-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type]
no memory-use-warn
Context 
config>system>thresholds
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

The memory thresholds are based on monitoring MemoryUsed object. This object contains the amount of memory currently used by the system. The severity level is Alarm.

The absolute sample type method is used.

The no form of this command removes the configured compact flash threshold warning.

Parameters 
rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling-threshold value.

Default—
0
Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value raises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

Default—
0
Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

interval seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds.
Values—
1 to 2147483647
 

 

rmon-event-type —
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds CLI command.
trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both a entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

Default—
either

rmon

Syntax 
rmon
Context 
config>system>thresholds
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure generic RMON alarms and events.

Generic RMON alarms can be created on any SNMP object-ID that is valid for RMON monitoring (for example, an integer-based datatype).

The configuration of an event controls the generation and notification of threshold crossing events configured with the alarm command.

alarm

Syntax 
alarm rmon-alarm-id variable-oid oid-string interval seconds [sample-type] [startup-alarm alarm-type] [rising-event rmon-event-id rising-threshold threshold] [falling-event rmon-event-id falling threshold threshold] [owner owner-string]
no alarm rmon-alarm-id
Context 
config>system>thresholds>rmon
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures an entry in the RMON-MIB alarm Table. This command controls the monitoring and triggering of threshold crossing events. In order for notification or logging of a threshold crossing event to occur there must be at least one associated rmon>event configured.

The agent periodically takes statistical sample values from the MIB variable specified for monitoring and compares them to thresholds that have been configured with the alarm command. The alarm command configures the MIB variable to be monitored, the polling period (interval), sampling type (absolute or delta value), and rising and falling threshold parameters. If a sample has crossed a threshold value, the associated event is generated.

The no form of this command removes an rmon-alarm-id from the configuration.

Parameters 
rmon-alarm-id —
Specifies the alarm being configured. The number of alarms that can be created is limited to 1200.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

variable-oid oid-string
Specifies the variable to be sampled. Only SNMP variables that resolve to an ASN.1 primitive type of integer (integer, Integer32, Counter32, Counter64, Gauge, or TimeTicks) may be sampled. The oid-string may be expressed using either the dotted string notation or as object name plus dotted instance identifier. For example, "1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.184582144" or "ifInOctets.184582144".

The oid-string has a maximum length of 255 characters

interval seconds
Specifies the polling period over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds. In the case of delta type sampling, the interval should be set short enough that the sampled variable is very unlikely to increase or decrease by more than 2147483647 - 1 during a single sampling interval. To avoid creating unnecessary processing overhead, the interval value should not be set too low.
Values—
1 to 2147483647

 

sample-type—
Specifies the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds.
Default—
absolute
Values—
absolute — Specifies that the value of the selected variable will be compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval. delta — Specifies that the value of the selected variable at the last sample will be subtracted from the current value, and the difference compared with the thresholds.

 

startup-alarm alarm-type
Specifies the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created. If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold value an startup-alarm is equal to rising or either, a single rising threshold crossing event is generated. If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold value and startup-alarm is equal to falling or either, a single falling threshold crossing event is generated.
Default—
either
Values—
rising, falling, either

 

rising-event rmon-event-id
Specifies the action to be taken when a rising threshold crossing event occurs. If there is no corresponding event configured for the specified rmon-event-id, then no association exists and no action is taken. If the rising-event rmon-event-id has a value of zero (0), no associated event exists.

If a rising-event rmon-event-id is configured, the CLI requires a rising threshold to also be configured.

Default—
0
Values—
0 to 65535

 

rising-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was less than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is greater than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to rising or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value falls below this threshold and reaches less than or equal the falling threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
falling-event rmon-event-id
Specifies the action to be taken when a falling threshold crossing event occurs. If there is no corresponding event configured for the specified rmon-event-id, then no association exists and no action is taken. If the falling-event has a value of zero (0), no associated event exists.

If a falling event is configured, the CLI requires a falling-threshold to also be configured.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
falling-threshold threshold
Specifies a threshold for the sampled statistic. A single threshold crossing event is generated when the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold, and the value at the last sampling interval was greater than this threshold. A single threshold crossing event will also be generated if the first sample taken is less than or equal to this threshold and the associated startup-alarm is equal to falling or either.

After a rising threshold crossing event is generated, another such event will not be generated until the sampled value rises above this threshold and reaches greater than or equal the rising-threshold value.

Values—
–2147483648 to 2147483647

 

Default—
0
owner owner
Specifies the owner. The owner identifies the creator of this alarm. It defaults to “TiMOS CLI”. This parameter is defined primarily to allow entries that have been created in the RMON-MIB alarmTable by remote SNMP managers to be saved and reloaded in a CLI configuration file. The owner will not normally be configured by CLI users and can be a maximum of 80 characters.
Default—
TiMOS CLI

event

Syntax 
event rmon-event-id [event-type] [description description-string] [owner owner-string]
no event rmon-event-id
Context 
config>system>thresholds>rmon
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures an entry in the RMON-MIB event table. The event command controls the generation and notification of threshold crossing events configured with the alarm command. When a threshold crossing event is triggered, the rmon>event configuration optionally specifies if an entry in the RMON-MIB log table should be created to record the occurrence of the event. It may also specify that an SNMP notification (trap) should be generated for the event. The RMON-MIB defines two notifications for threshold crossing events: Rising Alarm and Falling Alarm.

Creating an event entry in the RMON-MIB log table does not create a corresponding entry in the TiMOS event logs. However, when the event-type is set to trap, the generation of a Rising Alarm or Falling Alarm notification creates an entry in the TiMOS event logs and that is distributed to whatever TiMOS log destinations are configured: CONSOLE, session, memory, file, syslog, or SNMP trap destination.

The TiMOS logger message includes a rising or falling threshold crossing event indicator, the sample type (absolute or delta), the sampled value, the threshold value, the rmon-alarm-id, the associated rmon-event-id and the sampled SNMP object identifier.

This no form of this command removes an rmon-event-id from the configuration.

Parameters 
rmon-event-type—
Specifies the type of notification action to be taken when this event occurs.
Values—
log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds command.
trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.
both — Both an entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated.
none — No action is taken.

 

Default—
both
description description-string—
Specifies a user configurable string that can be used to identify the purpose of this event. This is an optional parameter and can be up to 80 characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
owner owner
Specifies the creator of this alarm. This parameter is defined primarily to allow entries that have been created in the RMON-MIB alarmTable by remote SNMP managers to be saved and reloaded in a CLI configuration file. The owner will not normally be configured by CLI users and can be a maximum of 80 characters.
Default—
TiMOS CLI

6.12.2.1.5. PTP Commands

ptp

Syntax 
ptp
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command enables the context to configure parameters for IEEE 1588-2008, Precision Time Protocol.

anno-rx-timeout

Syntax 
anno-rx-timeout count
no anno-rx-timeout
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the PTP Announce Receipt Timeout count in the Announce message.

The no form of this command reverts the count to the default value.

Default 

3

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the PTP Announce Receipt Timeout count.
Values—
2 to 10

 

clock

Syntax 
clock
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the source of frequency reference for PTP.

freq-source

Syntax 
freq-source freq-source
no freq-source
Context 
config>system>ptp>clock
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T

Description 

This command provides a stable frequency reference obtained through one of the line references (SyncE or BITS) for the PTP clock. This is achieved by specifying the frequency source for PTP to be ssu. This mode of operation where PTP is used only for time recovery and SyncE or BITS is used for frequency recovery is known as PTP hybrid mode.

If the frequency reference is set to ssu, PTP is running in hybrid mode (if PTP is also in a no shutdown state), using the recovered frequency provided by the central clock through either of the configured references (SyncE or BITS, whichever is configured as a reference for the central clock). When this parameter is set to ssu, PTP cannot be configured as a reference in the ref-order. The CLI will block this configuration. The reverse is also true; that is, if PTP is configured under ref-order, this parameter cannot be set to ssu.

If set to ptp, PTP is running in pure mode, potentially being configured as a frequency reference in ref-order.

Note:

See Configuration Guidelines and Restrictions for PTP for information on the restrictions when using this command.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

ptp

Parameters 
freq-source—
Specifies whether PTP is used for frequency and time recovery or only for time recovery. If ptp is specified, PTP is used for both frequency and time recovery. If ssu is specified, PTP is used only for time recovery.
Values—
ptp, ssu

 

clock-type

Syntax 
clock-type boundary
clock-type ordinary slave
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the type of clock. The clock-type can only be changed when PTP is shutdown.

When changing the clock-type to or from a boundary clock on the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Mxp, and 7210 SAS-T platforms, the node must be rebooted for the change to take effect. Ensure that measures are taken to minimize service disruption during the reboot process.

Default 

ordinary slave

Parameters 
boundary—
Keyword to configure the clock as a boundary clock capable of functioning as both a master and slave concurrently.
ordinary slave—
Keyword to configure the clock as an ordinary PTP slave.

domain

Syntax 
domain domain
no domain
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the PTP domain.

The no form of this command reverts to the default configuration.The default value is dependent on the configured profile.

The domain cannot be changed unless PTP is shut down.

If the PTP profile is changed, the domain is changed to the default domain for the new PTP profile.

Default 

0 for ieee1588-2008 4 for g8265dot1-2010 24 for g8275dot1-2014

Parameters 
domain—
Specifies the PTP domain.
Values—
0 to 255 for ieee1588-2008 0 to 255 for g8265dot1-2010 24 to 43 for g8275dot1-2014 (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12)

 

local-priority

Syntax 
local-priority priority
Context 
config>system>ptp
config>system>ptp>peer
config>system>ptp>port
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the local priority used to choose between PTP masters in the best master clock algorithm (BMCA). This setting is relevant when the profile is set to g8265dot1-2010 or g8275dot1-2014. The parameter is ignored when the profile is set to ieee1588-2008. The value 1 is the highest priority and 255 is the lowest priority.

For g8265dot1-2010, this command sets the priority to select between master clocks with the same quality.

For g8275dot1-2014, this command sets the value of the localPriority associated with the Announce messages received from the external clocks (ptp>peer or ptp>port), or the local clock (PTP).

Default 

128

Parameters 
priority—
Specifies the value of the local priority.
Values—
1 to 255

 

log-anno-interval

Syntax 
log-anno-interval log-interval
no log-anno-interval
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the PTP Announce interval.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

log-anno-interval 1

Parameters 
log-interval—
Specifies the PTP Announce interval, specified as the logarithm to the base 2, in seconds.
Values—
–3 to 4, where –3 = 0.125 s, –2 = 0.25 s, –1 = 0.5 s, 0 = 1 s, 1 = 2 s, 2 = 4 s, 3 = 8 s, 4 = 16 s

 

log-sync-interval

Syntax 
log-sync-interval values
no log-sync-interval
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the message interval used for transmission of multicast synchronization messages.

This command applies only if the profile is set to ieee1588-2008 or g8265dot1-2010. It does not apply when g8275dot1-2014 is configured. When the profile is set to g8275dot1-2014, the value is set to –4 (16 packets/s) and cannot be changed.

For multicast messages used on PTP Ethernet ports, this command configures the message interval used for synchronization messages transmitted by the local node when the port is in the master state.

The no form of this command reverts the message interval to the default value.

Default 

–6 (64 packets/s) for ieee1588-2008 –6 (64 packets/s) for g8265dot1-2010 –4 (16 packets/s) for g8275dot1-2014

Parameters 
values—
Specifies the message interval, in log form.
Values—
–6 to –3, where –6 = 64 packets/s, –5 = 32 packets/s, –4 = 16 packets/s, –3 = 8 packets/s

 

network-type

Syntax 
network-type {sdh | sonet}
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the codeset to be used for the encoding of QL values into PTP clockClass values when the profile is configured for G.8265.1. The codeset is defined in G.8265.1, Table 1.

This configuration only applies to the range of values observed in the clockClass values transmitted out of the node in Announce messages. The 7210 SAS supports the reception of any valid value in G.8265.1, Table 1.

Default 

sdh

Parameters 
sdh—
Specifies the values used on a G.781 Option 1 compliant network.
sonet—
Specifies the values used on a G.781 Option 2 compliant network.

peer

Syntax 
peer ip-address [create]
no peer ip-address
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command enables the context to configure parameters associated with remote PTP peers.

Up to 20 remote PTP peers can be configured.

The no form of this command deletes the specified peer.

If the clock-type is ordinary slave or boundary, and PTP is not shut down, the last peer cannot be deleted. This prevents the user from having PTP enabled without any peer configured and enabled.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IPv4 address of the remote peer.
Values—
a.b.c.d

 

create—
Keyword to create the peer.

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
configure>system>ptp>peer
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command disables or enables a specific PTP peer. Shutting down a peer sends cancel unicast negotiation messages on any established unicast sessions. When shut down, all received packets from the peer are ignored.

If the clock-type is ordinary slave or boundary, and PTP is not shut down, the last enabled peer cannot be shut down. This prevents the user from having PTP enabled without any peer configured and enabled.

Default 

no shutdown

port

Syntax 
port port-id [create]
no port port-id
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command configures PTP over Ethernet on the physical port. The PTP process transmits and receives PTP messages through the port using Ethernet encapsulation (as opposed to UDP/IPv4 encapsulation).

The frames are transmitted with no VLAN tags even if the port is configured for dot1q or qinq modes for encap-type. In addition, the received frames from the external PTP clock must also be untagged.

There are two reserved multicast addresses allocated for PTP messages, as defined in Annex F IEEE Std 1588-2008 (see the address command for more information). Either address can be configured for the PTP messages sent through this port.

This command applies only if the PTP profile is set to g8275dot1-2014.

Changing the encapsulation or the port type of the Ethernet port is not permitted when PTP Ethernet multicast operation is configured on the port. To change the encapsulation or port type, the physical port must be shut down.

The no form of this command deletes the specified PTP port.

Parameters 
port-id—
Specifies a physical port.
Values—
slot/mda/port

 

create—
Keyword to create the PTP port.

address

Syntax 
address {01:1b:19:00:00:00 | 01:80:c2:00:00:0e}
Context 
config>system>ptp>port
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command configures the MAC address to be used as the multicast destination MAC address for transmitted PTP messages.

This command applies only if the PTP profile is set to g8275dot1-2014.

The IEEE Std 1588-2008 Annex F defines two reserved addresses for PTP messages:

  1. 01-1B-19-00-00-00 — for all messages except peer delay mechanism messages
  2. 01-80-C2-00-00-0E — for peer delay mechanism messages

The system will accept PTP messages received using either destination MAC address, regardless of the address configured by this command.

Default 

01:1b:19:00:00:00

master-only

Syntax 
master-only {true | false}
Context 
config>system>ptp>port
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command prevents the local port from ever entering the slave state. This can be used to ensure that the 7210 SAS never draws synchronization from the attached external device.

This command only applies if the profile is set to g8275dot1-2014.

If the clock-type command is set to ordinary slave, the master-only value is set the false.

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>ptp>port
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command disables or enables a specific PTP port. When shut down, all PTP Ethernet messages are dropped on the IOM. They are not counted in the PTP message statistics. No PTP packets are transmitted by the node toward this port.

If the clock-type is ordinary slave or boundary, and PTP is not shut down, the last enabled port cannot be shut down. This prevents the user from having PTP enabled without any means to synchronize the local clock to a parent clock.

This command only applies if the profile is set to g8275dot1-2014.

Default 

no shutdown

Special Cases 
PTP Protocol Handling—
Applies only to 7210 SAS-Mxp. When the first instance of the PTP protocol is created and the no shutdown command is issued in the base routing instance, resources are allocated to enable CPU processing of the protocol. The resources are deallocated when the last instance is removed from the configuration using the shutdown command.

priority1

Syntax 
priority1 priority-value
no priority1
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the priority1 value of the local clock. This parameter is only used when the profile is set to ieee1588-2008 or This command configures the priority1 value of the local clock. The command applies only if the profile is set to ieee1588-2008. This value is used by the BMCA to determine which clock should provide timing for the network. It is also used as the advertised value in Announce messages and as the local clock value in data set comparisons.This value is used by the BMCA to determine which clock should provide timing for the network

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

128

Parameters 
priority-value—
Specifies the value of the priority1 field.
Values—
0 to 255

 

priority2

Syntax 
priority2 priority-value
no priority2
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the priority2 value of the local clock. This parameter is only used when the profile is set to ieee1588-2008 or g8275dot1-2014. This value is used by the BMCA to determine which clock should provide timing for the network. It is also used as the advertised value in Announce messages and as the local clock value in data set comparisons.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

128

Parameters 
priority-value—
Specifies the value of the priority2 field.
Values—
0 to 255

 

profile

Syntax 
profile {g8265dot1-2010 | ieee1588-2008 | g8275dot1-2014}
Context 
config>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command configures the profile to be used for the internal PTP clock. This principally defines the BMCA behavior.

The profile cannot be changed unless PTP is shut down.

When the profile is changed, the domain is changed to the default value for the new profile. A change of profile requires a reboot of the node on some 7210 SAS platforms. See Configuration Guidelines and Restrictions for PTP for more information.

Default 

ieee1588-2008

Parameters 
g8265dot1-2010
Keyword to conform to the ITU-T G.8265.1 specification.
ieee1588-2008
Keyword to conform to the 2008 version of the IEEE 1588 standard.
g8275dot1-2014
Keyword to conform to the ITU-T G.8275.1 specification; supported only on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12. This keyword is not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

6.12.2.1.6. Date and Time Commands

set-time

Syntax 
set-time [date] [time]
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command sets the local system time.

The time entered should be accurate for the time zone configured for the system. The system will convert the local time to UTC before saving to the system clock which is always set to UTC. This command does not take into account any daylight saving offset if defined.

Parameters 
date
Specifies the local date and time accurate to the minute in the YYYY/MM/DD format.
Values—
YYYY is the four-digit year MM is the two-digit month DD is the two-digit date

 

time
Specifies the time (accurate to the second) in the hh:mm[:ss] format. If no seconds value is entered, the seconds are set to 00.
Values—
hh is the two-digit hour in 24 hour format (00=midnight, 12=noon) mm is the two-digit minute

 

Default—
0

time

Syntax 
time
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the system time zone and time synchronization parameters.

6.12.2.1.6.1. Network Time Protocol Commands

ntp

Syntax 
[no] ntp
Context 
config>system>time
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure Network Time Protocol (NTP) and its operation. This protocol defines a method to accurately distribute and maintain time for network elements. Furthermore this capability allows for the synchronization of clocks between the various network elements.

The no form of this command stops the execution of NTP and removes its configuration.

authentication-check

Syntax 
[no] authentication-check
Context 
config>system>time>ntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command provides the option to skip the rejection of NTP PDUs that do not match the authentication key ID, type or key requirements. The default behavior when authentication is configured is to reject all NTP protocol PDUs that have a mismatch in either the authentication key ID, type or key.

When authentication-check is enabled, NTP PDUs are authenticated on receipt. However, mismatches cause a counter to be increased, one counter for type and one for key ID, one for type, value mismatches. These counters are visible in a show command.

The no form of this command allows authentication mismatches to be accepted; the counters however are maintained.

Default 

authentication-check — rejects authentication mismatches

authentication-key

Syntax 
authentication-key key-id {key key} [hash | hash2] type {des | message-digest}
no authentication-key key-id
Context 
config>system>time>ntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command sets the authentication key ID, type and key used to authenticate NTP PDUs sent to or received by other network elements participating in the NTP protocol. For authentication to work, the authentication key ID, type and key value must match.

The no form of this command removes the authentication key.

Parameters 
key-id—
Specifies the authentication key ID that will be used by the node when transmitting or receiving Network Time Protocol packets.

Entering the authentication-key command with a key ID value that matches an existing configuration key will result in overriding the existing entry.

Recipients of the NTP packets must have the same authentication key ID, type, and key value in order to use the data transmitted by this node. This is an optional parameter.

Values—
1 to 255

 

key—
Specifies the authentication key associated with the configured key ID, the value configured in this parameter is the actual value used by other network elements to authenticate the NTP packet.

The key can be any combination of ASCII characters up to maximum 32 characters for message-digest (MD5) or maximum 8 characters for DES (length limits are not encrypted). If spaces are used in the string, enclose the entire string in quotation marks (“.”).

hash—
Specifies that the key is entered in an encrypted form. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in a non-encrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.
hash2—
Specifies that the key is entered in a more complex encrypted form that involves more variables then the key value alone, this means that hash2 encrypted variable can’t be copied and pasted. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in a non-encrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.
type—
Specifies if DES or message-digest authentication is used.
Values—
des — Specifies that DES authentication is used for this key message-digest — Specifies that MD5 authentication, in accordance with RFC 2104, is used for this key.

 

broadcast

Syntax 
broadcast [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name} [key-id key-id] [version version] [ttl ttl]
no broadcast [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name}
Context 
config>system>time>ntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the node to transmit NTP packets on a given interface. Broadcast and multicast messages can easily be spoofed, thus, authentication is strongly recommended.

The no form of this command removes the address from the configuration.

Parameters 
router—
Specifies the router name used to transmit NTP packets. Base is the default.
Values—
Base, management

 

Default—
Base
ip-int-name—
Specifies the local interface on which to transmit NTP broadcast packets, up to 32 characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
key-id key-id
Specifies the authentication key and authentication type used by this node to receive and transmit NTP packets to and from an NTP server and peers. If an NTP packet is received by this node both authentication key and authentication type must be valid otherwise the packet will be rejected and an event/trap generated.
Values—
1 to 255

 

version version
Specifies the NTP version number that is generated by this node. This parameter does not need to be configured when in client mode in which case all versions will be accepted.
Values—
2 to 4

 

Default—
4
ttl ttl
Specifies the IP Time To Live (TTL) value.
Values—
1 to 255

 

broadcastclient

Syntax 
broadcastclient [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name} [authenticate]
no broadcastclient [router router-name] {interface ip-int-name}
Context 
config>system>time>ntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the node to receive broadcast packets on a given subnet. Broadcast and multicast messages can easily be spoofed, thus, authentication is strongly recommended. If broadcast is not configured then received NTP broadcast traffic will be ignored. Use the show command to view the state of the configuration.

The no form of this command removes the address from the configuration.

Parameters 
router router-name—
Specifies the router name used to receive NTP packets.
Values—
Base, management

 

Default—
Base
interface ip-int-name—
Specifies the local interface on which to receive NTP broadcast packets, up to 32 characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
authenticate—
Specifies whether or not to require authentication of NTP PDUs. When enabled, NTP PDUs are authenticated upon receipt.

ntp-server

Syntax 
ntp-server [authenticate]
no ntp-server
Context 
config>system>time>ntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the node to assume the role of an NTP server. Unless the server command is used, this node will function as an NTP client only and will not distribute the time to downstream network elements.

Default 

no ntp-server

Parameters 
authenticate—
Keyword to make authentication a requirement. If authentication is required, the authentication key ID received in a message must have been configured in the authentication-key command, and that the key ID type and value must also match.

peer

Syntax 
peer ip-address [key-id key-id] [version version] [prefer]
no peer ip-address
Context 
config>system>time>ntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures symmetric active mode for an NTP peer. Although any system can be configured to peer with any other NTP node it is recommended to configure authentication and to configure known time servers as their peers.

The no form of this command removes the configured peer.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IP address of the peer that requires a peering relationship to be set up.
key-id key-id
Specifies the key-id that identifies the configured authentication key and authentication type used by this node to transmit NTP packets to an NTP peer. Successful authentication requires that both peers must have configured the same authentication key ID, type and key value.

If an NTP packet is received by this node, the authentication key ID, type, and key value must be valid otherwise the packet will be rejected and an event/trap generated.

Values—
1 to 255

 

version version
Specifies the NTP version number that is generated by this node. This parameter does not need to be configured when in client mode in which case all three nodes are accepted.
Default—
4
Values—
2 to 4

 

prefer—
Specifies the preferred peer. When configuring more than one peer, one remote system can be configured as the preferred peer. When a second peer is configured as preferred, the new entry overrides the old entry.

server

Syntax 
server {ip address | ptp} [key-id key-id] [version version] [prefer]
no server ip address
Context 
config>system>time>ntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command is used when the node should operate in client mode with the NTP server specified in the address field of this command.

The no form of this command removes the server with the specified address from the configuration.

Up to five NTP servers can be configured.

If the internal PTP process is to be used as a source of time for System Time and OAM time then it must be specified as a server for NTP. If PTP is specified then the prefer parameter must also be specified. Once PTP has established a UTC traceable time from an external grandmaster then it shall always be the source for time into NTP even if PTP goes into time holdover.

Note:

Use of the internal PTP time source for NTP will promote the internal NTP server to stratum 1 level. This may impact the NTP network topology.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IP address of a node that acts as an NTP server to this network element.
Values—
a.b.c.d

 

ptp—
Specifies the internal PTP process as a time server into the NTP process. The prefer parameter is mandatory with this server option.
key-id key-id
Specifies the configured authentication key and authentication type used by this node to transmit NTP packets to an NTP server. If an NTP packet is received by this node, the authentication key ID, type, and key value must be valid otherwise the packet will be rejected and an event/trap generated.
Values—
1 to 255

 

version version
Specifies the NTP version number that is expected by this node.
Default—
4
Values—
2 to 4

 

prefer—
Specifies the preferred peer. When configuring more than one peer, one remote system can be configured as the preferred peer. When a second peer is configured as preferred, the new entry overrides the old entry.

6.12.2.1.6.2. SNTP Commands

sntp

Syntax 
[no] sntp
Context 
config>system>time
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates the context to edit the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP).

SNTP can be configured in either broadcast or unicast client mode. SNTP is a compact, client-only version of the NTP. SNTP can only receive the time from SNTP/NTP servers. It cannot be used to provide time services to other systems.

The system clock is adjusted automatically during system initialization and periodically to ensure that the local time is close to server’s time. However, if the time difference between the SNTP/NTP server and the system clock is more than 2.5 seconds, the software corrects the system time gradually adjusted over an interval.

SNTP is created in an administratively enabled state (no shutdown).

The no form of this command removes the SNTP instance and configuration. SNTP does not need to be administratively disabled when removing the SNTP instance and configuration.

Default 

no sntp

broadcast-client

Syntax 
[no] broadcast-client
Context 
config>system>time>sntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables listening to SNTP/NTP broadcast messages on interfaces with broadcast client enabled at global device level.

If this global parameter is configured, the ntp-broadcast parameter must be configured on selected interfaces on which NTP broadcasts are transmitted.

SNTP must be shutdown prior to changing either to or from broadcast mode.

The no form of this command disables broadcast client mode.

Default 

no broadcast-client

server-address

Syntax 
server-address ip-address [version version-number] [normal | preferred]
[interval seconds]
no server-address
Context 
config>system>time>sntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates an SNTP server for unicast client mode.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IP address of the SNTP server.
version version-number
Specifies the SNTP version supported by this server.
Values—
1 to 3

 

Default—
3
normal | preferred—
Specifies the preference value for this SNTP server. When more than one time-server is configured, one server can have preference over others. The value for that server should be set to preferred. Only one server in the table can be a preferred server.
Default—
normal
interval seconds
Specifies the frequency at which this server is queried.
Values—
64 to 1024

 

Default—
64

6.12.2.1.6.3. CRON Commands

cron

Syntax 
cron
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to create scripts, script parameters and schedules that support the Service Assurance Agent (SAA) functions.

CRON features are saved to the configuration file on both primary and backup control modules. If a control module switchover occurs, CRON events are restored when the new configuration is loaded. If a control module switchover occurs during the execution of a CRON script, the failover behavior will be determined by the contents of the script.

schedule

Syntax 
schedule schedule-name [owner schedule-owner]
[no] schedule
Context 
config>system>cron
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the type of schedule to run, including one-time only (oneshot), periodic or calendar-based runs. All runs are determined by month, day of month or weekday, hour, minute and interval (seconds).

The no form of this command removes the context from the configuration.

Parameters 
schedule-name—
Specifies the name of the schedule.
owner schedule-owner
Specifies the owner name of the schedule.

count

Syntax 
count number
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the total number of times a CRON interval schedule is run. For example, if the interval is set to 600 and the count is set to 4, the schedule runs 4 times at 600 second intervals.

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the number of times the schedule is run.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

Default—
65535

day-of-month

Syntax 
day-of-month {day-number [..day-number] all}
[no] day-of-month
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies which days of the month that the schedule will occur. Multiple days of the month can be specified. When multiple days are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to trigger. If a day-of-month is configured without configuring the month, weekday, hour and minute commands, the event will not execute.

Using the weekday command as well as the day-of-month command will cause the script to run twice. For example, consider that “today” is Monday January 1. If “Tuesday January 5” is configured, the script will run on Tuesday (tomorrow) as well as January 5 (Friday).

See the month, weekday, hour, and minute commands for more information.

The no form of this command removes the specified day-of-month from the list.

Parameters 
day-number—
Specifies the day. The positive integers specify the day of the month counting from the first of the month. The negative integers specify the day of the month counting from the last day of the month. For example, configuring day-of-month -5, 5 in a month that has 31 days will specify the schedule to occur on the 27th and 5th of that month.

Integer values must map to a valid day for the month in question. For example, February 30 is not a valid date.

Values—
1 to 31, -31 to -1 (maximum 62 day-numbers)

 

all —
Specifies all days of the month.

end-time

Syntax 
end-time [date | day-name] time
[no] end-time
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command is used concurrently with type periodic or calendar. Using the type of periodic, end-time determines at which interval the schedule will end. Using the type of calendar, end-time determines on which date the schedule will end.

When no end-time is specified, the schedule runs forever.

Parameters 
date—
Specifies the date to schedule a command.
Values—
YYYY:MM:DD in year:month:day number format

 

day-name—
Specifies the day of the week to schedule a command.
Values—
sunday, monday, tuesday, wednesday, thursday, friday, saturday

 

time—
Specifies the time of day to schedule a command.
Values—
hh:mm in hour:minute format

 

hour

Syntax 
hour {..hour-number [..hour-number] | all}
[no] hour
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies which hour to schedule a command. Multiple hours of the day can be specified. When multiple hours are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to trigger. The day-of-month or weekday must also be specified. All days of the month or weekdays can be specified. If an hour is configured without configuring the month, weekday, day-of-month and minute commands, the event will not execute. See the month, weekday, day-of-month, and minute commands for more information.

The no form of this command removes the specified hour from the configuration.

Parameters 
hour-number—
Specifies the hour to schedule a command.
Values—
0 to 23 (maximum 24 hour-numbers)

 

all—
Specifies all hours.

interval

Syntax 
interval seconds
[no] interval
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies the interval between runs of an event.

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the interval, in seconds, between runs of an event.
Values—
30 to 4,294,967,295

 

minute

Syntax 
minute {minute-number [..minute-number]| all}
[no] minute
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies the minute to schedule a command. Multiple minutes of the hour can be specified. When multiple minutes are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to occur. If a minute is configured, but no hour or day is configured, the event will not execute. If a minute is configured without configuring the month, weekday, day-of-month and hour commands, the event will not execute.

See the month, weekday, day-of-month, and hour commands for more information.

The no form of this command removes the specified minute from the configuration.

Parameters 
minute-number—
Specifies the minute to schedule a command.
Values—
0 to 59 (maximum 60 minute-numbers)

 

all —
Specifies all minutes.

month

Syntax 
month {month-number [..month-number] | month-name [..month-name] | all}
no month
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies the month when the event should be executed. Multiple months can be specified. When multiple months are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to trigger. If a month is configured without configuring the weekday, day-of-month, hour, and minute commands, the event will not execute.

See the weekday, day-of-month, hour and minute commands for more information.

The no form of this command removes the specified month from the configuration.

Parameters 
month-number—
Specifies a month by number.
Values—
1 to 12 (maximum 12 month-numbers)

 

all —
Specifies all months.
month-name—
Specifies a month by name.
Values—
january, february, march, april, may, june, july, august, september, october, november, december (maximum 12 month names)

 

type

Syntax 
type {schedule-type}
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies how the system should interpret the commands contained within the schedule node.

Parameters 
schedule-type—
Specifies the type of schedule for the system to interpret the commands contained within the schedule node.
Values—
periodic — Specifies a schedule which runs at a given interval. The interval must be specified for this feature to run successfully.
calendar — Specifies a schedule which runs based on a calendar. The month, weekday, day-of-month, hour, and minute must be specified for this feature to run successfully. oneshot — Specifies a schedule which runs one time only. As soon as the first event specified in these parameters takes place and the associated event occurs, the schedule enters a shutdown state. month, weekday, day-of-month, hour, and minute must be specified for this feature to run successfully.
See interval, month, weekday, day-of-month, hour and minute for more information.

 

Default—
periodic

weekday

Syntax 
weekday {weekday-number [..weekday-number]|day-name [..day-name]| all}
no weekday
Context 
config>system>cron>sched
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies which days of the week that the schedule will fire on. Multiple days of the week can be specified. When multiple days are configured, each of them will cause the schedule to occur. If a weekday is configured without configuring the month, day-of-month, hour, and minute commands, the event will not execute.

See the month, day-of-month, hour and minute commands for more information.

Using the weekday command as well as the day-of month command will cause the script to run twice. For example, consider that “today” is Monday January 1. If “Tuesday January 5” is configured, the script will run on Tuesday (tomorrow) as well as January 5 (Friday).

The no form of this command removes the specified weekday from the configuration.

Parameters 
day-number—
Specifies a weekday by number.
Values—
1 to 7 (maximum 7 week-day-numbers)

 

day-name—
Specifies a day by name.
Values—
sunday, monday, tuesday, wednesday, thursday, friday, saturday (maximum 7 weekday names)

 

all—
Specifies all days of the week.

6.12.2.1.6.4. Time Range Commands

time-range

Syntax 
time-range name [create]
no time-range
Context 
config>system>cron
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures a time range.

The no form of this command removes the name of the time-range from the configuration.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies a name for the time range, up to 32 characters.

absolute

Syntax 
absolute start start-absolute-time end end-absolute-time
no absolute
Context 
config>system>cron>time-range
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures an absolute time interval that will not repeat.

The no form of this command removes the absolute time range from the configuration.

Parameters 
start absolute-time
Specifies starting parameters for the absolute time-range.
Values—
absolute-time year/month/day,hh:mm year — 2005 to 2099 month — 1 to 12 day — 1 to 31 hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

end absolute-time
Specifies end parameters for the absolute time-range.
Values—
absolute-time year/month/day,hh:mm year — 2005 to 2099 month — 1 to 12 day — 1 to 31 hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

daily

Syntax 
daily start start-time-of-day end end-time-of-day
no daily start
Context 
config>system>cron>time-range
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the start and end of a schedule for every day of the week. To configure a daily time-range across midnight, use a combination of two entries. An entry that starts at hour zero will take over from an entry that ends at hour 24.

The no form of this command removes the daily time parameters from the configuration.

Parameters 
start-time-of-day—
Specifies the starting time for the time range.
Values—
start-time-of-dayhh:mm hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

end-time-of-day—
Specifies the ending time for the time range.
Values—
end-time-of-dayhh:mm hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

weekdays

Syntax 
weekdays start start-time-of-day end end-time-of-day
no weekdays start
Context 
config>system>cron>time-range
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the start and end of a weekday schedule.

The no form of this command removes the weekday parameters from the configuration.

Parameters 
start-time-of-day—
Specifies the starting time for the time range.
Values—
start-time-of-dayhh:mm hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

end-time-of-day—
Specifies the ending time for the time range.
Values—
end-time-of-dayhh:mm hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

weekend

Syntax 
weekend start start-time-of-day end end-time-of-day
no weekend start
Context 
config>system>cron>time-range
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures a time interval for every weekend day in the time range.

The resolution must be at least one minute apart; for example, start at 11:00 and end at 11:01. An 11:00 start and end time is invalid. This example configures a start at 11:00 and an end at 11:01 on both Saturday and Sunday.

The no form of this command removes the weekend parameters from the configuration.

Parameters 
start-time-of-day—
Specifies the starting time for the time range.
Values—
start-time-of-dayhh:mm hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

end-time-of-day—
Specifies the ending time for the time range.
Values—
end-time-of-dayhh:mm hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

weekly

Syntax 
weekly start start-time-in-week end end-time-in-week
no weekly start
Context 
config>system>cron>time-range
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures a weekly periodic interval in the time range.

This command configures the start and end of a schedule for the same day every week; for example, every Friday. The start and end dates must be the same. The resolution must be at least one minute apart, for example, start at 11:00 and end at 11:01. A start time and end time of 11:00 is invalid.

The no form of this command removes the weekly parameters from the configuration.

Default 

no time-range

Parameters 
start start-time-in-week—
Specifies the start day and time of the week.
Values—
start-time-in-weekday,hh:mm
day — sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, sat             sunday, monday, tuesday, wednesday, thursday, friday,              saturday hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

end end-time-in-week—
Specifies the end day and time of the week.
Values—
end-time-in-weekday,hh:mm
day — sun, mon, tue, wed, thu, fri, sat             sunday, monday, tuesday, wednesday, thursday, friday,              saturday hh — 0 to 23 mm — 0 to 59

 

6.12.2.1.6.5. Time of Day Commands

tod-suite

Syntax 
tod-suite tod-suite name create
no tod-suite
Context 
config>system>cron
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to modify time of day (TOD) parameters.

Default 

no tod-suite

egress

Syntax 
egress
Context 
config>system>cron>tod-suite
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the TOD suite egress parameters.

ingress

Syntax 
ingress
Context 
config>system>cron>tod-suite
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the TOD suite ingress parameters.

filter

Syntax 
filter ipip-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
no filter ip ip-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
filter ipv6ipv6-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
no filter ipv6 ipv6-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
filter macmac-filter-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
no filter mac mac-filter-id [time-range time-range-name]
Context 
config>system>cron>tod-suite>egress
config>system>cron>tod-suite>ingress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates time-range based associations of previously created filter policies. Multiple policies may be included and each must be assigned a different priority; in case time-ranges overlap, the priority will be used to determine the prevailing policy. Only a single reference to a policy may be included without a time-range.

Parameters 
ip-filter ip-filter-id
Specifies an IP filter for this tod-suite.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

ipv6-filter ip-filter-id
Specifies an IPv6 filter for this tod-suite.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

time-range time-range-name
Specifies a name for the time-range, up to 32 characters. If the time-range is not populated the system will assume the assignment to mean “all times”. Only one entry without a time-range is allowed for every type of policy. The system does not allow the user to specify more than one policy with the same time-range and priority.
priority priority
Specifies the priority of the time-range. Only one time-range assignment of the same type and priority is allowed.
Values—
1 to 10

 

mac mac-filter-id
Specifies a MAC filter for this tod-suite.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

qos

Syntax 
qos policy-id [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
no qos policy-id [time-range time-range-name]
Context 
config>system>cron>tod-suite>ingress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates time-range based associations of previously created QoS policies. Multiple policies may be included and each must be assigned a different priority; in case time-ranges overlap, the priority will be used to determine the prevailing policy. Only a single reference to a policy may be included without a time-range.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Parameters 
policy-id—
Specifies an egress QoS policy for this tod-suite.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

time-range time-range-name
Specifies a name for the time-range, up to 32 characters. If the time-range is not populated the system will assume the assignment to mean “all times”. Only one entry without a time-range is allowed for every type of policy. The system does not allow the user to specify more than one policy with the same time-range and priority.
Default—
"NO-TIME-RANGE" policy
priority priority
Specifies the priority of the time-range. Only one time-range assignment of the same type and priority is allowed.
Values—
1 to 10

 

Default—
5

scheduler-policy

Syntax 
[no] scheduler-policy scheduler-policy-name [time-range time-range-name] [priority priority]
Context 
config>system>cron>tod-suite>egress
config>system>cron>tod-suite>ingress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates time-range based associations of previously created scheduler policies. Multiple policies may be included and each must be assigned a different priority; in case time-ranges overlap, the priority will be used to determine the prevailing policy. Only a single reference to a policy may be included without a time-range.

Parameters 
scheduler-policy-name—
Specifies a scheduler policy for this tod-suite, up to 32 characters.
time-range time-range-name
Specifies the name of the time-range, up to 32 characters. If the time-range is not populated the system will assume the assignment to mean “all times”. Only one entry without a time-range is allowed for every type of policy. The system does not allow the user to specify more than one policy and the same time-range and priority.
priority priority
Specifies the time-range priority. Only one time-range assignment of the same type and priority is allowed.
Values—
1 to 10

 

6.12.2.1.6.6. Script Control Commands

script-control

Syntax 
script-control
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the script and script parameters.

script

Syntax 
script script-name [owner script-owner]
no script
Context 
config>system>script-control>script-policy
config>system>script-control
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command is used to configure a script to be run.

The no form of this command removes the script.

Default 

no script

Parameters 
script-name—
Specifies the name of the script, up to 32 characters.
script-owner
Specifies the name of the script owner, up to 32 characters.

The owner is an arbitrary name and not necessarily a user name. Commands in the scripts are not authorized against the owner.

Default—
“TiMOS CLI”

location

Syntax 
location file-url
no location
Context 
config>system>script-control>script
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command is used to identify the location of a script to be scheduled.

The no form of this command removes the location.

Default 

no location

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the location to search for scripts.
Values—
file-url — local-url | remote-url
local-url — [cflash-id/] [file-path]
                  255 chars maximum, including cflash-id                   directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote url — [{ftp:// | tftp://}| login:password@remote-location/][file-                     path]
                     255 characters maximum
                     directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote-location — [hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address]
                              ipv4-address — a.b.c.d
                              ipv6-address — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]
                                                        x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]
                                                        x — 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
                                                        d — 0 to 255 (decimal)
                              interface — 32 characters maximum, for link                               local addresses
cflash-id — cf1:
usb-flash-id — uf1:

 

script-policy

Syntax 
[no] script-policy policy-name [owner policy-owner]
Context 
config>system>script-control
config>system>cron>schedule
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure script policy parameters for a script.

Parameters 
policy-name—
Specifies the name of the policy, up to 32 characters.
policy-owner
Specifies the name of the policy owner, up to 32 characters.

The owner is an arbitrary name and not necessarily a user name. Commands in the scripts are not authorized against the owner.

Default—
“TiMOS CLI”

expire-time

Syntax 
expire-time {seconds | forever}
Context 
config>system>script-control>script-policy
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command is used to configure the maximum length of time to keep the run history status entry from a script run.

Default 

expire-time 3600

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the time to keep the run history status entry, in seconds.
Values—
0 to 21474836

 

forever—
Keyword to run the history status entry indefinitely.

lifetime

Syntax 
lifetime {seconds | forever}
Context 
config>system>script-control>script-policy
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command is used to configure the maximum length of time that a script may run.

Default 

lifetime 3600

Parameters 
seconds—
Specifies the maximum amount of time that a script may run, in seconds.
Values—
0 to 21474836

 

forever—
Keyword to allow a script to run indefinitely.

max-completed

Syntax 
max-completed unsigned
Context 
config>system>script-control>script-policy
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables user to configure the maximum number of scripts to keep the run history status entries.

Default 

max-completed 1

Parameters 
unsigned—
Specifies the maximum number of script run history status entries to keep.
Values—
1 to 1500

 

results

Syntax 
results file-url
no results
Context 
config>system>script-control>script-policy
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies the location where the system writes the output of an event script’s execution.

The no form of this command removes the file location from the configuration. Scripts will not execute if there is no result location defined.

Default 

no results

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the location to send the CLI output from script runs. The file-url is a location, directory, and filename prefix to which a data and timestamp suffix is added when the results files are created during a script run, as follows:

file-url_YYYYMMDD-hhmmss.uuuuuu.out

where: YYYYMMDD — date

            hhmmss — hours, minutes, and seconds

            uuuuuu — microseconds (padded to 6 characters with leading zeros)

Values—
file-url — local-url | remote-url
local-url — [cflash-id/] [file-path]
                  255 chars maximum, including cflash-id                   directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote url — [{ftp:// | tftp://}| login:password@remote-location/][file-                      path]
                     255 characters maximum
                     directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote-location — [hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address]
                              ipv4-address — a.b.c.d
                              ipv6-address — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]
                                                        x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]
                                                        x — 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
                                                        d — 0 to 255 (decimal)
                              interface — 32 characters maximum, for link                               local addresses
cflash-id — cf1:
usb-flash-id — uf1:

 

6.12.2.1.6.7. System Time Commands

dst-zone

Syntax 
[no] dst-zone [std-zone-name | non-std-zone-name]
Context 
config>system>time
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the start and end dates and offset for summer time or daylight savings time to override system defaults or for user defined time zones.

When configured, the time is adjusted by adding the configured offset when summer time starts and subtracting the configured offset when summer time ends.

If the time zone configured is listed in Table 28, the starting and ending parameters and offset do not need to be configured with this command unless it is necessary to override the system defaults. The command returns an error if the start and ending dates and times are not available either in Table 28 on or entered as optional parameters in this command.

Up to five summer time zones may be configured, for example, for five successive years or for five different time zones. Configuring a sixth entry will return an error message. If no summer (daylight savings) time is supplied, it is assumed no summer time adjustment is required.

The no form of this command removes a configured summer (daylight savings) time entry.

Parameters 
std-zone-name—
Specifies the standard time zone name. The standard name must be a system-defined zone in Table 28. For zone names in the table that have an implicit summer time setting, for example MDT for Mountain Daylight Saving Time, the remaining start-date, end-date and offset parameters need to be provided unless it is necessary to override the system defaults for the time zone.
Values—
ADT, AKDT, CDT, CEST, EDT, EEST, MDT, PDT, WEST, NDT, NZDT

 

non-std-zone-name—
Specifies the non-standard time zone name, up to 5 characters. See zone for more information about creating a user-defined name.

end

Syntax 
end {end-week} {end-day} {end-month} [hours-minutes]
Context 
config>system>time>dst-zone
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures start of summer time settings.

Parameters 
end-week—
Specifies the starting week of the month when the summer time will end.
Values—
first, second, third, fourth, last

 

Default—
first
end-day—
Specifies the starting day of the week when the summer time will end.
Values—
sunday, monday, tuesday, wednesday, thursday, friday, saturday

 

Default—
sunday
end-month—
Specifies the starting month of the year when the summer time will take effect.
Values—
january, february, march, april, may, june, july, august, september, october, november, december

 

Default—
january
hours—
Specifies the hour at which the summer time will end.
Values—
0 to 24

 

Default—
0
minutes—
Specifies the number of minutes, after the hours defined by the hours parameter, when the summer time will end.
Values—
0 to 59

 

Default—
0

offset

Syntax 
offset offset
Context 
config>system>time>dst-zone
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies the number of minutes that will be added to the time when summer time takes effect. The same number of minutes will be subtracted from the time when the summer time ends.

Parameters 
offset—
Specifies the number of minutes added to the time at the beginning of summer time and subtracted at the end of summer time, expressed as an integer.
Default—
60
Values—
0 to 60

 

start

Syntax 
start {start-week} {start-day} {start-month} [hours-minutes]
Context 
config>system>time>dst-zone
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures start of summer time settings.

Parameters 
start-week—
Specifies the starting week of the month when the summer time will take effect.
Values—
first, second, third, fourth, last

 

Default—
first
start-day—
Specifies the starting day of the week when the summer time will take effect.
Values—
sunday, monday, tuesday, wednesday, thursday, friday, saturday

 

Default—
sunday
start-month—
Specifies the starting month of the year when the summer time will take effect.
Values—
january, february, march, april, may, june, july, august, september, october, november, december

 

Default—
january
hours—
Specifies the hour at which the summer time will take effect.
Values—
0 to 23

 

Default—
0
minutes—
Specifies the number of minutes, after the hours defined by the hours parameter, when the summer time will take effect.
Values—
0 to 59

 

Default—
0

zone

Syntax 
zone [std-zone-name | non-std-zone-name] [hh [:mm]]
no zone
Context 
config>system>time
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command sets the time zone and time zone offset for the device.

The OS supports system-defined and user-defined time zones. The system-defined time zones are listed in Table 28.

For user-defined time zones, the zone and the UTC offset must be specified.

The no form of this command reverts to the default of Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If the time zone in use was a user-defined time zone, the time zone will be deleted. If a dst-zone command has been configured that references the zone, the summer commands must be deleted before the zone can be reset to UTC.

Default 

zone utc

Parameters 
std-zone-name—
Specifies the standard time zone name. The standard name must be a system-defined zone, listed in Table 28. For zone names in the table that have an implicit summer time setting, for example MDT for Mountain Daylight Saving Time, the remaining start-date, end-date and offset parameters need to be provided unless it is necessary to override the system defaults for the time zone.

For system-defined time zones, a different offset cannot be specified. If a new time zone is needed with a different offset, the user must create a new time zone. Note that some system-defined time zones have implicit summer time settings which causes the switchover to summer time to occur automatically; configuring the dst-zone parameter is not required.

Values—
MT, WET, CET, EET, MSK, MSD, AST, NST, EST, CST, MST, PST, HST, AKST, AWST, ACST, AEST, NZST, UTC

 

non-std-zone-name—
Specifies the non-standard time zone name, up to 5 characters.
hh [:mm]
Specifies the hours and minutes offset from UTC time, expressed as integers. Some time zones do not have an offset that is an integral number of hours. In these instances, the minutes-offset must be specified. For example, the time zone in Pirlanngimpi, Australia UTC + 9.5 hours.
Values—
hh — -11 to 12 mm — 0 to 59

 

Default—
hh — 0 mm — 0

6.12.2.1.7. System Synchronization Commands

sync-if-timing

Syntax 
sync-if-timing
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to create or modify timing reference parameters.

abort

Syntax 
abort
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command discards changes that have been made to the synchronous interface timing configuration during a session.

begin

Syntax 
begin
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command creates or edits the system synchronous interface timing configuration.

bits1

Syntax 
bits1
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to configure parameters for the Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).

Note:

  1. The 7210 SAS-R6 supports the configuration of only the BITS1 interface for use as an input or output reference. The 7210 SAS-R12 has only a single BITS port on the front panel, unlike the 7210 SAS-R6, which has two ports. Therefore, this command is invalid for the 7210 SAS-R12.
  2. The 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp allow for configuration of both BITS1 and BITS2 interface as an input and output reference.
  3. On the 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp, the BITS1 configuration parameters such as bits-interface-type, line-length, and source-reference are inherited for BITS2 interface. CLI commands are available that provide the user an option to administratively control the BITS2 interface, allowing them to shutdown or enable the BITS2 input and output independently of BITS1 interface. Read the other commands for more information.

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1>input
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1>output
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command administratively disables the entity. When disabled, an entity does not change, reset, or remove any configuration settings or statistics.

The operational state of the entity is disabled as well as the operational state of any entities contained within. Many objects must be shut down before they may be deleted.

The no form of this command places the entity into an administratively enabled state.

Default 

no shutdown

bits2

Syntax 
bits2
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink) and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command enables the context to configure parameters for the Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).

Note:

  1. The 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 only support the configuration of the BITS1 interface for use as an input or output reference.
  2. The 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp support the configuration of both BITS1 and BITS2 interface as an input and output reference.
  3. On the 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp, the BITS1 configuration parameters such as bits-interface-type, line-length, source-reference, and so on, are inherited for the BITS2 interface. CLI commands are available to administratively control the BITS2 interface, allowing the user to shutdown or enable the BITS2 input and output independently of the BITS1 interface.

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits2>input
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits2>output
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink) and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command administratively disables the entity. When disabled, an entity does not change, reset, or remove any configuration settings or statistics.

The operational state of the entity is disabled as well as the operational state of any entities contained within. Many objects must be shut down before they may be deleted.

The no form of this command places the entity into an administratively enabled state.

Default 

no shutdown

input

Syntax 
input
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits2
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the external BITS timing reference input from the node. The user has the option to enable or disable the BITS interface input independently of each other.

Note:

  1. The 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 only support the configuration of the BITS1 interface for use as an input or output reference.
  2. The 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp support the configuration of both BITS1 and BITS2 interface as an input and output reference.
  3. On the 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp, the BITS1 configuration parameters such as bits-interface-type, line-length and source-reference are inherited for the BITS2 interface. CLI commands are available to administratively control the BITS2 interface, allowing the user to shutdown or enable the BITS2 input and output independently of the BITS1 interface.

output

Syntax 
output
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits2
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the external BITS timing reference output from the node. The user has the option to enable or disable the BITS interface output independently of each other.

Note:

  1. The 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 only support the configuration of the BITS1 interface for use as an input or output reference.
  2. The 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp support the configuration of both BITS1 and BITS2 interface as an input and output reference.
  3. On the 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp, the BITS1 configuration parameters such as bits-interface-type, line-length, source-reference, and so on, are inherited for the BITS2 interface. CLI commands are available to administratively control the BITS2 interface, allowing the user to shutdown or enable the BITS2 input and output independently of the BITS1 interface.

interface-type

Syntax 
interface-type {ds1 [{esf | sf}] | e1 [{pcm30crc | pcm31crc}]}
no interface-type
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the BITS port to support one of the available interface types, through T1/DS1 or E1 synchronization interface and the desired framing with that interface type.

Note:

On the 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp, BITS2 inherits the values configured for BITS1.

The no form of this command reverts to the default configuration.

Default 

ds1 esf

Parameters 
ds1 esf—
Specifies Extended Super Frame (ESF). This is a framing type used on DS1 circuits that consists of 24 192-bit frames, The 193rd bit provides timing and other functions.
ds1 sf—
Specifies Super Frame (SF), also called D4 framing. This is a common framing type used on DS1 circuits. SF consists of 12 192-bit frames. The 193rd bit provides error checking and other functions. ESF supersedes SF.
e1 pcm30crc—
Specifies the pulse code modulation (PCM) type. PCM30CRC uses PCM to separate the signal into 30 user channels with CRC protection.
e1 pcm31crc—
Specifies the pulse code modulation (PCM) type. PCM31CRC uses PCM to separate the signal into 31 user channels with CRC protection.

line-length

Syntax 
line-length {110, 220, 330, 440, 550, 660}
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1>output
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command configures the line-length parameter of the BITS output. This is the distance in feet between the network element and the office clock (BITS/SSU).

This command is only applicable when the BITS interface-type is DS1.

Note:

On the 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp, BITS2 inherits the values configured for BITS1.

Default 

110

Parameters 
110—
Specifies that the distance is from 0 to 110 feet.
220—
Specifies that the distance is from 110 to 220 feet.
330—
Specifies that the distance is from 220 to 330 feet.
440—
Specifies that the distance is from 330 to 440 feet.
550—
Specifies that the distance is from 440 to 550 feet.
660—
Specifies that the distance is from 550 to 660 feet.

ssm-bit

Syntax 
ssm-bit sa-bit
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command configures which sa-bit to use for conveying SSM information when the BITS interface-type is E1.

SSM is not available when the BITS interface-type is either T1/DS1 SF synchronization interface.

Note:

On the 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp, BITS2 inherits the values configured for BITS1.

Default 

8

Parameters 
sa-bit—
Specifies the sa-bit value.
Values—
4 to 8

 

commit

Syntax 
commit
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command saves changes made to the system synchronous interface timing configuration.

ptp

Syntax 
ptp
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone), 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command enables the context to configure parameters for system timing via IEEE 1588-2008, Precision Time Protocol.

This command is only available on the systems supporting the 1588-2008 frequency recovery engine.

ql-override

Syntax 
ql-override {prs | stu | st2 | tnc | st3e | st3 | sec | prc | ssu-a | ssu-b}
no ql-override
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>ptp
config>system>sync-if-timing>ref1
config>system>sync-if-timing>ref2
config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 
Note:

  1. The config>system>sync-if-timing>ptp context is not supported on 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE and 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE platforms.
  2. The config>system>sync-if-timing>bits1 context is not supported on 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-M platforms.

This command configures the QL value to be used for the reference for SETS input selection and BITS output. This value overrides any value received by that reference's SSM process.

Default 

no ql-override

Parameters 
prs—
Specifies the SONET Primary Reference Source Traceable.
stu—
Specifies the SONET Synchronous Traceability Unknown.
st2—
Specifies the SONET Stratum 2 Traceable.
tnc—
Specifies the SONET Transit Node Clock Traceable.
st3e—
Specifies the SONET Stratum 3E Traceable.
st3—
Specifies the SONET Stratum 3 Traceable.
prc—
Specifies the SDH Primary Reference Clock Traceable.
ssu-a—
Specifies the SDH Primary Level Synchronization Supply Unit Traceable.
ssu-b—
Specifies the SDH Second Level Synchronization Supply Unit Traceable.
sec—
Specifies the SDH Synchronous Equipment Clock Traceable.

ql-selection

Syntax 
[no] ql-selection
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command specifies that the selection of system timing reference and BITS output timing reference (if available on the platform) takes into account quality level. This command turns-on or turns-off SSM encoding as a means of timing reference selection.

Default 

no ql-selection

ref-order

Syntax 
ref-order first second third [fourth] [fifth]
ref-order ptp
no ref-order
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command organizes the priority order of the timing references. The synchronous equipment timing subsystem can lock to different timing reference inputs, those specified in the ref1, ref2 and ptp command configuration.

If a reference source is disabled, the clock from the next reference source as defined by ref-order is used. If all reference sources are disabled, then clocking is derived from a local oscillator.

If a sync-if-timing reference is linked to a source port that is operationally down, the port is no longer qualified as a valid reference. Depending on the platform used, either SFP or Fixed copper ports can be used as a reference.

Note:

  1. On the 7210 SAS-M, if PTP is specified as reference, the other reference cannot be specified as syncE. That is, use of PTP and syncE as a reference is mutually exclusive.
  2. On the 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12, all three timing references can be enabled at the same time. In other words, it is allowed to specify the syncE and PTP references simultaneously. Only syncE and BITS are allowed as a reference.
  3. The third, fourth, and fifth parameters are not supported on the 7210 SAS-M.
  4. The 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone) only supports the first and second parameters and it is allowed to specify the syncE and PTP references simultaneously.
  5. The7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC) and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (standalone-VC) only support first and second parameters.

The no form of this command reverts the reference order to the default values.

Default 

bits1 bits2 ref1 ref2 (7210 SAS-Mxp)

ref1 ref2 ptp bits1 bits2 (7210 SAS-T)

ref1 ref2 (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)

bits1 ref1 ref2 ptp (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

Parameters 
first—
Specifies the first timing reference to use in the reference order sequence.
second—
Specifies the second timing reference to use in the reference order sequence.
third—
Specifies the third timing reference to use in the reference order sequence. This parameter is supported only on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12 devices.
fourth—
Specifies the fourth timing reference to use in the reference order sequence. This parameter is supported only on 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12 devices.
fifth—
Specifies the fifth timing reference to use in the reference order sequence. This parameter is supported only on 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp devices.
ptp—
Specifies that PTP must be used as a timing reference.

ref1

Syntax 
ref1
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure parameters for the first timing reference.

ref2

Syntax 
ref2
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure parameters for the second timing reference.

revert

Syntax 
[no] revert
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command allows the clock to revert to a higher priority reference if the current reference goes offline or becomes unstable.

If revertive switching is enabled, the highest-priority valid timing reference will be used. If a reference with a higher priority becomes valid, a reference switch over to that reference will be initiated. If a failure on the current reference occurs, the next highest reference takes over.

If non-revertive switching is enabled, the valid active reference always remains selected, even if a higher-priority reference becomes available. If this reference becomes invalid, a reference switch over to a valid reference with the highest priority will be initiated. When the failed reference becomes operational, it is eligible for selection.

Default 

no revert

source-port

Syntax 
source-port port-id
no source-port
Context 
config>system>sync-if-timing>ref1
config>system>sync-if-timing>ref2
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command configures the source port for timing reference ref1 or ref2. If the port is unavailable or the link is down, the reference sources are reevaluated according to the reference order configured using the ref-order command.

The no form of this command deletes the source port from the reference.

Parameters 
port-id—
Specifies the physical port.
Values—
slot/mda/port

 

6.12.2.1.8. Generic Commands

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>time>sntp
config>system>lldp
config>system>sync-if-timing>ptp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 
Note:

The config>system>sync-if-timing>ptp context is not supported on 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE-Sx 10/100GE and 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE platforms.

This command administratively disables an entity. When disabled, an entity does not change, reset, or remove any configuration settings or statistics.

The operational state of the entity is disabled as well as the operational state of any entities contained within. Many objects must be shut down before they may be deleted.

The no form of this command administratively enables an entity.

Unlike other commands and parameters where the default state is not indicated in the configuration file, the shutdown and no shutdown states are always indicated in system generated configuration files.

The no form of this command places an entity in an administratively enabled state.

description

Syntax 
description description-string
no description
Context 
config>system>time>sntp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

The command creates a string that can be used to identify the purpose of this event. This is an optional parameter and can be 80 characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

6.12.2.1.9. System Administration Commands

admin

Syntax 
admin
Context 
<root>
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command enables the context to configure administrative system commands. Only authorized users can execute the commands in the admin context.

check-golden-bootstrap

Syntax 
check-golden-bootstrap
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command validates the current golden bootstrap image, and displays its version, if found to be valid. If the golden bootstrap image is not found to be a valid, an error message is displayed to that effect.

auto-init

Syntax 
auto-init stop
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command specifies that the system saves the BOF with the BOF parameter primary-image pointing to the both.tim on the local flash. When the system boots up for the first-time, auto-init can potentially use the TiMOS images available on the local flash to boot up and provide a user login prompt. With this command, user is provided with an option to stop the auto-init process and complete successful boot.

If the user does not use this command to stop the auto-init process, the system reboots and attempts to find the BOF again using DHCP.

debug-save

Syntax 
debug-save file-url
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command saves existing debug configuration. Debug configurations are not preserved in configuration saves.

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the file URL location to save the debug configuration.
Values—
file-url — local-url | remote-url
local-url — [cflash-id/ | usb-flash-id] [file-path]
                  255 chars maximum, including cflash-id                   directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote url — [{ftp://} login:password@remote-location/][file-                      path]
                     255 characters maximum
                     directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote-location — [hostname | ipv4-address]
                               ipv4-address — a.b.c.d                             

usb-flash-id

uf1: (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)

uf1:, uf1-A:, uf1-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

cflash-id

cf1:, cf2: (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC)

cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

 

 

disconnect

Syntax 
disconnect {address ip-address | username user-name | console | telnet | ftp | ssh}
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command disconnects a user from a console, Telnet, FTP, or SSH session.

If any of the console, Telnet, FTP, or SSH options are specified, then only the respective console, Telnet, FTP, or SSH sessions are affected.

If no console, Telnet, FTP, or SSH options are specified, then all sessions from the IP address or from the specified user are disconnected.

Any task that the user is executing is terminated. FTP files accessed by the user will not be removed.

A major severity security log event is created specifying what was terminated and by whom.

Parameters 
address ip-address
Specifies the IP address to disconnect, specified in dotted decimal notation.
Values—
ipv4-address — a.b.c.d ipv6-address — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)                            x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d                            x — 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal)                            d — 0 to 255 (decimal)

 

username user-name
Specifies the name of the user.
console—
Keyword to disconnect the console session.
telnet—
Keyword to disconnect the Telnet session.
ftp—
Keyword to disconnect the FTP session.
ssh—
Keyword to disconnect the SSH session.

display-config

Syntax 
display-config [detail | index]
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays the system’s running configuration.

By default, only non-default settings are displayed.

Parameters 
detail—
Displays default and non-default configuration parameters.
index—
Displays only persistent-indexes.

reboot

Syntax 
reboot [active | standby | upgrade] [auto-init {chassis-role factory-default | satellite | standalone}] [now]
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command is used only to reboot the system, initiate an upgrade of the firmware along with a reboot of the node, or initiate an auto-init boot procedure along with a reboot of the node.

If no options are specified, the user is prompted to confirm the reboot operation. For example:

ALA-1>admin# reboot
Are you sure you want to reboot (y/n)?

If the now option is specified, no boot confirmation messages appear.

Parameters 
active—
Keyword to reboot the active CPM. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 platforms.
standby—
Keyword to reboot the standby CPM. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 platforms.
upgrade—
Keyword to upgrade card firmware (CPLD and ROM) during chassis reboot. The 7210 SAS OS and the boot.tim support functionality to perform automatic firmware upgrades. The automatic upgrade must be enabled in the 7210 SAS OS Command Line Interface (CLI) when rebooting the system.

When the upgrade keyword is specified, a chassis flag is set for the boot loader (boot.tim) and on the subsequent boot of the 7210 SAS OS on the chassis, any firmware images requiring upgrading will be upgraded automatically.

If an 7210 SAS is rebooted with the admin reboot command (without the upgrade keyword), the firmware images are left intact.

During any firmware upgrade, automatic or manual, it is imperative that during the upgrade procedure:

  1. Power must NOT be switched off or interrupted.
  2. The system must NOT be reset.
  3. No cards are inserted or removed.

Any of the above conditions may render cards inoperable requiring a return of the card for resolution.

now—
Keyword to force a reboot of the router immediately without an interactive confirmation.
auto-init—
Keyword to reset the BOF and initiates a reboot. This keyword is not supported on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 platforms.
chassis-role—
Specifies the operating mode of the chassis at boot up. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp platforms.
Values—
factory-default, satellite, standalone

 

save

Syntax 
save [file-url] [detail] [index]
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command saves the running configuration to a configuration file. For example:

A:ALA-1>admin# save ftp://test:test@192.168.x.xx/./100.cfg
Saving configuration .........Completed.

By default, the running configuration is saved to the primary configuration file.

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the file URL location to save the configuration file.
Values—
file-url — local-url | remote-url
local-url — [cflash-id/] [file-path]
                  255 chars maximum, including cflash-id                   directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote url — [{ftp:// | tftp://}login:password@remote-location/][file-                      path]
                      255 characters maximum
                      directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote-location — [hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address]
                              ipv4-address — a.b.c.d                             
                              ipv6-address — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]
                                                        x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]
                                                        x — 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
                                                        d — 0 to 255 (decimal)
                              interface — 32 characters maximum, for link                               local addresses

usb-flash-id

uf1: (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)

uf1:, uf1-A:, uf1-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

cflash-id

cf1:, cf2: (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC)

cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

 

Default—
the primary configuration file location
detail—
Keyword to save both default and non-default configuration parameters.
index
Keyword to force a save of the persistent index file regardless of the persistent status in the BOF file. The index option can also be used to avoid an additional boot required while changing your system to use the persistence indexes.

enable-tech

Syntax 
[no] enable-tech
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the shell and kernel commands.

Note:

This command should only be used with authorized direction from the Nokia Technical Assistance Center (TAC).

tech-support

Syntax 
tech-support file-url
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command creates a system core dump.

Note:

This command should only be used with authorized direction from the Nokia Technical Assistance Center (TAC).

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the file URL location to save the binary file.
Values—
file-url — local-url | remote-url
local-url — [cflash-id/ | usb-flash-id]] [file-path]
                  255 chars maximum, including cflash-id                   directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote url — [{ftp://}login:password@remote-location/][file-                      path]
                      255 characters maximum
                      directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote-location — [hostname | ipv4-address]
                              ipv4-address — a.b.c.d

usb-flash-id

uf1: (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE)

uf1:, uf1-A:, uf1-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

cflash-id

cf1:, cf2: (7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC)

cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B: (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

 

update-golden-bootstrap

Syntax 
update-golden-bootstrap [file-url]
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink) and 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command updates the golden bootstrap image with the file URL, after validating it as a bootstrap image for the 7210 SAS platforms.

Default 

cf1:/boot.tim

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the file URL.
Values—
file-url — local-url
                255 characters max local-url — [cflash-id/][file-path] cflash-id — cf1:, cf2 (only on 7210 SAS-T)

 

virtual-chassis

Syntax 
virtual-chassis {slotid | slotid-range} image-sync
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE standalone-VC, 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command upgrades the boot.tim file on the IMM-only node in a virtual chassis (VC) and ensures that on the next reboot of the node, the newer bootloader image is used to boot the system. Bootloader images are copied to all the available storage locations on the card, ensuring that a back up copy is available in the event that the primary storage device fails.

The boot.tim file can be upgraded on a single IMM-only node or on a range of IMM-only nodes in a VC.

The image-sync keyword initiates image synchronization of the IMM-only node. It copies the boot.tim from the active CPM to the card/node identified by the slot-id or slotid-range parameter.

Parameters 
slotid—
Specifies the card slot number.
Values—
1 to 8

 

slotid-range—
Specifies the card slot numbers for a range of cards.
Values—
1 to 8

 

image-sync—
Keyword to initiate image synchronization of the IMM-only node.

6.12.2.1.10. System Alarm Contact Commands

alarm-contact-in-power

Syntax 
alarm-contact-in-power {on | off}
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allows the user to enable a supply of +24V power to the alarm input. With this feature, users can use the power supplied through the alarm input pin to supply power to the external sensor devices, and Equipment cabinet door sensors, and so on connected to the alarm input, instead of using an external power source for the external sensor devices.

If the users want to use an external power source, they disable the supply of power to the alarm input pin by using this command. By default, power is not supplied to the alarm input pin

Note:

Read the 7210 SAS device specific Installation Guides for a description of how to connect the external sensor devices to use this capability.

Default 

off

Parameters 
on—
Keyword to turn on power to the alarm input pin.
off—
Keyword to turn off power to the alarm input pin.

alarm-contact-input

Syntax 
alarm-contact-input alarm-contact-input-id
Context 
config>system>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to configure one of four available alarm contact input pins.

Parameters 
alarm-contact-input-id—
Specifies the alarm contact input pin.
Values—
1 to 4 (7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, and 7210 SAS-Mxp)

 

Values—
1 to 3 (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)

 

alarm-output-severity

Syntax 
[no] alarm-output-severity {critical | major | minor | none}
Context 
config>system>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allows the user to relay alarms from the alarm-contact input to the alarm-contact output by associating an appropriate alarm-contact output with the alarm-contact input. The system generates or clears the alarm-contact output when it triggers or clears the alarm for the associated alarm-contact input.

If multiple alarm-contact input pins share an alarm-contact output, the system generates the alarm-contact output even if any one of the alarm-contact input is triggered and the system clears alarm-contact output only when all the alarm-contact input pins are cleared.

The severity parameter configured by the user determines the appropriate alarm-contact output to be used for generation and clearing the alarm.

Note:

The system relays the alarm-contact input to the appropriate alarm-contact output only if the alarm-contact output is available on the platform.

Default 

major

Parameters 
critical—
Specifies that a critical alarm output is generated or cleared.
major—
Specifies that a major alarm output is generated or cleared.
minor—
Specifies that a minor alarm output is generated or cleared. This parameter is only supported on 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp.
none—
Specifies that no alarm output is generated or cleared.

clear-alarm-msg

Syntax 
[no] clear-alarm-msg {alarm-msg-text}
Context 
config>system>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allows the user to configure a text message for use along with SNMP trap and Log message that are sent when the system clears an alarm. The system generates a default message if the message is not configured.

The no form of this command removes the configured alarm clear message.

Parameters 
alarm-msg-text—
Specifies a printable character string, up to 160 characters.

description

Syntax 
description description-string
Context 
config>system>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command describes an alarm contact input pin. The description provides an indication of the usage or attribute of the pin. It is stored in the CLI configuration file and helps the user in identifying the purpose of the pin.

normal-state

Syntax 
normal-state [open | closed]
Context 
config>system>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command configures the normal state to be associated with the alarm-contact input. When the system detects a transition from the normal state, an alarm is generated. The alarm is cleared when the system detects a transition is back to the normal state.

Parameters 
open—
Specifies an open normal-state. When the system detects a transition to the closed state, an alarm is generated. The alarm is cleared when the system detects a transition back to the open state.
closed—
Specifies a closed normal-state. When the system detects a transition to the open state, and alarm is generated. The alarm is cleared when the system detects a transition back to the closed state.

shutdown

Syntax 
[no] shutdown
Context 
config>system>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command stops tracking the state changes associated with the alarm contact input.The system does not generate or clear the alarms for the alarm-contact input, but if an alarm is generated for the alarm-contact-input, the system clears the alarm when the shutdown command is executed.

The no form of this command starts tracking the state changes associated with the alarm contact input.

Default 

shutdown

trigger-alarm-msg

Syntax 
[no] trigger-alarm-msg {alarm-msg-text}
Context 
config>system>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allows the user to configure a text message for use along with SNMP trap and Log message that are sent when the system generates an alarm. The system generates a default message if the message is not configured.

The no form of this command removes the configured alarm trigger message.

Parameters 
alarm-msg-text—
Specifies a printable character string, up to 160 characters.

6.12.2.1.11. Redundancy Commands

redundancy

Syntax 
redundancy
Context 
admin
config
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command enables the context to configure redundancy operations.

rollback-sync

Syntax 
rollback-sync
Context 
admin>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command copies the entire set of rollback checkpoint files from the active CPM CF to the inactive CPM CF.

synchronize

Syntax 
synchronize {boot-env | config}
Context 
admin>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

Description 

This command performs a synchronization of the standby CPM’s images and/or configuration files to the active CPM. Either the boot-env or config parameter must be specified.

In the admin>redundancy context, this command performs a manually triggered standby CPM synchronization. When the standby CPM takes over operation following a failure or reset of the active CPM, it is important to ensure that the active and standby CPM have identical operational parameters. This includes the saved configuration, CPM and XCMIOM images.

The active CPM ensures that the active configuration is maintained on the standby CPM. However, to ensure smooth operation under all circumstances, runtime images and system initialization configurations must also be automatically synchronized between the active and standby CPM. If synchronization fails, alarms and log messages that indicate the type of error that caused the failure of the synchronization operation are generated. When the error condition ceases to exist, the alarm is cleared.

Only files stored on the router are synchronized. If a configuration file or image is stored in a location other than on a local compact flash, the file is not synchronized; for example, storing a configuration file on an FTP server.

The no form of this command removes the parameter from the configuration.

Parameters 
boot-env—
Keyword to synchronize all files required for the boot process (loader, BOF, images, and config).
config—
Keyword to synchronize only the primary, secondary, and tertiary configuration files.

display-config

Syntax 
display-config [detail | index]
Context 
admin
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command displays the system’s running configuration.

By default, only non-default settings are displayed.

Parameters 
detail—
Displays default and non-default configuration parameters.
index—
Displays only persistent-indexes.

force-switchover

Syntax 
force-switchover [now]
Context 
admin>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command forces a switchover to the standby CPM/CFM card. The primary CPM/CFM reloads its software image and becomes the secondary CPM/CFM.

Parameters 
now—
Keyword to force the switchover to the redundant CPM/CFM card immediately.

switchover-exec

Syntax 
switchover-exec file-url
no switchover-exec
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command specifies the location and name of the CLI script file executed following a redundancy switchover from the previously active CPM/CFM card. A switchover can happen because of a fatal failure or by manual action.

The CLI script file can contain commands for environment settings, debug (excluding mirroring settings), and other commands not maintained by the configuration redundancy.

The following commands are not supported in the switchover-exec file: clear, configure, candidate, oam, tools, oam, ping, traceroute, mstat, mtrace and mrinfo.

If the file-url parameter is not specified, no CLI script file is executed.

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the location and name of the CLI script file.
Values—
file urllocal-url | remote-url
              255 chars max local-url — [cflash-id/] [file-path] remote-url — [{ftp:// | tftp://} login:pswd@remote-locn/] [file-path] cflash-id — cf1:, cf1-A:, cf1-B:, cf2:, cf2-A:, cf2-B:, cf3:, cf3-A:, cf3-B:

 

rollback-sync

Syntax 
[no] rollback-sync
Context 
config>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

The command enables automatic synchronization of rollback checkpoint files between the active CPM and inactive CPM. When automatic synchronization is enabled, a rollback save will cause the new checkpoint file to be saved on both the active and standby CPMs. The suffixes of the old checkpoint files on both active and standby CPMs are incremented. Automatic synchronization only causes the ONE new checkpoint file to be copied to both CFs (the other 9 checkpoints are not automatically copied from active to standby but that can be done manually with admin>red>rollback-sync).

Automatic synchronization of rollback checkpoint files across CPMs is only performed if the rollback-location is configured as a local file-url (for example, "cf3:/rollback-files/rollback). Synchronization is not done if the rollback-location is remote.

Note:

The config red sync {boot-env | config} and admin red sync {boot-env | config} commands do not apply to rollback checkpoint files. These commands do not manually or automatically sync rollback checkpoint files. The dedicated rollback-sync command must be used to sync rollback checkpoint files.

synchronize

Syntax 
synchronize {boot-env | config}
no synchronize
Context 
config>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables automatic synchronization of the standby CPM/CFM’s images and config files to the active CPM/CFM. Either the boot-env or config parameter must be specified.

When the standby CPM/CFM takes over operation following a failure or reset of the active CPM/CFM, it is important to ensure that the active and standby CPM/CFMs have identical operational parameters. This includes the saved configuration, CPM and IOM images. This includes the saved configuration and CFM images.

The active CPM/CFM ensures that the active configuration is maintained on the standby CPM/CFM. However, to ensure smooth operation under all circumstances, runtime images and system initialization configurations must also be automatically synchronized between the active and standby CPM/CFM.

If synchronization fails, alarms and log messages that indicate the type of error that caused the failure of the synchronization operation are generated. When the error condition ceases to exist, the alarm is cleared.

Only files stored on the router are synchronized. If a configuration file or image is stored in a location other than on a local compact flash, the file is not synchronized; for example, storing a configuration file on an FTP server.

The no form of this command removes the parameter from the configuration.

Default 

config

Parameters 
boot-env—
Keyword to synchronize all files required for the boot process (loader, BOF, images, and config).
config —
Keyword to synchronize only the primary, secondary, and tertiary configuration files.

multi-chassis

Syntax 
multi-chassis
Context 
config>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command enables the context to configure multi-chassis parameters.

peer-name

Syntax 
peer-name name
no peer-name
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command specifies a peer name.

Parameters 
name—
Specifies the peer name, up to 32 characters. Any printable, seven-bit ASCII characters can be used within the string. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.

source-address

Syntax 
source-address ip-address
no source-address
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command specifies the source address used to communicate with the multi-chassis peer.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the source address used to communicate with the multi-chassis peer.
Values—
a.b.c.d (no multicast address)

 

sync

Syntax 
[no] sync
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command enables the context to configure synchronization parameters.

igmp

Syntax 
[no] igmp
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command specifies whether IGMP protocol information should be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer.

Default 

no igmp

igmp-snooping

Syntax 
[no] igmp-snooping
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command specifies whether IGMP snooping information should be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer.

Default 

no igmp-snooping

port

Syntax 
port port-id [sync-tag sync-tag] [create]
no port port-id
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command specifies the port to be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer and a synchronization tag to be used while synchronizing this port with the multi-chassis peer.

Parameters 
port-id—
Specifies the port to be synchronized with the multi-chassis peer.
Values—
slot/mda/port or lag-id or pw-id

 

sync-tag—
Specifies a synchronization tag, up to 32 characters, to be used while synchronizing this port with the multi-chassis peer.
create—
Keyword to create an entry.

range

Syntax 
range encap-range sync-tag sync-tag
no range encap-range
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>sync>port
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command configures a range of encapsulation values.

Parameters 
encap-range—
Specifies a range of encapsulation values on a port to be synchronized with a multi-chassis peer.
Values—
dot1q — start-qtag-end-qtag
               start-qtag — 0 to 4094
               end-qtag — 0 to 4094
qinq — qtag1.start-qtag2-qtag1.end-qtag2-start-qtag1.*end-qtag1.*
           qtag1 —1 to 4090
           start-qtag1 — 1 to 4090
           start-qtag2 — 1 to 4090
           end-qtag1 — 1 to 4090

 

sync-tag sync-tag—
Specifies a synchronization tag, up to 32 characters, to be used while synchronizing this encapsulation value range with the multi-chassis peer.

6.12.2.1.12. System Port LAG MAC Assignment Commands for 7210 SAS-Mxp standalone, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

port-lag-mac-assignment

Syntax 
port-lag-mac-assignment [v1-enable]
no port-lag-mac-assignment
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp standalone, 7210 SAS-T (network mode and access-uplink mode), 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command enables new MAC address assignments to avoid an overlap between port MAC addresses and LAG MAC addresses.

In the current default assignments of MAC addresses to ports and LAGs, the MAC addresses that are allocated to the LAGs overlap with the MAC addresses of the physical ports; for example, the MAC address assigned by the system to LAG 1 is the same as the MAC address of port 27.

Use this command to change the MAC address assignment scheme to ensure that the LAG MAC addresses are not the same as the MAC addresses of the physical ports. The new scheme is referred to in the system as “v1.”

A reboot is required for this command to take effect.

Warning:

The MAC address for some ports will change after this command is run. Ensure required changes are made to other service objects (for example, CFM up MEPs, and so on) that reference local MAC addresses, and to MAC addresses that reference remote peer devices, if required. Failure to make such changes could result in unpredictable behavior.

The no form of this command reverts to the default MAC address assignment scheme for ports and LAGs. The use of the default configuration is not recommended; it is available only to maintain the current mode of operation, if absolutely necessary.

Parameters 
v1-enable—
Mandatory keyword that forces the system to use the new scheme of MAC address assignment.

6.12.2.1.13. Rollback Commands

compare

Syntax 
compare [to checkpoint2]
compare checkpoint1 to checkpoint2
Context 
admin>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command displays the differences between rollback checkpoints and the active operational configuration, with checkpoint1 as the base/first file to which checkpoint2 is compared.

When no parameters are defined, this command compares the active configuration to the most recent rollback file. when the checkpoint2 parameter is defined, this command compares the active configuration to the specified file. When both checkpoint parameters are defined, this command compares one specified file to another specified file.

A compare operation does not check authorization of each line of output. Permission to execute the compare command should only be given to users who are allowed to view the entire system configuration.

The defaults for checkpoint1 and checkpoint2 are context-aware and differ based on the branch in which the command is executed. In general, the default for checkpoint1 matches the context from which the command is issued.

Parameters 
checkpoint1, checkpoint2—
Specifies the configuration files to use as comparison sources.
Values—
active-cfg — The active operational system configuration.
rescue — The rollback rescue file from the configured rescue location.
latest-rb — The most recent rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location, with the suffix *.rb.
checkpoint-id — The ID value of a specific rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location with the suffix *.rb.x. The range is 1 to 9 but the maximum value depends on the local and remote checkpoints. See local-max-checkpoints and remote-max-checkpoints for more information.

 

delete

Syntax 
delete checkpoint | rescue
Context 
admin>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command deletes a rollback checkpoint file and decrements the suffix ID numbers of all older rollback checkpoint files.

If the config redundancy rollback-sync command is enabled, the rollback delete command will also delete the equivalent checkpoint in the standby checkpoint file and shuffle the suffixes on the standby CF.

It is not advised to manually delete a rollback checkpoint (for example, using the file delete command). If a rollback checkpoint file is manually deleted without using the admin rollback delete command then the suffixes of the checkpoint files are NOT shuffled, nor is the equivalent checkpoint file deleted from the standby CF. This manual deletion creates a “hole” in the checkpoint file list until enough new checkpoints have been created to roll the “hole” off the end of the list.

Parameters 
checkpoint | rescue—
Specifies the rollback checkpoint or rescue file to delete.
Values—
rescue — The rollback rescue file from the configured rescue location.
latest-rb — The most recent rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location, with the suffix *.rb.
checkpoint-id — The ID value of a specific rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location with the suffix *.rb.x. The range is 1 to 9 but the maximum value depends on the local and remote max checkpoints. See local-max-checkpoints and remote-max-checkpoints for more information.

 

revert

Syntax 
revert checkpoint | rescue [now]
Context 
admin>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command initiates a configuration rollback revert operation that will return the configuration state of the node to a previously saved checkpoint. The rollback revert minimizes impacts to running services. There are no impacts in areas of configuration that did not change since the checkpoint. Configuration parameters that changed (or items on which changed configuration have dependencies) are first removed (revert to default) and the previous values are then restored (can be briefly service impacting in changed areas).

Parameters 
checkpoint | rescue—
Specifies the rollback checkpoint or rescue file to revert to.
Values—
rescue — The rollback rescue file from the configured rescue location.
latest-rb — The most recent rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location, with the suffix *.rb.
checkpoint-id — The ID value of a specific rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location with the suffix *.rb.x. The range is 1 to 9 but the maximum value depends on the local and remote max checkpoints. See local-max-checkpoints and remote-max-checkpoints for more information.

 

now—
Keyword to force a rollback reversion without prompting for confirmation.

save

Syntax 
save [comment comment] [rescue]
Context 
admin>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command saves the current operational configuration as a rollback checkpoint file at the configured rollback location, using the filename specified by the rollback-location command, with the suffix *.rb. The suffixes of all previously saved rollback checkpoint files are automatically incremented by one (*.rb becomes *.rb.1, *.rb.1 becomes *.rb.2, and so on).

If the optional rescue keyword is not used, this command saves a rollback checkpoint at the location and with the filename specified by the rollback location with a suffix of ".rb". The previously saved checkpoints will have their suffixes incremented by one (.rb.1 becomes.rb.2, etc). If there are already as many checkpoint files as the maximum number supported, the last checkpoint file is deleted.

By default, there can be a maximum of 10 rollback checkpoint files, the latest with suffix *.rb and nine older files with suffixes *.rb.1 through *.rb.9. If the maximum number of checkpoint files is reached and a new one is saved, the oldest checkpoint file is deleted. The maximum number of rollback checkpoint files that can be saved can be configured with the local-max-checkpoints and remote-max-checkpoints commands.

If the rescue keyword is used, this command saves the current operational configuration as a rescue rollback file at the location and with the filename specified by the rescue-location command. The rescue file uses the suffix *.rc. There can be only one rescue file saved at a time. Saving a new rescue file deletes and replaces any existing rescue file.

A valid rollback checkpoint and rescue location must be configured with the rollback-location and rescue-location commands before saving a checkpoint or rescue file.

See rollback-location, rescue-location, local-max-checkpoints and remote-max-checkpoints for more information.

Parameters 
comment comment—
Specifies a string, up to 255 characters, describing the associated rollback checkpoint file.
rescue—
Keyword to save the current operational configuration as a rescue file.

view

Syntax 
view [checkpoint | rescue]
Context 
admin>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command displays the configuration settings saved in a rollback checkpoint or rescue file, or the active operational system configuration.

Parameters 
checkpoint | rescue—
Specifies the configuration file to view.
Values—
rescue — The rollback rescue file from the configured rescue location.
latest-rb — The most recent rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location, with the suffix *.rb.
checkpoint-id — The ID value of a specific rollback checkpoint file from the configured rollback location with the suffix *.rb.x.
The range is 1 to 9 but the maximum value depends on the local and remote max checkpoints. See local-max-checkpoints and remote-max-checkpoints for more information.

 

local-max-checkpoints

Syntax 
local-max-checkpoints [1..50]
no local-max-checkpoints
Context 
config>system>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command configures the maximum number of rollback checkpoint files when the rollback location is on the local compact flash.

Default 

10

Parameters 
1..50—
Specifies the maximum number of rollback checkpoint files.

remote-max-checkpoints

Syntax 
remote-max-checkpoints [1..200]
no remote-max-checkpoints
Context 
config>system>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command configures the maximum number of rollback checkpoint files that can be saved on a remote device.

Default 

10

Parameters 
1..200—
Specifies the maximum number of rollback checkpoint files.

rescue-location

Syntax 
no rescue-location file-url
Context 
config>system>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

The location and filename of the rescue configuration is configurable to be local (on the compact flash) or remote. The suffix “.rc” will be automatically appended to the filename when a rescue configuration file is saved. Trivial FTP (tftp) is not supported for remote locations.

A valid rescue location must be configured before a rescue configuration is saved.

rollback-location

Syntax 
no rollback-location file-url
Context 
config>system>rollback
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command configures the location and generic filename of the rollback rescue configuration file.

A rescue file can be saved locally on the compact flash or on a remote device. The file URL must not contain a suffix, just a path/directory and filename. The suffixes for rollback checkpoint files are “.rb”, ".rb.1", ..., ".rb.9" and are automatically appended to rollback checkpoint files.

A valid rollback-location must be configured before a rollback save command is executed.

Parameters 
file-url—
Specifies the local or remote file path for the rollback rescue configuration file.
Values—
file-url — local-url | remote-url
local-url — [cflash-id/] [file-path]
                  255 chars maximum, including cflash-id                   directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote url — [{ftp://} login:password@remote-location] [file-path]
                     255 characters maximum
                     directory length 99 characters maximum each
remote-location — [hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address]
                              ipv4-address — a.b.c.d  
                              ipv6-address — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x[-interface]
                                                        x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d[-interface]
                                                        x — 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal)
                                                        d — 0 to 255 (decimal)
                              interface — 32 characters maximum, for link                               local addresses
cflash-id — cf1:, cf2
usb-flash-id — uf1:

 

6.12.2.1.14. Peer Commands

peer

Syntax 
peer ip-address [create]
no peer ip-address
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command configures a multi-chassis redundancy peer.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies a peer IP address. Multicast address are not allowed.
Values—
a.b.c.d

 

create—
Keyword to create the configuration context.

authentication-key

Syntax 
authentication-key authentication-key | hash-key [hash | hash2]
no authentication-key
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command configures the authentication key used between this node and the multi-chassis peer. The authentication key can be any combination of letters or numbers.

Parameters 
authentication-key—
Specifies the authentication key. Allowed values are any string up to 20 characters composed of printable, 7-bit ASCII characters. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
hash-key—
Specifies the hash key. The key can be any combination of ASCII characters up to 33 (hash1-key) or 55 (hash2-key) characters (encrypted). If spaces are used in the string, the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.
hash—
Specifies that the key is entered in an encrypted form. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in a non-encrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.
hash2—
Specifies that the key is entered in a more complex encrypted form that involves more variables then the key value alone, this means that hash2 encrypted variable cannot be copied and pasted. If the hash or hash2 parameter is not used, the key is assumed to be in a non-encrypted, clear text form. For security, all keys are stored in encrypted form in the configuration file with the hash or hash2 parameter specified.

6.12.2.1.15. MC-LAG Commands

mc-lag

Syntax 
[no] mc-lag
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>mc-lag
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command enables the context to configure multi-chassis LAG operations and related parameters.

The no form of this command administratively disables multi-chassis LAG. MC-LAG can only be issued only when mc-lag is shutdown.

hold-on-neighbor-failure

Syntax 
hold-on-neighbor-failure multiplier
no hold-on-neighbor-failure
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>mc-lag
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command specifies the interval that the standby node will wait for packets from the active node before assuming a redundant-neighbor node failure. This delay in switch-over operation is required to accommodate different factors influencing node failure detection rate, such as IGP convergence, or HA switch-over times and to prevent the standby node to take action prematurely.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

3

Parameters 
multiplier—
Specifies the time interval that the standby node will wait for packets from the active node before assuming a redundant-neighbor node failure.
Values—
2 to 25

 

keep-alive-interval

Syntax 
keep-alive-interval interval
no keep-alive-interval
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>mc-lag
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command sets the interval at which keep-alive messages are exchanged between two systems participating in MC-LAG. These keep-alive messages are used to determine remote-node failure and the interval is set in deciseconds.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

1s (10 hundreds of milliseconds means interval value of 10)

Parameters 
interval—
Specifies the time interval expressed in deciseconds.
Values—
5 to 500

 

lag

Syntax 
lag lag-id lacp-key admin-key system-id system-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id] system-priority system-priority
lag lag-id [remote-lag remote-lag-id]
no lag lag-id
Context 
config>redundancy>multi-chassis>peer>mc-lag
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command defines a LAG that is forming a redundant pair for MC-LAG with a LAG configured on the given peer. The same LAG group can be defined only in the scope of one peer.

The same lacp-key, system-id, and system-priority must be configured on both nodes of the redundant pair in order for MC-LAG to become operational. In order for MC-LAG to become operational, all of the parameters (lacp-key, system-id, system-priority) must be configured the same on both nodes of the same redundant pair.

The partner system (the system connected to all links forming MC-LAG) will consider all ports using the same lacp-key, system-id, and system-priority as the part of the same LAG. In order to achieve this in MC operation, both redundant-pair nodes have to be configured with the same values. In case of a mismatch, MC-LAG is kept operationally down.

Parameters 
lag-id—
Specifies the LAG identifier, expressed as a decimal integer. Specifying the lag-id allows the mismatch between lag-id on the redundant pair. If no lag-id is specified, it is assumed that the neighbor system uses the same lag-id as a part of the given MC-LAG. If no matching MC-LAG group can be found between neighbor systems, the individual LAGs will operate as usual (no MC-LAG operation is established).
Values—
1 to 25

 

lacp-key admin-key—
Specifies a 16 bit key that needs to be configured in the same manner on both sides of the MC-LAG in order for the MC-LAG to come up.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

system-id system-id—
Specifies a 6 byte value expressed in the same notation as MAC address.
Values—
xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
xx — 00 to FF

 

remote-lag remote-lag-id
Specifies the LAG ID on the remote system.
Values—
1 to 800

 

system-priority system-priority—
Specifies the system priority to be used in the context of the MC-LAG. The partner system will consider all ports using the same lacp-key, system-id, and system-priority as part of the same LAG.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

6.12.2.1.16. LLDP System Commands

lldp

Syntax 
lldp
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure system-wide Link Layer Discovery Protocol parameters.

lldp-med

Syntax 
lldp-med
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command creates the context to configure system-wide LLDP Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) information.

network-policy

Syntax 
network-policy network-policy-id [create]
no network-policy network-policy-id
Context 
config>system>lldp>lldp-med
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures network policies, which send configuration information using LLDP-MED TLVs. The configured policy specifies the network policy configuration that must be provided to the LLDP-MED endpoint device. Multiple policies can be configured with different application types.

By default, the system creates network policy 1, which is not associated with a port. The user must explicitly configure a policy for use with a port, or use the default network policy 1, and enable transmission and reception of LLDP-MED TLVs on the port.

The no form of the command removes the configured network policy ID.

Parameters 
network-policy-id—
Specifies the network policy ID.
Values—
1 to 65535

 

create—
Keyword to create a network policy.

application-type

Syntax 
application-type {voice | voice-signaling | guest-voice | guest-voice-signaling | soft-phone-voice | video-conferencing | streaming-video | video-signaling}
no application-type
Context 
config>system>lldp>lldp-med>network-policy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures the application type for the specified network policy.

The configured application-type is used to match with the application type received from an LLDP-MED endpoint device and provides the endpoint device with the network policy configured for the requested application type.

The no form of this command configures the Network Policy TLV to send the application type value “not_specified” to the LLDP-MED endpoint device.

Default 

no application-type

Parameters 
voice—
Keyword to configure the voice application type for the network policy.
voice-signaling—
Keyword to configure the voice signaling application type for the network policy.
guest-voice—
Keyword to configure the guest voice application type for the network policy.
guest-voice-signaling—
Keyword to configure the guest voice signaling application type for the network policy.
soft-phone-voice—
Keyword to configure the soft phone voice application type for the network policy.
video-conferencing—
Keyword to configure the video conferencing application type for the network policy.
streaming-video—
Keyword to configure the video streaming application type for the network policy.
video-signaling—
Keyword to configure the video signaling application type for the network policy.

dot1p

Syntax 
dot1p dot1p-value
no dot1p
Context 
config>system>lldp>lldp-med>network-policy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures the dot1p value for the network policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

dot1p 0

Parameters 
dot1p-value—
Specifies the dot1p value.
Values—
0 to 7

 

ip-dscp

Syntax 
ip-dscp ip-dscp
no ip-dscp
Context 
config>system>lldp>lldp-med>network-policy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures the IP DSCP value for the network policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

ip-dscp 0

Parameters 
ip-dscp—
Specifies the IP DSCP value.
Values—
0 to 63

 

vlan-id

Syntax 
vlan-id 0..4094
no vlan-id
Context 
config>system>lldp>lldp-med>network-policy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures the VLAN ID for the network policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

vlan-id 0

Parameters 
0..4094—
Specifies the VLAN ID.
Values—
0 to 4094

 

vlan-tag-present

Syntax 
[no] vlan-tag-present
Context 
config>system>lldp>lldp-med>network-policy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures the application specified by the application-type to use a VLAN tagged packet, using the configured VLAN ID in the VLAN tag.

The no form of this command disables the use of a VLAN tag.

Default 

no vlan-tag-present

message-fast-tx

Syntax 
message-fast-tx time
no message-fast-tx
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the duration of the fast transmission period.

Parameters 
time—
Specifies the fast transmission period, in seconds.
Values—
1 to 3600

 

Default—
1

message-fast-tx-init

Syntax 
message-fast-tx-init count
no message-fast-tx-init
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the number of LLDPDUs to send during the fast transmission period.

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the number of LLDPDUs to send during the fast transmission period.
Values—
1 to 8

 

Default—
4

notification-interval

Syntax 
notification-interval time
no notification-interval
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the minimum time between change notifications.

Parameters 
time—
Specifies the minimum time, in seconds, between change notifications.
Values—
5 to 3600

 

Default—
5

reinit-delay

Syntax 
reinit-delay time
no reinit-delay
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the time before reinitializing LLDP on a port.

Parameters 
time—
Specifies the time, in seconds, before reinitializing LLDP on a port.
Values—
1 to 10

 

Default—
2

tx-credit-max

Syntax 
tx-credit-max count
no tx-credit-max
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the maximum consecutive LLDPDUs transmitted.

Parameters 
count—
Specifies the maximum consecutive LLDPDUs transmitted.
Values—
1 to 100

 

Default—
5

tx-hold-multiplier

Syntax 
tx-hold-multiplier multiplier
no tx-hold-multiplier
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the multiplier of the tx-interval.

Parameters 
multiplier—
Specifies the multiplier of the tx-interval.
Values—
2 to 10

 

Default—
4

tx-interval

Syntax 
tx-interval interval
no tx-interval
Context 
config>system>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures the LLDP transmit interval time.

Parameters 
interval—
Specifies the LLDP transmit interval time.
Values—
5 to 32768

 

Default—
30

6.12.2.1.17. LLDP Ethernet Port Commands

lldp

Syntax 
lldp
Context 
config>port>ethernet
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to configure Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) parameters on the specified port.

dest-mac

Syntax 
dest-mac {bridge-mac}
Context 
config>port>ethernet>lldp
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command configures destination MAC address parameters.

Parameters 
bridge-mac—
Specifies destination bridge MAC type to use by LLDP.
Values—
nearest-bridge — Specifies to use the nearest bridge nearest-non-tpmr — Specifies to use the nearest non-Two-Port MAC Relay (TPMR) nearest-customer — Specifies to use the nearest customer

 

admin-status

Syntax 
admin-status {rx | tx | tx-rx | disabled}
Context 
config>port>ethernet>lldp>dstmac
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies the administratively desired status of the local LLDP agent.

Parameters 
rx—
Specifies that the LLDP agent will receive, but will not transmit LLDP frames on this port.
tx—
Specifies that the LLDP agent will transmit LLDP frames on this port and will not store any information about the remote systems connected.
tx-rx—
Specifies that the LLDP agent will transmit and receive LLDP frames on this port.
disabled—
Specifies that the LLDP agent will not transmit or receive LLDP frames on this port. If there is remote systems information which is received on this port and stored in other tables, before the port's admin status becomes disabled, the information will naturally age out.

notification

Syntax 
[no] notification
Context 
config>port>ethernet>lldp>dstmac
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables LLDP notifications.

The no form of this command disables LLDP notifications.

tx-mgmt-address

Syntax 
tx-mgmt-address [system]
no tx-mgmt-address
Context 
config>port>ethernet>lldp>dstmac
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies which management address to transmit.

The no form of this command reverts value to the default.

Default 

no tx-mgmt-address

Parameters 
system—
Specifies to use the system IP address. If this parameter is specified, the system address will only be transmitted once it has been configured.

tx-tlvs

Syntax 
tx-tlvs [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap]
no tx-tlvs
Context 
config>port>ethernet>lldp>dstmac
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command specifies which LLDP TLVs to transmit.

The no form of this command reverts to the default.

Default 

no tx-tlvs

Parameters 
port-desc—
Specifies that the LLDP agent should transmit port description TLVs.
sys-name —
Specifies that the LLDP agent should transmit system name TLVs.
sys-desc—
Specifies that the LLDP agent should transmit system description TLVs.
sys-cap—
Specifies that the LLDP agent should transmit system capabilities TLVs.

6.12.2.1.18. System Resource-Profile Commands

resource-profile

Syntax 
resource-profile policy-id [create]
no resource-profile policy-id
Context 
configure>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command enables the context to configure resource profile parameters on the system.

Default 

1

Parameters 
policy-id—
Specifies a resource profile policy.
Values—
1 to 16

 

create—
Keyword to create a resource profile instance.

resource-profile

Syntax 
resource-profile
no resource-profile
Context 
configure>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command enables the context to configure resource profile parameters on the system.

enable-bgp3107-frr

Syntax 
enable-bgp-3107-frr
no enable-bgp3107-frr
Context 
config>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command enables the allocation of MPLS FIB and protection group resources required for enabling uniform fast reroute (FRR) for BGP RFC3107 LU routes resolved using RSVP-TE LSPs. This is a per-node configuration and enabling the command affects all BGP LU routes.

Caution:

If the command is enabled, the amount of resources required is twice the amount required without uniform FRR, and the number of BGP LU routes that can be accommodated in the MPLS FIB is therefore halved if uniform FRR is enabled. Ensure that sufficient MPLS resources are available to accommodate all required BGP LU routes before using this command.

The no form of this command disables the use of uniform FRR for BGP LU routes.

Default 

no enable-bgp3107-frr

enable-ldporsvp-frr

Syntax 
enable-ldporsvp-frr
no enable-ldporsvp-frr
Context 
config>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command enables the allocation of MPLS FIB and protection group resources required for enabling uniform FRR for LDP-over-RSVP LSPs (LDP FECs resolved using RSVP-TE LSPs). This is a per-node configuration and enabling the command affects all LDP-over-RSVP LSPs.

Caution:

If the command is enabled, the amount of resources required is twice the amount required without uniform FRR, and the number of LDP-over-RSVP LSPs that can be accommodated in the MPLS FIB is therefore halved if uniform FRR is enabled. Ensure that sufficient MPLS resources are available to accommodate all required LDP-over-RSVP LSPs before using this command.

The no form of this command disables the use of uniform FRR for LDP-over-RSVP LSPs.

Default 

no enable-ldporsvp-frr

g8032-fast-flood-enable

Syntax 
[no] g8032-fast-flood-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile (7210 SAS-M)
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam (7210 SAS-T)
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M and 7210 SAS-T

Description 

This command configures the G.8032 fast-flood feature. When this command is executed, it is stored in the configuration file after admin save is executed. A system reboot is required for this command to take effect.

It is recommended to enable this command to improve service failover time due to failures in the ring path. When fast flood is enabled, on failure detection in one of the paths of the ETH-ring, along with MAC flush, the system starts to flood the traffic on-to the available path.

If this command is present in the configuration file, on reboot, the system allocates resources for G.8032, by reducing the amount of resources available for use with ACLs. When this command is used, G.8032 fastflood needs an entire chunk with “512” entries, therefore the amount of resources available for use with ACLs is reduced by “512”. The user needs to free up resources used by ACLs and make them available for use by G.8032, before enabling this command. The user should ensure that the resource usage of ACLs has been appropriately modified before reboot, to make way for use of this feature. The user can free up resources by either disabling the use of ACLs with a SAP or deleting a SAP, so that an entire chunk of 512 entries is available.

Before enabling the g8032-fast-flood-enable command, the user must check if sufficient resources are available. The tools dump system-resources command is available to check if sufficient resources are available. The 'Ingress Shared CAM Entries' field, shown in the output below tools dump system resources command, must be more than or equal to 512 (the ‘Free’ column in the following output).

| Total | Allocated | Free
-------------------------------+-----------+-----------+------------
Ingress Shared CAM Entries | 0 | 0 | 512

The no form of this command removes the allocated resources for use by G.8032.The entire resource pool is available for use by ACLs. The no form of this command takes affect only on reboot.

Default 

no g8032-fast-flood-enable

decommission

Syntax 
decommission
Context 
config>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink) and 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command enables the context to decommission a port. Ports which are decommissioned using this command are not available for provisioning services. The packet buffers are taken away from the decommissioned port and allocated to port(s) as specified by the entries configured under the decommission command. This command allocates more packet buffers to a certain port or group of ports and enables those ports to absorb larger bursts.

entry

Syntax 
entry entry-id port port-range to port-range
no entry entry-id
Context 
config>system>resource-profile>decommission
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink) and 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command decommissions a port or group of ports and allocates buffers to ports that need more packet buffers for absorbing larger bursts. It allows the user to configure the entries which list the ports to be decommissioned. Ports whose packet buffers are taken away are given on the left-hand of the to keyword, and ports to which buffers are allocated to are given on the right-hand side.

This command allows the user to specify either a port or a group of ports on both sides, using a list or range of ports. This allows the user to decommission a single port and allocate buffers to a single port or group of ports, or decommission a group of ports and allocate buffers to a single port or group of ports.

Packet buffers taken away from a port or group of ports specified on the left-hand side are distributed equally among the group of ports, if the right-hand side of the to keyword specifies a group of ports or to the configured port if the right-hand side specifies a single port. Packet buffers are added to the MBS pool of the port (the MBS pool is shared by the 8 queues on the port) and the CBS portion of the queues is not modified.

The administrative and operational states of the port are not affected by configuring the port in a decommission entry.

Note:

  1. Any changes to the command, example - modifying the list of ports in existing entries or execution of no entry command or addition of new entries, takes effect only after a reboot of the node. The user is allowed to make change when the node is up, but the changes does not happen until a reboot of the system.
  2. The ports on the CES MDA cannot be specified in the decommission command.

The software maintains two lists of entries, one which is in effect currently and one which has been modified by the user and takes effect during the next reboot. These lists can be displayed using the show command. The configuration file always stores the list of entries as configured by the user so that upon reboot, the modified entries and new entries (if any) take effect.

The following guidelines are to be adhered while configuring the entry command.

  1. A port cannot be specified more than once in any of the entries. In other words, if two entries specify the same port ID, the software errors out the last entry which has the same port ID.
  2. A port appearing on the left-hand side of the to keyword in any entry cannot appear on the right-hand side of any other entries (including the same entry) and the converse also holds true.
  3. If the user has specified a group of ports using a port range, the software expands the range to a list of ports and then makes the required checks (that is, checks listed in the first and second bullets) for each port in the list with the list of currently configured group of ports.
  4. Either a port ID or a list of port ID or port ID ranges can be specified on the left-hand side and the right hand-side of the ‘to’ keyword. See the following description for port ID specification to know more about the restrictions that apply when configuring a port range and list of ports.
  5. The list of entries is processed in the ascending order of the entry IDs, that is, an entry with a lower entry ID is processed before entry with a higher entry ID.

The no form of this command removes the entry from the list of decommissioned ports. The no form of this command requires a reboot to take effect.

The following examples show the list of ports, range of ports, and a combination of list of ports and range of ports that can be specified.

List of ports can be specified as:

  1. 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/1, 1/1/10 is allowed
  2. 1/1/10, 1/1/2, 1/1/9, 1/1/5 is allowed

Range of ports can be specified as:

  1. 1/1/2-1/1/5 is allowed
  2. 1/2/1-1/2/2 is allowed
  3. 1/1/10-1/1/2 is not allowed
  4. 1/1/1 – 1/2/2 is not allowed

A combination of list of ports and range of ports can be specified as:

  1. 1/1/5,1/1/6,1/1/10-1/1/15,1/1/25 is allowed
  2. 1/1/5,1/1/6,1/1/10-1/1/12,1/1/13-1/1/15 is allowed
  1. 1/1/5,1/1/6,1/1/10-1/1/12,1/2/1-1/2/2 is allowed
Parameters 
entry-id—
Specifies a number in the range 1 to 30. A maximum of 30 entries can be created by the user.
Values—
1 to 30

 

port-range—
Specifies the port, list of ports, a port range, or a combination of these that are being decommissioned when they appear on the left-hand side of the to keyword. This parameter identifies the port or group of ports that receives the packet buffers from the decommissioned ports. A group of ports can be specified as a list of ports or as a range of ports.

The list of ports can be specified in any order using a comma to separate the list of ports, while a port range must always be specified in the ascending order of port IDs (in other words, the first port number specified in the range must be greater than the second port number in the range) and a single range cannot refer to ports on different MDA or different IMMs or different slots.

egress-internal-tcam

Syntax 
egress-internal-tcam
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to allocate resources from the egress internal TCAM pool.

The egress internal TCAM resource pool is shared by multiple features. The resources are allocated to features in chunks of fixed size; multiple features cannot share the same chunk. The users can allocate the available resources based on their feature scaling requirements. The system allocates resources to the feature from its allocated chunk until the chunk runs out of resources. The users can reallocate chunks of resources from features that do not need to be enabled.

To free up the resources for use by one or more features, modify the configuration to release the chunks of resources that are in use by other features. For example, to free up a chunk of resources allocated to egress ACLs MAC criteria and allocate it to IP criteria, perform the following steps.

  1. Remove the association of SAPs with egress ACLs that use a MAC criteria policy.
  2. Change the resource profile configuration to allocate the chunk to IP criteria.
  3. Create and associate the SAPs with the IP criteria.

To free up a chunk of resources used by egress ACLs and allocate it to the SAP egress aggregate meter (on platforms that support this feature), perform the following steps.

  1. Remove the association of SAPs with egress ACLs.
  2. Change the resource profile configuration to reduce the chunk resources allocated to egress ACLs (and reduce the value of chunks in use by the egress ACLs match criteria).
  3. Allocate the chunk of resources to the SAP egress aggregate meter feature (on platforms that support this feature).
  4. Configure the SAPs with the aggregate meter rate.

The egress internal TCAM resource pool is shared among the following features on different platforms:

  1. 7210 SAS-M access-uplink mode
    Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, MAC match-criteria), Per SAP Egress Aggregate Meter, and MAC authentication
  2. 7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode
    Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, MAC match-criteria), Per SAP Egress Aggregate Meter, and MAC authentication
  3. 7210 SAS-M network mode
    Per SAP Egress Aggregate Meter, Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria), and MAC authentication
  4. 7210 SAS-T network mode
    Per SAP Egress Aggregate meter, Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria), and MAC authentication
  5. 7210 SAS-Mxp mode
    Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria) and MAC authentication
  6. 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE mode (standalone and standalone-VC)
    Per SAP Egress Aggregate meter, Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria), and MAC authentication
  7. 7210 SAS-S 1/10GE mode (standalone and standalone-VC)
    Per SAP Egress Aggregate meter, Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria), and MAC authentication
  8. 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE mode
    Per SAP Egress Aggregate meter and Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  9. 7210 SAS-R6 IMMv1, IMMv2, and IMM-c
    Per SAP Egress Aggregate meter, Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria), Ethernet CFM (bi-directional MIP), and MAC authentication
  10. 7210 SAS-R12 IMMv1, IMMv2, and IMM-c
    Per SAP Egress Aggregate meter and Egress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria), Ethernet CFM (bi-directional MIP)
Note:

  1. In some scenarios, reassigning a chunk of resources among features may require the node to be rebooted. See the CLI description of the feature for detailed information.
  2. The egress internal TCAM pool of resources is available per node on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone), 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp. On the 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone-VC), 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12, it is available as a per-IMM pool of resources.
  3. It is possible to configure a resource profile per node or per card in a virtual chassis.
  4. The number of chunks and the number of resources per chunk varies for the 7210 SAS platforms. Contact your Nokia technical support representative for more information.
  5. To be enabled, some features require the allocation of a specific number of chunks (greater than 1). If the minimum number of chunks is not assigned, the system cannot allocate the required resources to the feature, which causes the command associated with the feature to fail.

acl-sap-egress

Syntax 
acl-sap-egress [num-resources]
no acl-sap-ingress
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the user to allocate maximum resources for use by egress filter policies using any of the supported match criteria. This command limits the total amount of chunks allocated for use by egress filter policies to the value specified by num-resources. In other words, the cumulative sum of chunks allocated to different match criteria supported by filter policies cannot exceed the value configured with num-resources.

Note:

  1. The resources in the egress-internal-tcam resource pool are shared with other features (for example, SAP egress aggregate meter). To assign resources to this feature, resources may be reallocated from other features by disabling the policies association with a SAP, and others.
  2. On the 7210 SAS platforms, some of the Egress ACL match criteria require a minimum amount of resources greater than 1, to be allocated before the match criteria can be used. In other words, use of SAP egress aggregate meter is mutually exclusive to use of egress ACLs with the following match criteria - mac-ipv4 match, ipv6-128bit match, mac-ipv6-64bit match. All these match criteria require a minimum of 2 resources. SAP egress aggregate meter and egress ACLs MAC match criteria can be enabled simultaneously, with each feature sharing the available resources equally among them.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by egress filter policies. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a filter policy using any of the match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the amount of resources that can be allocated for use by ACL policies.
Values—
Table 44 lists the parameter values.
Table 44:  Number of Resources Available for ACL-SAP-Egress  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-T Network mode (per node)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12(per IMMv2)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

2

2

 

egress-sap-aggregate-meter

Syntax 
[no] egress-sap-aggregate-meter num-resources
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allocates resources for use by SAP egress aggregate policer from the egress-internal-tcam resource pool. This command limits the total amount of chunks allocated for use by SAP egress aggregate meter to the value specified by the num-resources parameter.

Note:

  1. The resources in the egress-internal-tcam resource pool are shared with other features (for example, SAP egress aggregate meter). To assign resources to this feature, resources may be reallocated from other features by disabling the policies association with a SAP, and others.
  2. On the 7210 SAS platforms, some of the Egress ACL match criteria require a minimum amount of resources greater than 1, to be allocated before the match criteria can be used. In other words, use of SAP egress aggregate meter is mutually exclusive to use of egress ACLs with the following match criteria - mac-ipv4 match, ipv6-128bit match, mac-ipv6-64bit match. All these match criteria require a minimum of 2 resources. SAP egress aggregate meter and egress ACLs MAC match criteria can be enabled simultaneously, with each feature sharing the available resources equally among them.

The no form of this command specifies that software does not allocate any resources for use by the SAP egress aggregate policer. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to enable the configuration of the sap-aggregate-meter command for a SAP.

Default 

no egress-sap-aggregate-meter

Parameters 
num-resources —
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.
Values—
0 to 2

 

Default—
0

ipv6-128bit-match-enable

Syntax 
[no] ipv6-128bit-match-enable num-resources
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-egress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by egress filter policies using ipv6 criteria with 128-bit IPv6 addresses.

The resources cannot be shared with any other egress filter policies that specify other match criteria. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by egress filter policies using ipv6 criteria with 128-bit IPv6 addresses. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a filter policy using this match criteria.

Default 

no ipv6-128bit-match-enable

Parameters 
num-resources —
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria. A minimum value of 2 (indicating two chunks of resources) must be allocated to use this match-criteria. If not, association of a policy with ipv6-128bit criteria to a SAP will fail. It is mutually exclusive to use of SAP egress aggregate meter.
Values—
Table 45 lists the parameter values.
Table 45:  Number of Resources Available for IPv6-128Bit-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-T network mode (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Mxp

0

2

0

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

0

2

0

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMM)

0

0

2

 

mac-ipv4-match-enable

Syntax 
[no] mac-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-egress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by egress filter policies using IPv4 criteria or MAC criteria. The resources allocated are allocated on a first-come-first-serve basis among service entities (for example, SAP and IP interface) using IPv4 and MAC criteria egress filter policies.

The resources cannot be shared with any other egress filter policies that specify other match criteria. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by egress filter policies using MAC or IPv4 criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a filter policy using this match criteria.

Default 

mac-ipv4-match-enable 2 (to maintain backward compatibility with earlier releases)

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria. A minimum value of 2 (indicating two chunks of resources) must be allocated to use this match-criteria. If not, association of a policy with mac and ipv4 criteria to a SAP will fail. It is mutually exclusive to use of SAP egress aggregate meter.
Values—
Table 46 lists the parameter values.
Table 46:  Number of Resources Available for MAC-IPv4-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-T network mode (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE standalone-VC)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c (per node)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-Mxp

0

2

0

7210 SAS-R6 IMMv1 and IMMv2

0

2

0

7210 SAS-R12 IMMv2

0

2

0

 

mac-ipv6-64bit-match-enable

Syntax 
[no] mac-ipv6-64bit-match-enable num-resources
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-egress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by egress filter policies using MAC criteria or IPv6 criteria using only the upper 64-bits of the IPv6 addresses. The resources allocated are allocated on a first-come-first-serve basis among service entities (for example, SAP and IP interface) using IPv6 64-bit and MAC criteria egress filter policies.

The resources cannot be shared with any other egress filter policies that specify other match criteria. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by egress filter policies using MAC or IPv6 64-bit criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example SAP and IP interface) with a filter policy using this match criteria.

Default 

no mac-ipv6-64bit-match-enable

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria. A minimum value of 2 (indicating two chunks of resources) must be allocated to use this match-criteria. If not, association of a policy with mac and ipv6 64bit criteria to a SAP will fail. It is mutually exclusive to use of SAP egress aggregate meter.
Values—
Table 47 lists the parameter values.
Table 47:  Number of Resources Available for MAC-IPv6-64Bit-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-T network mode (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

2

0

7210 SAS-Mxp

0

2

0

7210 SAS-R6 IMMv1 and IMMv2

0

2

0

7210 SAS-R12 IMMv2

0

2

0

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c

0

2

0

 

mac-match-enable

Syntax 
[no] mac-match-enable num-resources
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-egress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by egress filter policies using MAC criteria. The resources allocated are allocated on a first-come-first-serve basis among service entities (for example, SAP and IP interface) using MAC criteria egress filter policies. This option provides the use of all available resources exclusively by MAC criteria egress filter policies and provides larger number of policies to be used.

The resources cannot be shared with any other egress filter policies that specify other match criteria. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by egress filter policies using MAC criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a filter policy using this match criteria.

Note:

It is possible to use MAC policies by allocating resources that are shared with other match criteria. This option allows for better scaling.

Default 

no mac-match-enable

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.
Values—
0 to 2

 

Default—
0

eth-cfm

Syntax 
eth-cfm [num-resources]
no eth-cfm
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 (IMMv2 and IMM-c) and 7210 SAS-R12 (IMMv2 and IMM-c)

Description 
Note:

This command applies only to VPLS SAPs on IMMv2 and IMM-c.

This command enables the context to allocate resources for CFM bi-directional MIPs in a VPLS service.

The no form of this command allows the MIPs to retain the Down MEP by de-allocating the resources.

On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, the system does not allocate any ETH-CFM resource slices by default. The user must allocate ETH-CFM resource slices manually. The default number of resource slices is 0 and a maximum of 1 slice can be allocated.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by ETH-CFM. Entering a value of def allocates the default number of resource slices.
Values—
Table 48 lists the parameter values.
Table 48:  Number of Resources Available for ETH-CFM 

Platforms

Min value

Max value

Default

7210 SAS-R6

0

1

0

7210 SAS-R12

0

1

0

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c 1

0

1

0

    Note:

  1. Applicable only on SAPs.

 

bidir-mip-egress

Syntax 
bidir-mip-egress [num-resources]
no bidir-mip-egress
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam>eth-cfm
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 (IMMv2 and IMM-c) and 7210 SAS-R12 (IMMv2 and IMM-c)

Description 

This command allocates resources for the VPLS bi-directional MIP (both ingress and egress directions) on SAPs only from the egress internal TCAM resource pool.

Note:

  1. The resources in the egress internal TCAM resource pool are shared with other features.
    To assign resources to a specific feature, resources can be reallocated from other features. For example, you can release resources by disabling the policies associated with a SAP.
  2. Resources must be allocated from this pool before bi-directional MIPs can be configured on VPLS SAPs.
  3. Bi-directional MIPs on VPLS SAPs can be enabled only when the bidir-mip-egress resource slice is allocated and vpls-sap-bidir is enabled in the configure>service>vpls>eth-cfm context.

The no form of this command allocates no resources to this feature.

Default 

no bidir-mip-egress

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the number of resources to allocate.
Values—
0 to 1

 

mac-auth-res

Syntax 
mac-auth-res num-resources
no mac-auth-res
Context 
config>system>resource-profile>egress-internal-tcam
config>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp (standalone), 7210 SAS-R6 (all IMMs), 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink operating modes)

Description 

This command configures the allocation of resources for MAC authentication from the ingress internal TCAM pool and egress internal TCAM pool. Resources must be allocated from both ingress and egress TCAM pools before MAC authentication can be used. If resources are not allocated from both pools, the system returns an error message and MAC authentication cannot be enabled.

The configured number of resources specifies the number of resource pool slices allocated for use by MAC authentication. One entry is used for each authenticated source MAC address. The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be authenticated is limited by the number of entries allocated to the feature using this command. The maximum number of MAC address entries is limited by the maximum number of entries available in the ingress internal TCAM pool and the egress internal TCAM pool.

The no form of this command removes all resources allocated to MAC authentication; further attempts to enable MAC authentication on an Ethernet port using the mac-auth command will fail unless resources are first reallocated using the mac-auth-res command. The no form of the mac-auth-res command cannot be executed when MAC authentication is enabled on at least one port.

Default 

no mac-auth-res

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the number of resources to allocate for MAC authentication. Configuring a value of 0 is equivalent to configuring no mac-auth-res and effectively disables MAC authentication.
Values—
0 to 1

 

g8032-control-sap-tags

Syntax 
[no] g8032-control-sap-tags vlan-range
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command configures the range of VLANs per IMM to be used internally with G8032 MEPs that support hardware CCM message processing.

Note:

Users must ensure that the VLANs configured for use with G8032 MEPs are not configured for any of the SAPs configured on the IMM.

Use one of the VLANs configured with this command to configure the VLAN for the G8032 MEP configure>eth-ring>path>eth-cfm>mep>control-sap-tag.

Default 

no g8032-control-sap-tags

Parameters 
vlan-range—
Specifies the range of VLANs per IM.
Values—
start-vlan — 3000 to 3512 (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)
                     512 to 768 (7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE:standalone and                      standalone-VC)
end -vlan — 3000 to 3512 (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)
                     512 to 768 (7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE:standalone and                      standalone-VC)

 

qos-sap-egress-resource

Syntax 
qos-sap-egress-resource num-resources
no qos-sap-egress-resource
Context 
config>system>res-prof>ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command configures resource allocation for SAP-based egress queuing from the ingress-internal-tcam resource pool. If port-based queuing is disabled, users must allocate resources for SAP-based egress queuing using this command. If no resources are allocated, SAPs cannot be created.

When port-based queuing is enabled, resources can be taken away from SAP-based egress queues and allocated to other features that share the ingress-internal-tcam pool (for example, SAP ingress QoS and Ingress ACLs).

Note:

This command is not supported on IMM-c cards. SAP functionality with per SAP egress queues is not supported on IMM-c cards.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

0

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the amount of resources that are allocated towards SAP-based egress queues.
Values—
0 to 2

 

eth-cfm

Syntax 
eth-cfm
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M

Description 

This command provides access to the ETH-CFM commands in the resource profile context.

symmetric-qos-downmeps

Syntax 
[no] symmetric-qos-downmeps
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>eth-cfm
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network mode)

Description 

This command enables the use of symmetric QoS down MEPs and allocates the hardware resource needed to support using the FC determined at the ingress of the down MEP, such that the FC has an effect on marking the CFM message sent out of the down MEP. Using the FC determined at ingress improves alignment of QoS marking behavior for OAM packets with that of service data.

After executing this command, the configuration must be saved and the node must be rebooted for the command to take effect. The show system resource-profile active command displays the current value used by software. The show system resource-profile configured command displays the configured value, which can be different than the value the software uses because the configured value takes effect only after the configuration is saved and the node is rebooted.

The resource pool in hardware is shared with QoS MPLS EXP marking. The QoS software module uses resources from this pool to provide the ability to mark MPLS EXP for packets sent out of IP interfaces. Before enabling the command, ensure resources are available. To determine the resource availability, use the tools dump system-resources command and look at the values under “Shared Egr QOS MAP Entries”, as shown in the following output. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide for more information on tools dump commands.

SAS# tools dump system-resources 
Resource Manager info at 005 m 12/15/17 06:32:44.794:
 
Hardware Resource Usage per Node:
                                 |   Total   | Allocated |    Free    
  -------------------------------+-----------+-----------+------------
          Max System Ecmp Routes |           |         16|           
 
</snipped>
 
Hardware Resource Usage for Slot #1, CardType iom-sas, Cmplx
                                 |   Total   | Allocated |    Free    
  -------------------------------+-----------+-----------+------------
       SAP Ingress QoS Policies  |       1791|          2|        1789
        Access Egr. QoS Policies |        255|          2|         253
         SAP Egress QoS Policies |       2047|          2|        2045
 
</snipped>
 
      Shared Egr QOS MAP Entries |         15|          0|          15
 
</snipped>

Using the resource pool to enable symmetric QoS for down MEPs reduces the number of resources available for the egress LSP EXP marking map by one.

The no form of this command removes allocated resources.

Default 

no symmetric-qos-downmeps

ingress-internal-tcam

Syntax 
ingress-internal-tcam
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to allocate ingress internal TCAM resources.

The ingress internal TCAM resource pool is shared by multiple features. The resources are allocated in chunks of fixed size; multiple features cannot share the same chunk. The users can allocate the available resources based on their feature scaling requirements. The resource usage for different features is provided in the CLI description. The system allocates resources to the feature from its allocated chunk until the chunk runs out of resources. The users can reallocate chunks of resources from features that do not need to be enabled.

To free up the resources for use by one or more features, modify the configuration to release chunks of resources that are in use by other features. For example, to free up a chunk of resources allocated to ingress ACLs MAC criteria and allocate the chunk to IP criteria, perform the following steps.

  1. Remove the association of all the SAPs with ingress ACLs that use a MAC criteria policy.
  2. Change the resource profile configuration to allocate the chunk to IP criteria.
  3. Create (can be done before hand) and associate the SAPs with IP criteria.

For another example, to free up a chunk of resources used by ingress ACLs and allocate it towards SAP ingress QoS classification, perform the following steps.

  1. Remove the association of all the SAPs with ingress ACLs.
  2. Change the resource profile configuration to reduce the chunk resources allocated to ingress ACLs (and also to reduce the amount configured for specific match-criteria).
  3. Allocate the chunk of resources to SAP ingress QoS classification feature.
  4. Configure the SAPs with the SAP ingress QoS policies.

Table 49 describes the sharing of the ingress internal TCAM resource pool among the features on different 7210 SAS platforms.

Table 49:  Ingress Internal TCAM Resource Sharing (Platforms and Features) 

Platform

Features Sharing Ingress Internal TCAM Resource Pool

7210 SAS-M access-uplink mode

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM UP MEP
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM UP MEP
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-M network mode

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP
  4. G8032 Fast-flood support
  5. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  6. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-T network mode

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP
  4. G8032 Fast-flood support
  5. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  6. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-Mxp

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. MAC authentication
  6. Access port ingress QoS policies
  7. Network port QoS policies
  8. IP-MPLS control plane protocols

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, the features that share the resource pool are different based on the IMM card type.

On IMMv1, IMMv2, and IMM-c cards 1, this resource pool is shared among the following features:

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  2. ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM MEP (Up and Down)
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. network port and IP interface ingress QoS classification
  6. SAP egress based queuing and scheduling (not applicable to IMM-c cards)
  7. CPU protection
  8. MAC authentication (7210 SAS-R6 only)
  9. access port ingress QoS policies

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone)

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (IPv4 and IPv6 match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP, Down MEP
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (IPv4 and IPv6 match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP, SAP Down MEP, SDP Down MEP, ingress MIP
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone)

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (IPv4 and IPv6 match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP, Down MEP
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (IPv4 and IPv6 match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP, SAP Down MEP, SDP Down MEP, ingress MIP
  4. SAP ingress aggregate meter
  5. MAC authentication

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

  1. SAP ingress QoS classification (IPv4 and IPv6 match-criteria)
  2. Ingress ACLs (all of IPv4, IPv6, and MAC match-criteria)
  3. Ethernet CFM Up MEP, Down MEP

    Note:

  1. IMMv1 and IMM-c cards cannot be installed in the same 7210 SAS-R6 chassis. IMMv1 cards are not supported on the 7210 SAS-R12.
Note:

  1. In some scenarios, reassigning a chunk of resources among features may require the node to be rebooted. See the CLI description of the specific feature for more information.
  2. The ingress internal TCAM pool of resources is available per node on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone), and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE. On the 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone-VC), 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12, it is available as a per-IMM pool of resources.
  3. The number of chunks and the number of resources per chunk varies among the different platforms. Contact your Nokia technical support representative for more information.
  4. To be enabled, some features require the allocation of a specific number of chunks (greater than 1). If the minimum number of chunks is not assigned, the system cannot allocate the required resources to the feature, which causes the command associated with the feature to fail.

acl-sap-ingress

Syntax 
acl-sap-ingress [num-resources]
no acl-sap-ingress
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by ingress filter policies using any of the supported match criteria. This command limits the total amount of chunks allocated for use by ingress filter policies to the value specified by num-resources. In other words, the cumulative sum of chunks allocated to different match criteria supported by ingress filter policies cannot exceed the value configured with num-resources.

Ingress ACL resources are shared with SAP ingress aggregate meter. See the sap-aggregate-meter command for more information.

The no form of this command removes any allocated resources for use by filter policies. Consequently, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a filter policy using any of the match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the amount of resources that can be allocated for use by ACL policies.

Some platforms include the value def. If the user specifies def, the software allocates the default amount of resources based on the 7210 SAS platform. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, the amount of default resources allocated also varies based on the IMM plugged into the slot.

Values—
Table 50 lists the parameter values and the values used for the def keyword on different 7210 SAS platforms and on different IMM types.
Table 50:  Number of Resources Available for ACL-SAP-Ingress 

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

5

5

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

7

3

7210 SAS-T network mode (per node)

0

6

3

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

10

2

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

10

3

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

8 1

3

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

3

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

3

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

2

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

3

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

2

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

4

1

    Note:

  1. The maximum value is 9 if qos-network-ingress-resource is configured as 0.

 

ipv4-ipv6-128-match-enable

Syntax 
[no] ipv4-ipv6-128-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-ingress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by ingress filter policies using ipv6 criteria with 128-bit IPv6 addresses.

The resources can be shared with IPv4 ingress filter policies. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information on how to allow filter policies using IPv4 criteria to share resources with filter policies that use IPv6 criteria with 128-bit address and resource allocation and fields available for use.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by ingress filter policies using ipv6 criteria with 128-bit IPv6 addresses. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.

Some platforms include the value max. If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to the service entity associated with an ingress filter policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to ingress filter policies (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam acl-sap-ingress command) and chunks are available for use.

Values—
Table 51 lists the parameter values.
Table 51:  Number of Resources Available for IPv4-IPv6-128-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

5

0

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

7

3

7210 SAS-T Network Mode (per node)

0

6

3

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0 (per IMM)

5

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0 (per IMM)

7

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0 (per IMM)

7 1

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

4

max

    Note:

  1. The maximum value is 9 if acl-sap-ingress is configured as 9.

 

ip-dscp-port-if-match-enable

Syntax 
ip-dscp-port-if-match-enable num-resources
no ip-dscp-port-if-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>qos-sap-ingress-resource
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12.

Description 

This command allocates resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies that use IP DSCP table-based classification.

The available resources are used by software to allocate policers for SAPs whose ingress policy uses the IP DSCP table-based classification policy. The users need to allocate resources from the ingress internal TCAM pool before DSCP classification can be used. This means users need to take away resources from other features such as mac-match criteria from the SAP ingress classification or ACL ingress to allocate resources for DSCP classification.

Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

The no form of this command does not allocate any resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using a DSCP table-based classification policy. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a SAP ingress QoS policy using the DSCP table-based classification policy.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources (slices) for use by the DSCP table-based classification policy. Each slice has a fixed number of entries. DSCP table-based classification requires exclusive use of the allocated resources.

If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with an ingress filter policy using this criteria, provided that the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to qos-sap-ingress-qos resource pool (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam qos-sap-ingress-resource command) and chunks are available for use.

Values—
0 to 10, max (7210 SAS-Mxp)
0 to 12, max (7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)  

 

Default—
0

ipv4-mac-match-enable

Syntax 
ipv4-mac-match-enable num-resources
no ipv4-mac-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>qos-sap-ingress-resource
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using both MAC (any) and IPv4 criteria (any) criteria in a policy.

The available resources is used by software to allocate resources for SAP ingress policies using the following criteria - either both IPv4 criteria any and MAC criteria any, only mac criteria any, only ipv4 criteria, dot1p-only criteria, ipv4 dscp-only criteria and ipv6 dscp-only criteria. It is not used for SAP ingress policies that use ipv6 criteria any.

Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide and the 7210 SAS-R6, R12 Quality of Service Guide for more information on resource allocation.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using both MAC and IPv4 criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, then software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with an ingress filter policy or SAP ingress QoS policy using this match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this match criteria. If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with an ingress filter policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to ingress filter policies (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam qos-sap-ingress-resource command) and chunks are available for use.
Values—
Table 52 lists the parameter values.
Table 52:  Number of Resources Available for IPv4-MAC-Match-Enable 

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-T network mode (per node)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

12

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

3

max

 

ipv4-match-enable

Syntax 
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
no ipv4-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-ingress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by ingress filter policies using IPv4 criteria.

The resource cannot be shared with ingress filter policies using mac criteria or ipv6 criteria. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

Ingress ACL resources are shared with SAP ingress aggregate meter. See the sap-aggregate-meter command for more information.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by ingress filter policies using ipv4 criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.

If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with an ingress filter policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to ingress filter policies (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam acl-sap-ingress command) and chunks are available for us.

Values—
Table 53 lists the parameter values.
Table 53:  Number of Resources Available for IPv4-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

2

max

7210 SAS-T network mode (per node)

0

2

max

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

12

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

9

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

4

max

 

ipv4-match-enable

Syntax 
ipv4-match-enable num-resources
no ipv4-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>qos-sap-ingress-resource
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using IPv4 criteria (any).

The resource cannot be shared with SAP ingress QoS filter policies using mac criteria or ipv6 criteria. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using ipv4 criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a SAP ingress QoS policy using this match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.

If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with a SAP ingress QoS policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with a SAP ingress QoS policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to SAP ingress QoS policies (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam qos-sap-ingress- resource command) and chunks are available for use.

Values—
Table 54 lists the parameter values.
Table 54:  Number of Resources Available for IPv4-Match-Enable 

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-T access-uplink mode (per node)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-T network mode (per node)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

12

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

3

max

 

ipv6-64-only-match-enable

Syntax 
ipv6-64-only-match-enable num-resources
no ipv6-64-only-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-ingress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by ingress filter policies using ipv6 criteria with 64-bit IPv6 addresses. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information on resource allocation and fields available for use.

The resources cannot be shared with IPv4 filter policies or IPv6 filter policies specifying 128-bit addresses.

Ingress ACL resources are shared with SAP ingress aggregate meter. See the sap-aggregate-meter command for more information.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by filter policies using ipv6 criteria with 64-bit IPv6 addresses. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.

If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with an ingress filter policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to ingress filter policies (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam acl-sap-ingress command) and chunks are available for use.

Values—
Table 55 lists the parameter values.
Table 55:  Number of Resources Available for IPv6-64-Only-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-T Access-uplink mode (per node)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-T Network Mode (per node)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c (per IMM)

0

9

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

4

0

 

mac-match-enable

Syntax 
mac-match-enable num-resources
no mac-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>acl-sap-ingress
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by ingress filter policies using mac criteria.

The resources cannot be shared with policies that use either IPv4 or IPv6 match criteria. Refer the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information about the resource allocation for ingress filter policy and fields available for use with ingress filter policy.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by ingress filter policies using mac criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria.

Note:

Ingress ACL resources are shared with SAP ingress aggregate meter. See the sap-aggregate-meter command for more information.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.

If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with an ingress filter policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to ingress filter policies (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam acl-sap-ingress command) and chunks are available for use.

Values—
Table 56 lists the parameter values.
Table 56:  Number of Resources Available for MAC-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-T Access-Uplink mode (per node)

0

2

max

7210 SAS-T Network Mode (per node)

0

2

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c (per IMM)

0

9

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

5

max

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

4

max

 

mac-match-enable

Syntax 
mac-match-enable num-resources
no mac-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>qos-sap-ingress-resource
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using MAC criteria (any).

The resources cannot be shared with policies that use either IPv4 or IPv6 match criteria. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide for more information about the resource allocation for SAP ingress QoS policy.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using mac criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a SAP ingress QoS policy using this match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.

If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with SAP ingress QoS policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to SAP ingress QoS policies (configured with the config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam qos-sap-ingress-resource command) and chunks are available for use.

Values—
Table 57 lists the parameter values.
Table 57:  Number of Resources Available for MAC-Match-Enable  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-T Access-Uplink mode (per node)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-T Network Mode (per node)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

12

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

max

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

3

max

 

cpu-protection

Syntax 
cpu-protection [num-resources]
no cpu-protection
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allocates CAM entries and meters for CPU protection rules and policies by removing entries from other features that share the ingress internal TCAM resource pool.

Default 

0

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the number of resources. Specifying the def keyword specifies the default number of resources.
Values—
0 to 2, def

 

Default—
0

eth-cfm

Syntax 
eth-cfm num-resources
no eth-cfm
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to allocate resources for CFM UP MEPs and CFM Down MEPs.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by CFM UP MEPs, and it will allocate the default amount of resources for CFM Down MEPs.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by ETH-CFM.
Values—
Table 58 lists the parameter values.
Table 58:  Number of Resources Available for ETH-CFM  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

1

0

7210 SAS-T Access-Uplink mode (per node)

0

1

0

7210 SAS-T Network mode (per node)

0

1

0

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

1

3

1

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

1

3

1

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

1

3

1

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

1

3

1

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

1

3

1

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

2

4

2

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

1

3

1

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

2

4

2

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

1

3

1

 

down-mep

Syntax 
down-mep num-resources
no down-mep
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>eth-cfm
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command enables the user to allocate more resources and increase the number of CFM/Y.1731 Down MEPs. By default, the system allocates a single slice for use with Down MEP.

Resources from this pool are allocated towards the following:

  1. down MEP on SDP binding
  2. ingress MIPs on SAPs and SDP Bindings
  3. ingress and Egress MIPs on SAPs and SDP Bindings and some entries are used for system internal use

The no form of this command is not supported. At least a single slice must be allocated for use with Down MEP, as some of the resources are reserved for system internal use. The software enforces it and errors out an attempt to change it to a value less than 1.

Note:

This is a per IMM resource for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 feature. For SAPs, resources are needed only on the IMM where the SAP is allocated. For SDPs, resources are needed on all the IMMs, as a MPLS packet could potentially be received on any network port.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by down-mep.
Values—
1 to 3

 

Default—
1

sap-down-mep

Syntax 
sap-down-mep num-resources
no sap-down-mep
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>eth-cfm
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures resources for CFM/Y.1731 down MEPs on SAPs.

The no form of this command removes resources for down MEPs on SAPs.

Default 

1

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by down MEPs on SAPs.
Values—
1

 

sdp-down-mep-ing-mip

Syntax 
sdp-down-mep-ing-mip num-resources
no sdp-down-mep-ing-mip
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>eth-cfm
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command configures resources for CFM/Y.1731 down MEPs on SDPs and ingress MIPs.

The no form of this command removes resources for down MEPs on SDPs and ingress MIPs.

Default 

1

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by down MEPs on SDPs and ingress MIPs.
Values—
1 to 2

 

up-mep

Syntax 
up-mep num-resources
no up-mep
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>eth-cfm
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to allocate resources for CFM UP MEPs.

Resources for UP MEPs created on SAP and SDP Bindings are allocated from this pool.

Note:

  1. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, when a UP MEP on a SDP Binding is created resources are allocated for the UP MEP on all the IMMs and when a UP MEP on a SAP is created resources are allocated only on the IMM where the SAP is configured or on the set of IMMS if the SAP is configured over a LAG.
  2. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, resources from this pool are used only for UP MEPs configured in Epipe services. UP MEPs configured in a VPLS service use resources from a different pool.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by CFM UP MEPs. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to configure an UP MEP.

Default 

0

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by CFM UP MEPs.
Values—
0 to 2 (7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone and standalone-VC, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-Mxp)
0 to 1 (7210 SAS-M and 7210 SAS-T)

 

ipv6-ipv4-match-enable

Syntax 
ipv6-ipv4-match-enable num-resources
no ipv6-ipv4-match-enable
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam>qos-sap-ingress-resource
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates resources from the SAP ingress QoS resource pool for ipv6-criteria. Users need to use this command before using IPv6 criteria SAP ingress QoS policies.

These resources can be shared with SAP ingress policies that use IPv4 criteria.

Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information about the resource allocation for ingress filter policy and fields available for use with ingress filter policy.

Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide for more information about the resource allocation for SAP ingress QoS policy.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by ingress SAP QoS policies using IPv6 criteria. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with an ingress filter policy using this match criteria.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this SAP ingress Qos policy match criteria.

If the user specifies max, the software allocates one chunk when the first SAP is associated with a SAP ingress QoS policy using this match criteria. It continues to allocate resources to SAPs associated with SAP ingress QoS policy using this criteria, as long as the total amount of resources allocated does not exceed the resources allocated to SAP ingress QoS policies (configured with the command config system resource-profile ingress-internal-tcam qos-sap-ingress-resource command) and chunks are available for use.

Values—
Table 59 lists the parameter values.
Table 59:  Number of Resources Available for IPv6-IPv4-Match-Enable 

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

10

0

7210 SAS-T Access-Uplink mode (per node)

0

7

0

7210 SAS-T Network Mode (per node)

0

6

0

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

7

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

12

max

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

10

max

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

0

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

3

0

 

ip-mpls-protocols

Syntax 
ip-mpls-protocols num-resources
no ip-mpls-protocols
Context 
config>system>resource-profile>ing-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command configures an additional slice from the ingress-internal-tcam resource pool for use by the IP and MPLS protocols.

On boot up, by default, the software allocates a single slice of entries from the ingress-internal-tcam resource pool for use by the IP and MPLS control protocols. Entries from that slice are allocated to the following protocols on a first-come-first-serve basis when the user enables the protocol: OSPFv2, OSPFv3, BGP, IS-IS, LDP, RSVP, VRRP, MC-LAG, VRRPv3, PCEP, PIM, IGMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, and PTP.

However, the default single slice of entries is not sufficient if all IP and MPLS control-plane protocols are enabled simultaneously. To allocate an additional slice to IP and MPLS protocols, use this command to set the value of num-resources to 2.

Note:

The software allocates protocol entries when the protocol is enabled and deallocates the protocol entries when the protocol (and all instances of the protocol, if any) is disabled. See the relevant CLI command descriptions for more information about resource allocation for specific protocols. To display information about the utilization of resources allocated to IP and MPLS protocols, use the tools>dump>system-resources CLI command.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

ip-mpls-protocols 1

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the number of slices to be allocated for IP and MPLS control-plane protocols.
Values—
1, 2

 

qos-access-port-ingress-resource

Syntax 
qos-access-port-ingress-resource num-resources
no qos-access-port-ingress-resource
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ing-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 
Note:

This command is not supported on a 7210 SAS-R6 equipped with the IMMv1 card.

This command allocates ingress internal TCAM resources to access-ingress port policies when the access port is configured in port mode. If adequate TCAM resources are not allocated, setting the access-ingress-qos-mode command to port-mode is not allowed.

If access ports are currently configured to use a port-based access ingress QoS policy, setting the qos-access-port-ingress-resource command to 0 (which will set the number of resources allocated to the access port ingress QoS policy to 0) is not allowed. Resources allocated to access ingress QoS policies are used to allocate meter resources for the port-based access ingress QoS policy.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

qos-access-port-ingress 0

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the amount of resources allocated to QoS access port ingress policies.
Values—
Table 60 lists the number of resources that can be allocated to QoS access port ingress policies per 7210 SAS platform.
Table 60:  Number of Resources Allocated to QoS Access Port Ingress Policies on 7210 SAS Platforms  

7210 SAS Platform

Number of Resources

7210 SAS-Mxp

0 to 4

7210 SAS-R6 IMM-b

0 to 3

7210 SAS-R6 IMM-c

0 to 1

7210 SAS-R12

0 to 3

 

qos-network-ingress-resource

Syntax 
qos-network-ingress-resource num-resources
no qos-network-ingress-resource
Context 
config>system>res-prof>ing-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command removes resources allocated to port-based and IP interface-based network ingress QoS policies associated with network and hybrid ports, and makes the resources available for other features that share the ingress-internal-tcam resource pool (for example, SAP ingress classification and ingress ACLs).

Note:

  1. The minimum num-resources configurable is 0 and the maximum num-resources configurable is 2. The default num-resources is 2 for the default system resource profile and user-configured system resource profile. A value of 1 is not allowed.
  2. If the user configures the value 2, one slice is allocated to the network QoS policy IP interface, and one slice is allocated to the network QoS policy port.
  3. A reboot is not required after assigning a new value to the qos-network-ingress-resource command. That is, the value of this command can be changed from 0 to 2 if there are resources available in the ingress-internal-tcam pool. Similarly, the value can be changed from 2 to 0 if no network or hybrid ports are configured. If a network port or hybrid port is configured, changing the value from 2 to 0 is fails and the system sends an error message.

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

qos-network-ingress-resource 0

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the number of resources allocated to network ingress QoS policy queues.
Values—
0, 2, def

 

qos-sap-ingress-resource

Syntax 
qos-sap-ingress-resource num-resources
no qos-sap-ingress-resource
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ing-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies using any of the supported match criteria. This command limits the total amount of chunks allocated for use by SAP ingress QoS policies to the value specified by num-resources. In other words, the cumulative sum of chunks allocated to different match criteria supported by SAP ingress QoS policies cannot exceed the value configured with num-resources.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by SAP ingress QoS policies.

If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate a service entity (for example, SAP and IP interface) with a SAP ingress QoS policy using any of the match criteria. )

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the amount of resources that can be allocated for use by SAP ingress QoS policies.

If the user specifies def, the software allocates the default amount of resources based on the 7210 SAS platform. On 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, the amount of default resources allocated also varies based on the IMM plugged into the slot.

Values—
Table 61 lists the parameter values and provides the values used for def keyword on different 7210 SAS platforms and on different IMM types.
Table 61:  Number of Resources Available for QoS-SAP-Ingress-Resource 

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

10

5

7210 SAS-T Access-uplink mode (per node)

0

7

4

7210 SAS-T Network Mode (per node)

0

6

3

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

7

3

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

12

5

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

10

4

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

10

5

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

4

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

4

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

7

4

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

6

4

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

0

3

3

 

qos-sap-egress-resource

Syntax 
qos-sap-egress-resource num-resources
no qos-sap-egress-resource
Context 
config>system>res-prof>ing-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (only supported on IMMv1 and IMMv2 cards, it is not supported on IMM-c cards)

Description 

This command configures resource allocation for SAP-based egress queuing. If port-based queuing is disabled, then users must allocate resources for SAP-based egress queuing using this command. If no resources are allocated, SAPs cannot be created.

When port-based queuing is enabled, resources can be taken away from SAP-based egress queues and allocated to other features that share the ingress-internal-tcam pool (for example, SAP ingress qos and Ingress ACLs).

The no form of this command reverts to the default value.

Default 

0

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the amount of resources that are allocated towards SAP-based egress queues.
Values—
0 to 2

 

sap-aggregate-meter

Syntax 
sap-aggregate-meter num-resource
no sap-aggregate-meter
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on the 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command allocates maximum resources for use by meters/policers used to implement SAP ingress aggregate meter functionality from the global pool of ingress CAM resources. Before using the configure service sap ingress aggregate-meter-rate command, the user must ensure that resources are allocated to aggregate meters using this command.

Note:

For the command to take effect, the node must be restarted after making the change.

This command allocates meter resources from the available global ingress CAM resource pool. By default, when resources are allocated to SAP ingress QoS policy, along with the CAM classification entries, meter resources are also allocated. Hence, if the user needs to use SAP aggregate meter functionality they cannot allocate all the available resources in the global resource pool to SAP ingress QoS policies and ETH-CFM UP MEP. They need to allocate some resources for use by SAP aggregate meter (or SAP ingress ACLs or G8032-fast-flood feature).

By default, when resources are allocated for ingress ACLs (and G8032 in 7210 SAS-M network mode only), only classification entries are used and meters resources are not used. SAP aggregate meter resources can use meters from this pool of meter resources. In other words, SAP aggregate meters are stolen from the unused meters in the resources allocated to ingress ACLs.

If the user allocates resources for ingress ACLs (or for G8032-fast-flood feature in 7210 SAS-M network mode only) and configures resources for SAP aggregate meter using this command, the software does the following.

  1. It does not allocate any additional resources from the available global ingress CAM resource pool to SAP aggregate meter, if it can allocate the required number of meters from the chunks/resources allocated to ingress ACLs (or from resources allocated to G8032-fast-flood in 7210 SAS-M network mode only). For example, if the user has allocated 2 chunks of 512 entries each for ingress ACLs and then configures sap-aggregate-meter to use 2 chunks to use about 512 aggregate meters, the software will not allocate any additional entries from the available global resource pool.
  2. If the number of ingress ACL resources allocated by user is less than the number of resources assigned by the user to sap-aggregate-meter (or if no resources are allocated to G8032), then it allocates the difference from the available global ingress CAM resource pool. For example, if the user has allocated 1 chunk of 512 entries for ingress ACLs and then configures sap-aggregate-meter to use 2 chunks to use about 512 aggregate meters, the software will allocate 1 additional chunk (2 chunks required for SAP aggregate - 1 chunk alloted to ingress ACLs) for use with SAP aggregate meter. The classification entries associated with additional chunk alloted for SAP aggregate-meter can be used by the ingress ACLs policies. It cannot be used by SAP ingress QoS policies and eth-cfm UP MEP.

Similar checks as above are performed when the user allocates resources for SAP aggregate meters using this command and then configures resources for ingress ACLs (or for G8032-fast-flood feature). That is, the software does the following.

  1. It does not allocate any additional entries from the available global ingress CAM resource pool to ingress ACLs, if it can allocate the required number of classification entries from the chunks allocated to SAP aggregate meter feature. For example, if the user has allocated 2 chunks of 512 entries each for SAP aggregate meters and then configures ingress ACLs to use 2 chunks to use about 512 classification entries, the software will not allocate any additional entries from the available global resource pool.
  2. If the number of SAP aggregate meter resources allocated by user is less than the number of resources requested by the user for ingress ACLs, then it allocates the difference from the available global ingress CAM resource pool. For example, if the user has allocated 1 chunk of 512 entries for SAP aggregate meters and then configures ingress ACLs to use 2 chunks, the software will allocate 1 additional chunk (2 chunks required for ingress ACLs - 1 chunk alloted to SAP aggregate meter) for use with ingress ACLs. The meter resources associated with additional chunk alloted for ingress ACLs can be assigned to the SAP aggregate feature, if need be.

Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide and the 7210 SAS-M, T, R6, R12, Mxp, Sx, S Router Configuration Guide for more information about use of SAP aggregate feature, ingress CAM resource allocation, and use of ACLs policies respectively.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by SAP ingress aggregate meter. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to associate an aggregate-meter with SAP ingress.

Parameters 
num-resources—
Specifies the maximum amount of resources for use by this filter match criteria.

If the user specifies def, the software allocates the default amount of resources based on the 7210 SAS platform. On 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, the amount of default resources allocated also varies based on the IMM plugged into the slot.

Values—
Table 62 lists the parameter values and provides the values used for def keyword on different 7210 SAS platforms and on different IMM types.
Table 62:  Number of Resources Available for SAP-Aggregate-Meter  

Platforms

Min value (per node)

Max value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

0

1

0

7210 SAS-T Access-uplink mode (per node)

0

2

2

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMMv1)

0

4

2

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMMv2)

0

4

3

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM-c)

0

4

3

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

0

4

3

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

3

3

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

3

2

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (per node) (standalone)

0

3

3

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

0

3

2

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE (per node)

Not Supported

Not Supported

Not Supported

 

qos

Syntax 
qos
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the QoS parameters.

mbs-pool

Syntax 
mbs-pool {node | port}
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>qos
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

On 7210 SAS-T, the user has an option to configure the MBS pool per node or per port. This command allows the user to configure the MBS pool as per their requirement. A reboot is needed whenever the value of this parameter is changed for the new values to take effect.

If the users configure a per node MBS pool, then each of the 8 queues available on a port is allocated a CBS amount of committed buffers. The remaining amount of buffers is allocated towards the MBS pool that is available for sharing among all the queues across all the ports of the node. In other words the MBS pool is per node.

If the users configure a per port MBS pool, the available buffers are equally divided up among the all the ports of the node. With this scheme of allocation, each port gets some portion of the buffers for its exclusive use. Some of these buffers are allocated towards the CBS per queue and the rest is assigned to the per port MBS pool. To allow operators better control over which ports get larger portion of queue buffers, operator is provided with an option to decommission ports. The commands associated with decommissioning of ports are only allowed when the node is booted with the option to use per-port MBS pool. In other words, decommission entries are executed only if the mbs-pool parameter is set to port.

If the mbs-pool parameter is set to node and decommission entries are configured, then an error should be reported. All decommission entries must be removed if the mbs-pool parameter needs to be changed from port to node.

Default 

node

Parameters 
node—
Keyword to use per-node MBS pool.
port—
Keyword to use per-port MBS pool, along with an option to relocate buffers to ports that need better burst handling capability using the decommissioning commands.

port-scheduler-mode

Syntax 
port-scheduler-mode
no port-scheduler-mode
Context 
config>system>resource-profile>qos
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command configures the queuing mode to be used for SAPs configured on all the ports of the node.

When port-scheduler-mode is enabled, software allocates 8 egress queues per port and all the SAPs configured on the access port or hybrid port will share the 8 egress queues for traffic sent out of that port. In this mode, SAPs configured on hybrid port shares the egress queues with network port traffic. Enabling port-scheduler-mode affects the behavior for all the SAPs configured on all the access and hybrid port. In this mode, per SAP egress queues are not available.

In this mode, resources allocated towards SAP egress queues in the ingress-internal-tcam pool are not required by this feature and can be allocated towards other features. See the qos-sap-egress-resource command for more information.

The no form of this command disables port-scheduler-mode, causing per SAP egress queues to be available for use. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide for more information on the two modes.

Enabling or disabling port-scheduler-mode requires a reboot of the node.

Default 

no port-scheduler-mode

router

Syntax 
router
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile
configure>system>global-res-profile
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 
Note:

The configure>system>resource-profile context is supported on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE.

The configure>system>global-res-profile context is supported on the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC.

This command enables the context to configure router parameters that is applicable to the entire chassis (in other words it applies to all IMMs).

ecmp

Syntax 
ecmp max-routes-dest
no ecmp
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>router
configure>system>global-res-profile>router
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 
Note:

The configure>system>resource-profile context is supported on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE.

The configure>system>global-res-profile context is supported on the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC.

This command configures the maximum amount of routes of same cost to the same IP destination/prefix when path sharing is enabled using IP ECMP. To enable optimum usage of hardware resources, software allocates hardware resources in groups of fixed number of entries. A group is a set of IP next-hop entries used by ECMP routes. The number of IP next-hop entries per group (which in turn dictates the maximum number of shared IP paths per IP destination/prefix) is also specified with commands. The software uses the same group if all the IP next-hop in use for the ECMP routes is the same.

This parameter also dictates the maximum number of paths that a single LDP FEC can use.

This command does not enable the use of IP ECMP. To enable IP ECMP, the user must use the config router ecmp command. The number of routes specified using the config router ecmp command cannot exceed the number of routes specified by this command, though it can be lesser. If its lesser, the software will use only the specified number routes. Specifying a lesser number of routes with config router ecmp will result in wastage of hardware resources. To enable LDP ECMP, see the configure system resource-profile router ldp-ecmp command.

Note:

  1. This command is a boot-time parameter and any change will take effect only after a reboot.
  2. On 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, the value specified with this command is used across all IMMs in the chassis.
Default 

1

Parameters 
max-routes-dest—
Specifies the number of ECMP routes.
Values—
1 to 16

 

ldp-ecmp

Syntax 
ldp-ecmp percent-value
no ldp-ecmp
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>router
configure>system>global-res-profile>router
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 
Note:

The configure>system>resource-profile context is supported on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE.

The configure>system>global-res-profile context is supported on the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC.

This command enables LDP ECMP and configures the percentage of the total amount of hardware ECMP resources to be allocated for use by LDP ECMP FECs.

The remaining amount of resources are allocated for use by IP ECMP. In other words, the hardware ECMP resources are shared by IP ECMP and LDP ECMP and this command allow user to allocate resources to them.

The no form disables LDP ECMP (by allocating zero resources to it) and the system installs only a single next-hop for every LDP FEC.

Note:

On 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, it is a system wide limit, applicable to all IMMs. If the user changes this value dynamically, the system adjusts the usage among IP and LDP ECMP as per the configuration.

The user can change the value of resources allocated towards IP ECMP routes and LDP ECMP FECs without requiring a reboot of the node as long as the following conditions are met. The configure system resource-profile router ldp-ecmp command cannot be modified until the value of the configure router ecmp command is set to 1. It is similar to the behavior available for the configure system resource-profile router ecmp command. The value cannot be changed until the value of the configure router ecmp command is set to 1.

Default 

no ldp-ecmp

Parameters 
percent-value—
Specifies the percentage of ECMP hardware resources to allocate to LDP ECMP. The rest is allocated towards IP ECMP.
Values—
0 to 100

 

max-ip-subnets

Syntax 
max-ip-subnets number
no max-ip-subnets
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>router
configure>system>global-res-profile>router
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 
Note:

The configure>system>resource-profile>router context is supported on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE.

The configure>system>global-res-profile>router context is supported on the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC.

This command configures the number of directly connected IP interfaces and subnets (both IPv4 and IPv6) the user plans to use on the node, so that only the requisite number of entries in the L3 forwarding table are allocated. On the 7210 SAS platforms, the hardware L3 forwarding table (that is, the IP IFB) stores the IP routes (both IPv4 and IPv6) received from routing peers and also stores the IP address prefix for the directly connected interfaces. The rest are available for use by IP routes received from peers.

This command provides the flexibility to earmark resources based on the number of directly connected interfaces required on the node, allowing the user to decrease the number of resources for directly connected subnets and consequently increase the number of entries available for IP routes received from peers. See the description of the max-ipv6-routes command for detailed information about IP route allocation.

Note:

  1. Each IPv4 subnet configured on the node requires 1 entry and each IPv6 subnet configured on the node requires 2 entries. Each IPv6 /64-bit address prefix requires twice the amount of space needed for an IPv4 address prefix. Additionally, the user must account for resources required for IPv6 primary and secondary addresses assigned to an IPv6 interface.
  2. The number of entries available for IP routes received from a peer is equal to the total number of L3 forwarding entries supported for the platform subtracted by the number of entries specified by this command.
  3. The software allocates entries from this pool on a FCFS (first come first serve) model based on the order of configuration of IP interfaces. An error is generated when the maximum limit is reached.
Default 

no max-ip-subnets (Software allocates a fixed number of entries towards this to maintain backward compatibility with releases prior to release 7.0.R3).

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the number of IP subnets for directly connected IP interfaces.
Values—
Table 63 lists the parameter values.
The minimum number of IPv6 interfaces is 2.
Table 63:  Number of Resources Available for Maximum IP Subnets  

Platforms

Min Value (per node)

Max Value (per node)

Default Values

7210 SAS-M

1

16000

384

7210 SAS-T

1

12000

500

7210 SAS-R6 (IMMv1/IMMv2)

1

28672

2000

7210 SAS-R12

1

28672

2000

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c

1

12288

2000

7210 SAS-Mxp

1

28672

850

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC)

1

12288

2000

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC)

1

12288

2000

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

1

12288

2000

 

max-ipv6-routes

Syntax 
[no] max-ipv6-routes number
Context 
configure>system>resource-profile>router
configure>system>global-res-profile>router
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 
Note:

The configure>system>resource-profile>router context is supported on the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone), and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE.

The configure>system>global-res-profile>router context is supported on the 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone-VC).

This command allocates route entries for /64-bit IPv6 prefix. Entries in the IPv4 forwarding table are shared among IPv4 and IPv6 routes. Before adding routes for IPv6 destinations, route entries in the route lookup table must be allocated for IPv6 addresses using this command. The remainder of the L3 forwarding table is used for IPv4 routing entries. The system does not allocate any IPv6 route entries by default for /64-bit prefix, and the user must allocate some resources before using IPv6.

Each IPv6 /64-bit route requires twice the amount of resources taken up by an IPv4 route. The number of hardware route entries allocated by the software for IPv6 /64-bit routes is equal to twice the amount of the value specified using this command.

Note:

  1. For this command to take effect, reboot the node after making the change.
  2. On the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, and 7210 SAS-R6 IMMv1, a separate route table is used for IPv6 /128-bit prefix route lookup. A limited amount of IPv6 /128-bit prefixes is supported. The software enables lookups in this table by default; no user configuration is required to enable IPv6 /128-bit route lookup.
  3. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 with IMMv2, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp, the IPv6 /128-bit prefixes are allocated by software on boot up. The resources are taken from the IP FIB shared with IPv4 and IPv6 /64-bit route entries. That is, unlike platforms like 7210 SAS-M and others, a separate route table is not available in hardware on these platforms. This affects the scaling of IPv4 routes when IPv6 /64-bit routes are allocated. See the following bullets for more information.
  4. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMMv2 card, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp, each IPv6 /128-bit route entry/address prefix requires 4 entries in the IP hardware route table, each IPv6 /64-bit address prefix requires 2 entries and each IPv4 route entry/address prefix requires 1 entry.
  5. The creation of IPv6 IP interfaces without allocating IPv6 route entries is allowed. However, only IPv6 hosts on the same IPv6 subnet are reachable.
  6. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, the value configured using this command is used across all IMMs in the chassis.
  7. The number of available IPv4 route entries in the L3 forwarding table is equal to the total L3 forwarding entries supported for the platform subtracted by the total number of entries reserved by this command and the number of entries reserved for IP subnets using the max-ip-subnets command. See the following bullets for more information.
  8. On the 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, and 7210 SAS-R6 IMMv1 card, the maximum number of IPv4 prefixes without any IPv6 interfaces configured and IPv6 /64-bit routes (that is, the max-ipv6-routes command is set to a value of zero) is equal to the maximum size of the route table supported for the platform. Contact a Nokia representative to learn more about the routing table scaling limits for each 7210 SAS platform.
Note:

(Continued)

  1. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMMv2 card, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), and 7210 SAS-Mxp, a pool of 4K IPv4 entries are allocated on system bootup primarily for use by about 256 /128-bit IPv6 addresses. The remaining entries can be shared with IPv4 prefix, if IPv6 is not enabled on the node. That is, without IPv6 enabled on the node, the maximum number of IPv4 prefixes possible is equal to the maximum size of the route table supported for the platform, reduced by 1K entries. The 1K entries correspond to those reserved by the system for allocation to IPv6 /128-bit addresses.
    Note that the maximum number of IPv4 prefixes includes the amount of addresses allocated for directly connected IP subnets (the user has an option to reserve the amount required for directly connected IPv4 subnets by configuring the max-ip-subnets command) and IPv4 routes statically configured on the node or learned dynamically using a routing protocol.
    For example, if the maximum size of the route table supported on the node is 32K, the total number of IPv4 prefixes (including both directly connected subnets and routes statically configured or dynamically learned using a routing protocol) is 31K (the 1K route entries are used to allocate up to 256 /128-bit IPv6 addresses). The maximum size of the route table quoted in the example is for illustration purposes only.
  2. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMMv2 card, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), and 7210 SAS-Mxp, the maximum number of IPv4 prefixes possible with IPv6 /64-bit routes configured is equal to the maximum size that the route table supports for the platform, reduced by the sum of the number of routes configured for IPv6 /64-bit prefixes and an amount of 4K entries (reserved for /128-bit IPv6 addresses). The user has an option to reserve resources used for IPv6 /64-bit prefix using the max-ipv6-routes command. When max-ipv6-routes is configured using a value greater than zero, the IPv4 prefixes can no longer use the space reserved for IPv6 /128-bit addresses. The software enforces the maximum number of IPv6 prefixes possible as less than the max-ipv6-routes value.
    Using the preceding example, if the maximum size of the route table supported on the node is 32K, total number of IPv4 prefixes (only dynamically learned ones using a routing protocol) is about 25K, assuming max-ipv6-routes is set to 1000 and max-ip-subnets is set to 1000. That is, 32K – (4K + 2 * 1K + 1K) = 25K (recollect each IPv6 /64-bit route entry requires twice the space of IPv4 route entry). The maximum size of the route table quoted in the example is for illustration purposes only.
  3. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMMv2 card, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC), 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, and 7210 SAS-Mxp, the maximum number of IPv6 /64-bit routes is equal to the number of routes configured using the max-ipv6-routes command.
    Using the preceding example, if the maximum size of the route table supported on the node is 32K, maximum number of IPv6 /64-bit prefixes (including only dynamically learned ones, using a routing protocol) is about 13500, assuming max-ipv6-routes is set to 13K and max-ip-subnets is set to 1000. The number of IPv4 routes allowed is zero (32K – (4K + 2 * 13500 + 1K) = 0 (recollect each IPv6 /64-bit route entry requires twice the space of IPv4 route entry). The maximum size of the route table quoted in the example is for illustration purposes only.

The following is the allocation scheme implemented for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c cards.

  1. Software partitions the hardware table into two - Partition #1 with 4k (4*1204) 32-bit entries and Partition #2 with 12k (12*1024) entries.
  2. Partition #1 can fit 128-bit IPv6 address and takes 4 * 32-bit entries each, 32-bit IPv4 entries taking one entry each (1*32-bit entry), and 64-bit IPv6 address taking 4 * 32-bit entries each; Lets call this L3-FIB-P1.
  3. Partition #2 can fit 32-bit IPv4 entries taking one entry each, and 64-bit IPv6 address taking 2 * 32-bit entries each; Lets call this L3-FIB-P2.
  4. Software reserves space for 256 128-bit IPv6 addresses in partition #1 (L3-FIB-P1); taking away 1024 32-bit entries and leaving around 3072 32-bit entries for use by either IPv4 prefixes or IPv6 prefixes. In other words, a maximum of 3072 IPv4 prefixes can fit in the remaining space if all of them were to be allocated to IPv4 or a maximum of 768 IPv6 (64-bit) prefixes can fit in the remaining space if all of them were to be allocated to IPv6.; Lets call the remaining space L3-FIB-P1-R.
  5. Software reserves max-ip-subnets 32-bit entries from partition #2 for use by directly connected IPv4 and IPv6 interfaces with IPv4/IPv6 address assigned. ‘max-ip-subnets’ is a configurable CLI parameter and allows user to reserve the amount of space required for directly connected IP interfaces. IPv6 directly connected interfaces are allocated space from this reserved only if the IPv6 address prefix is less than equal to 64-bit. They are allocated two entries each per IPv6 64-bit address prefix. IPv6 directly connected interfaces with IPv6 address prefix greater than 64-bit is allocated entries from partition #1. All IPv4 directly connected IP interfaces are allocated one entry each from this reserved space. The remaining space is used to store prefixes learned by the node. Lets call the remaining space L3-FIB-P2-R.
  6. L3-FIB-P2-R and L3-FIB-P1-R is used for allocating entries towards routes learned by the node statically or dynamically using a routing protocol. The software starts to allocate entries from L3-FIB-P2-R for both IPv4 addresses and IPv6 64-bit addresses, until all the resources are used up. It then allocates entries from L3-FIB-P1-R for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, until all of it is used up.
  7. If the user has configured max-ipv6-routes, the software reserves space for it in L3-FIB-P2-R for use by IPv6 routes. The amount of space reserved is equivalent to 2 * max-ipv6-routes. The remaining space in L3-FIB-P2-R and L3-FIB-P1-R is available for IPv4 routes. For example, if max-ipv6-routes is set to 1000, then 2000 /32-bit entries are allocated from L3-FIB-P2-R and reserved for IPv6 routes. The rest along with available entries in L3-FIB-P1-R are available for use by IPv4.

The no form of this command specifies that the software does not allocate any resources for use by IPv6 routes.

Default 

no max-ipv6-routes

Parameters 
number—
Specifies the maximum amount of entries to be used for IPv6 routes. Maximum values can be achieved assuming all the resources are allocated to IPv6 routes.
Values—
Table 64 lists the parameter values.
 
Table 64:  Number of Resources Available for Maximum IPv6 Routes 

Platforms

Min Value

Max Value

Default Values

7210 SAS-M (per node)

1

8000

0

7210 SAS-T Access-Uplink mode (per node)

1

6000

0

7210 SAS-T Network Mode (per node)

1

6000

0

7210 SAS-R6 (per IMM)

1

6000

0

7210 SAS-R12 (per IMM)

1

6900

0

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 IMM-c (per IMM)

1

14300

0

7210 SAS-Mxp (per node)

1

14300

0

7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC)

1

6100

0

7210 SAS-S 1/10GE (standalone and standalone-VC)

1

6100

0

7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

1

6100

0

 

sap-scale-mode

Syntax 
sap-scale-mode mode
no sap-scale-mode
Context 
config>system>resource-profile (on the 7210 SAS-Mxp)
config>system>global-res-profile (on the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12)
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables or disables a higher number of SAPs and services for Epipe and VPLS services. There is no change in scaling for IES, VPRN, and RVPLS SAPs and services.

The low keyword is configured by default. The default SAP ingress policy ID 1 is used in this mode. On the 7210 SAS-Mxp, if the high keyword is configured, the default SAP ingress policy ID 65536 is used to differentiate the policy from the default SAP ingress policy ID 1. On the 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12, SAP ingress policy ID 1 is the default when sap-scale-mode is set to either low or high.

To switch between the low and high modes, the user must remove all SAP configurations, change the mode, reboot the node, and reconfigure the SAPs and services.

The mandatory QoS configurations required to achieve higher SAP and service scaling are as follows.

  1. Access port-based egress queuing and shaping must be configured on all ports, including service delivery ports and uplinks.
  2. Access port-based ingress classification and policing can be configured on uplinks for higher SAP scaling.
  3. On the 7210 SAS-Mxp, Epipe and VPLS SAPs must use ingress table-based classification and policing on service delivery ports for higher SAP scaling. The 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 do not support table-based service meters for SAP ingress policing.
  4. IES and VPRN SAPs can use table-based classification.
  5. RVPLS SAPs must use CAM-based classification and policing.
Note:

Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Services Guide and 7210 SAS-R6, R12 Services Guide for more information about high SAP scale mode and low SAP scale mode.

The no form of this command disables the use of high SAP and service scaling for Epipe and VPLS services.

Default 

no sap-scale-mode

Parameters 
mode—
Specifies the SAP scale mode.
Values—
high, low

 

high—
Keyword to enable higher SAP and service scaling.
low—
Keyword to disable higher SAP and service scaling.

6.12.2.1.19. Global System Resource Profile Commands

global-res-profile

Syntax 
global-res-profile
Context 
config>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the CAM resources.

enable-bgp3107-frr

Syntax 
enable-bgp-3107-frr
no enable-bgp3107-frr
Context 
config>system>global-res-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

Description 

This command enables the allocation of MPLS FIB and protection group resources required for enabling uniform FRR for BGP RFC3107 LU routes resolved using RSVP-TE LSPs. This is a per-node configuration and enabling the command affects all BGP LU routes.

Caution:

If the command is enabled, the amount of resources required is twice the amount required without uniform FRR, and the number of BGP LU routes that can be accommodated in the MPLS FIB is therefore halved if uniform FRR is enabled. Ensure that sufficient MPLS resources are available to accommodate all required BGP LU routes before using this command.

The no form of this command disables the use of uniform FRR for BGP LU routes.

Default 

no enable-bgp3107-frr

enable-ldporsvp-frr

Syntax 
enable-ldporsvp-frr
no enable-ldporsvp-frr
Context 
config>system>global-res-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)

Description 

This command enables the allocation of MPLS FIB and protection group resources required for enabling uniform FRR for LDP-over-RSVP LSPs (LDP FECs resolved using RSVP-TE LSPs). This is a per-node configuration and enabling the command affects all LDP-over-RSVP LSPs.

Caution:

If the command is enabled, the amount of resources required is twice the amount required without uniform FRR, and the number of LDP-over-RSVP LSPs that can be accommodated in the MPLS FIB is therefore halved if uniform FRR is enabled. Ensure that sufficient MPLS resources are available to accommodate all required LDP-over-RSVP LSPs before using this command.

The no form of this command disables the use of uniform FRR for LDP-over-RSVP LSPs.

Default 

no enable-ldporsvp-frr

qos

Syntax 
qos
Context 
config>system>glob-res-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the QoS resources.

port-scheduler-mode

Syntax 
no port-scheduler-mode
port-scheduler-mode
Context 
config>system>glob-res-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 (supported only on IMMv2 cards)

Description 

This command lets user select the queuing mode to be used for SAPs configured on all the ports of the node.

When port-scheduler-mode is enabled, software allocates 8 egress queues per port and all the SAPs configured on the access port or hybrid port will share the 8 egress queues for traffic sent out of that port. In this mode, SAPs configured on hybrid port shares the egress queues with network port traffic. Enabling port-scheduler-mode affects the behavior for all the SAPs configured on all the access and hybrid port. In this mode, per SAP egress queues are not available.

In this mode, resources allocated towards SAP egress queues in the ingress-internal-tcam pool are not required by this feature and can be allocated towards other features. See the qos-sap-egress-resource command for more information.

When port-scheduler-mode is disabled using the no form of this command, per SAP egress queues are available for use. Refer to the 7210 SAS-M, T, Mxp, Sx, S Quality of Service Guide for more information about the two modes.

Enabling or disabling port-scheduler-mode requires a reboot of the node.

Default 

no port-scheduler-mode

sf-ingress-internal-tcam

Syntax 
sf-ingress-internal-tcam
Context 
config>system>glob-res-profile
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command enables the context to configure the CAM resources available in the SF/CPM.

The sf-ingress-internal-tcam resource pool is shared by multiple features. The resources are allocated in chunks of fixed size. The user is provided an option to allocate the available resources based on their scaling requirements for the features. The resource usage for different features is provided in the CLI description for the feature. Resources are allocated to features in chunks of fixed size. It is not possible to for a chunk to be shared by multiple features. There are a few exceptions which are specified explicitly. The software allocates resources from the chunk to the feature to which it is allocated until it runs out of all resources in the chunk. If available, user can allocate more chunks to the feature (by taking away chunks of resources from other features which do not need to be enabled).

To free up the resources for use by other features, users need to modify the configuration such that the chunks of resources in use by other features are freed. For example, to free up a chunk of resources allocated to UP MEPs and allocate it to P2MP LSPs, user will need to remove the configuration of UP MEPs for all the SAPs, then change the resource profile configuration to allocate the chunk to P2MP LSPs. Another scenario would be, to free up a chunk of resources and allocate it to another feature.

The sf-ingress-internal-tcam resource pool is shared among the following features on different platforms:

  1. 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
    It is global per node resource pool. It is shared among UP MEPs, G8032 Fast-flood, and NG-MVPN P2MP LSPs.
Note:

  1. While reassigning chunk of resources among features, in some scenarios a reboot of the node might be required. See the CLI description of the specific feature to know more.
  2. The number of chunks and the number of resources per chunk varies among the different platforms. Contact your ALU/Nokia representative for more information.
  3. On 7210 SAS-R6, the number of resources per slice/chunk varies. Hence, the number of resources allocated to a feature varies based on the order of allocation of resources among the different features. It might be necessary to allocate more slices to a feature to achieve desired scaling.
  4. For some features a minimum number of chunks (greater than 1) must be allocated to enable the feature functionality. If this is not done software cannot allocate the required number of resources and it will fail the command associated with the feature.

eth-cfm-upmeps

Syntax 
eth-cfm-upmeps max_slices
no eth-cfm-upmeps
Context 
config>system>glob-res-profile>sf-ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allocates resources towards UP MEP from the sf-ingress-internal-tcam pool. The value specified here allocates a fixed number of entries for use with this feature. Entries are allocated by software from this pool whenever UP MEP is configured in a VPLS service (either on a SAP or a SDP). The number of entries required per MEP depends on the level of the MEP.

The no form of this command does not allocate any resources for use by CFM UP MEPs. If no resources are allocated for use, the software fails all attempts to configure an UP MEP.

Parameters 
max_slices—
Specifies the number of slice to be allocated for VPLS UP MEP feature. Each slice has many resource entries which is used to identify and process VPLS UP MEP messages.
Values—
0 to 6

 

g8032-fast-flood

Syntax 
g8032-fast-flood max_slices
no g8032-fast-flood
Context 
config>system>glob-res-profile>sf-ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command configures the amount of ingress internal CAM resources available in the SF/CPM for use by G8032 fast-flood mechanism. These are used to implement G8032 fast-flood for data services protected using G8032 ring protection mechanism. The amount of slices determines the amount of data services that can be protected by G8032 and use the fast-flood mechanism to reduce the convergence time on a ring failure and switchover.

The difference between resource usage on IMMv1 and IMMv2 is described as follows.

  1. On IMMv1, resources are used to implement the G8032 fast-flood mechanism for both VPLS services and RVPLS services.
  2. On IMMv2, resources are used to implement the G8032 fast-flood mechanism for only RVPLS services. These resources are used only if G8032 is enabled for RVPLS services. The G8032 fast-flood mechanism is also implemented for VPLS services, but no user configuration is required and it does not need resources to be allocated from the sf-ingress-internal-tcam pool.
Parameters 
max_slice—
Specifies the number of slices to be allocated for the G8032 fast-flood mechanism. Each slice has many resource entries that are used to implement G8032 fast flood for multiple data services protected by G8032.
Values—
1 to 7

 

mpls-p2mp

Syntax 
mpls-p2mp max_slices
no mpls-p2mp
Context 
config>system>glob-res-profile>sf-ingress-internal-tcam
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command allows the user to configure the resources to be used for NG-MVPN P2MP LSPs. The users must allocate some resources using the command before configuring NG-MVPN. It might be necessary to free up resources allocated to other features to allocate resources for it.

On 7210 SAS-R6, the number of resources per slice/chunk varies. Hence, the number of resources allocated to a feature varies based on the order of allocation of resources among different features. It might be necessary to allocate more slices to a feature to achieve desired scaling.

The no form of this command does not allocate any resources for use by P2MP LSPs used with NG-MVPN feature. If no resources are allocated for use, the software will not be able to setup P2MP LSPs for use with NG-MVPN.

Parameters 
max_slice—
Specifies the number of slices to be allocated for NG-MVPN P2MP LSPs.
Values—
0 to 3

 

Default—
1

6.12.2.2. Show Commands

6.12.2.2.1. System Commands

chassis

Syntax 
chassis imm-family [imm-family]
chassis imm-family {active | configured}
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command lists the IMM types allowed to be provisioned (and equipped) in the chassis for the specified type of IMM family.

With the active option, this command displays the current active configuration of the IMM family. In other words, it indicates the list of allowed IMMs that can be used in the chassis.

With the configured option, this command displays the user configured value for the IMM family, which will take effect on the next reboot.

Parameters 
imm-family—
Specifies the IMM family type to display the list of supported IMMs under this family.
Values—
imm-sas-r, imm-sas-r-b, imm-sas-r-c, all

 

active—
Displays the current active configuration.
configured—
Displays the current configured value which will take effect on next reboot.
Output 

The following output is an example of IMM family information.

Sample Output
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system# chassis imm-family all
 
===============================================================================
IMM FAMILY INFORMATION
===============================================================================
IMM-TYPE                      IMM-FAMILY          SUPPORTED
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
imm-sas-10sfp+1xfp            imm-sas-r           Default
imm-sas-10sfp                 imm-sas-r           Default
imm-sas-2xfp                  imm-sas-r           Default
imm-sas-b-4sfp+               imm-sas-r-b         ----
imm-sas-b-2sfp+               imm-sas-r-b         ----
imm-sas-b-10sfp-1sfp+         imm-sas-r-b         ----
imm-sas-b-11csfp              imm-sas-r-b         ----
imm-sas-b-16tx                imm-sas-r-b         ----
===============================================================================
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system#
 
 
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system# chassis imm-family active
 
===============================================================================
IMM FAMILY INFORMATION
===============================================================================
IMM-TYPE                      IMM-FAMILY          SUPPORTED
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
imm-sas-10sfp+1xfp            imm-sas-r           Supported (Default)
imm-sas-10sfp                 imm-sas-r           Supported (Default)
imm-sas-2xfp                  imm-sas-r           Supported (Default)
===============================================================================
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system#
===============================================================================
 
 
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system# chassis imm-family configured
 
===============================================================================
IMM FAMILY INFORMATION
===============================================================================
IMM-TYPE                      IMM-FAMILY          SUPPORTED
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
imm-sas-10sfp+1xfp            imm-sas-r           Default
imm-sas-10sfp                 imm-sas-r           Default
imm-sas-2xfp                  imm-sas-r           Default
===============================================================================
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system#

connection

Syntax 
connections [address ip-address [interface interface-name]] [port port-number] [detail]
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays UDP and TCP connection information. If no command line options are specified, a summary of the TCP and UDP connections displays.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Displays only the connection information for the specified IP address.
Values—
ipv4-address — a.b.c.d (host bits must be 0) ipv6-address — x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x (eight 16-bit pieces)                            x:x:x:x:x:x:d.d.d.d                            x — 0 to FFFF (hexadecimal)                            d — 0 to 255 (decimal)

 

port-number—
Displays only the connection information for the specified port number.
Values—
0 to 65535

 

detail—
Displays TCP statistics.
Output 

The following outputs are examples of system connections information, and the asspciated tables describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:ALA-12# show system connections
===============================================================================
Connections :
===============================================================================
Proto    RecvQ    TxmtQ Local Address         Remote Address        State
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TCP          0        0 0.0.0.0.21            0.0.0.0.0             LISTEN
TCP          0        0 0.0.0.0.23            0.0.0.0.0             LISTEN
TCP          0        0 0.0.0.0.179           0.0.0.0.0             LISTEN
TCP          0        0 10.0.0.xxx.51138      10.0.0.104.179        SYN_SENT
TCP          0        0 10.0.0.xxx.51139      10.0.0.91.179         SYN_SENT
TCP          0        0 10.10.10.xxx.646      0.0.0.0.0             LISTEN
TCP          0        0 10.10.10.xxx.646      10.10.10.104.49406    ESTABLISHED
TCP          0        0 10.1.0.1.51140        10.1.0.2.179          SYN_SENT
TCP          0        993 192.168.x.xxx.23    192.168.x.xx.xxxx     ESTABLISHED
UDP          0        0 0.0.0.0.123           0.0.0.0.0              ---
UDP          0        0 0.0.0.0.646           0.0.0.0.0              ---
UDP          0        0 0.0.0.0.17185         0.0.0.0.0              ---
UDP          0        0 10.10.10.xxx.646      0.0.0.0.0              ---
UDP          0        0 xxx.0.0.1.50130       xxx.0.0.1.17185        ---
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of Connections: 14
===============================================================================
A:ALA-12# 
Table 65:  Output Fields: System Connections 

Label

Description  

Proto

Displays the socket protocol, either TCP or UDP

RecvQ

Displays the number of input packets received by the protocol

TxmtQ

Displays the number of output packets sent by the application

Local Address

Displays the local address of the socket

The socket port is separated by a period.

Remote Address

Displays the remote address of the socket

The socket port is separated by a period.

State

Listen — The protocol state is in the listen mode

Established — The protocol state is established

Sample Output (Detail)
A:ALA-12# show system connections detail
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 TCP Statistics                                                                
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
packets sent                                : 659635                           
data packets                                : 338982 (7435146 bytes)           
data packet retransmitted                   : 73 (1368 bytes)                  
ack-only packets                            : 320548 (140960 delayed)          
URG only packet                             : 0                                
window probe packet                         : 0                                
window update packet                        : 0                                
control packets                             : 32                               
packets received                            : 658893                           
acks                                        : 338738 for (7435123 bytes)       
duplicate acks                              : 23                               
ack for unsent data                         : 0                                
packets received in-sequence                : 334705 (5568368 bytes)           
completely duplicate packet                 : 2 (36 bytes)                     
packet with some dup. data                  : 0 (0 bytes)                      
out-of-order packets                        : 20 (0 bytes)                     
packet of data after window                 : 0 (0 bytes)                      
window probe                                : 0                                
window update packet                        : 3                                
packets received after close                : 0                                
discarded for bad checksum                  : 0                                
discarded for bad header offset field       : 0                                
discarded because packet too short          : 0                                
connection request                          : 4                                
connection accept                           : 24                               
connections established (including accepts) : 27                               
connections closed                          : 26 (including 2 drops)           
embryonic connections dropped               : 0                                
segments updated rtt                        : 338742 (of 338747 attempts)      
retransmit timeouts                         : 75                               
connections dropped by rexmit timeout       : 0                                
persist timeouts                            : 0                                
keepalive timeouts                          : 26                               
keepalive probes sent                       : 0                                
connections dropped by keepalive            : 1                                
pcb cache lookups failed                    : 0                                
===============================================================================
A:ALA-12#

cpu

Syntax 
cpu [sample-period seconds]
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays CPU utilization per task over a sample period.

Parameters 
sample-period seconds
Specifies the number of seconds over which to sample CPU task utilization.
Default—
1
Values—
1 to 5

 

Output 

The following output is an example of CPU information, and Table 66 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
*A:cses-E11# show system cpu sample-period 2
===============================================================================
CPU Utilization (Sample period: 2 seconds)
===============================================================================
Name                                   CPU Time       CPU Usage        Capacity
                                         (uSec)                           Usage
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BFD                                          10          ~0.00%          ~0.00%
BGP                                           0           0.00%           0.00%
CFLOWD                                       61          ~0.00%          ~0.00%
Cards & Ports                             8,332           0.41%           0.08%
DHCP Server                                  79          ~0.00%          ~0.00%
ICC                                         408           0.02%           0.01%
IGMP/MLD                                  1,768           0.08%           0.08%
IOM                                      17,197           0.85%           0.31%
IP Stack                                  4,080           0.20%           0.09%
IS-IS                                     1,213           0.06%           0.06%
ISA                                       2,496           0.12%           0.07%
LDP                                           0           0.00%           0.00%
Logging                                      32          ~0.00%          ~0.00%
MPLS/RSVP                                 2,380           0.11%           0.08%
MSDP                                          0           0.00%           0.00%
Management                                5,969           0.29%           0.15%
OAM                                         907           0.04%           0.02%
OSPF                                         25          ~0.00%          ~0.00%
PIM                                       5,600           0.27%           0.27%
RIP                                           0           0.00%           0.00%
RTM/Policies                                  0           0.00%           0.00%
Redundancy                                3,635           0.18%           0.13%
SIM                                       1,462           0.07%           0.04%
SNMP Daemon                                   0           0.00%           0.00%
Services                                  2,241           0.11%           0.05%
Stats                                         0           0.00%           0.00%
Subscriber Mgmt                           2,129           0.10%           0.04%
System                                    8,802           0.43%           0.17%
Traffic Eng                                   0           0.00%           0.00%
VRRP                                        697           0.03%           0.02%
WEB Redirect                                125          ~0.00%          ~0.00%
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total                                 2,014,761         100.00%
   Idle                               1,945,113          96.54%
   Usage                                 69,648           3.45%
Busiest Core Utilization                 69,648           3.45%
===============================================================================
*A:cses-E11#
Table 66:  Output Fields: System CPU 

Label

Description

CPU Utilization

The total amount of CPU time

Name

The process or protocol name

CPU Time (uSec)

The CPU time each process or protocol has used in the specified time

CPU Usage

The sum of CPU usage of all the processes and protocols

Capacity Usage

Displays the level the specified service is being utilized

When this number hits 100%, this part of the system is busied out. There may be extra CPU cycles still left for other processes, but this service is running at capacity.

This column does not reflect the true CPU utilization value; that data is still available in the CPU Usage column. This column is the busiest task in each group, where busiest is defined as either actually running or blocked attempting to acquire a lock.

cron

Syntax 
cron
Context 
show>system>cron
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enters the show CRON context.

schedule

Syntax 
schedule [schedule-name] [owner schedule-owner]
Context 
show>system>cron
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays cron schedule parameters.

Parameters 
schedule-name—
Displays information for the specified scheduler name
owner schedule-owner—
Displays information for the specified scheduler owner
Output 

The following output is an example of cron schedule information, and Table 67 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:sim1>show>system>cron schedule test
===============================================================================
CRON Schedule Information
===============================================================================
Schedule                     : test
Schedule owner               : TiMOS CLI
Description                  : none
Administrative status        : enabled
Operational status           : enabled
Script Policy                : test
Script Policy Owner          : TiMOS CLI
Script                       : test
Script Owner                 : TiMOS CLI
Script source location       : ftp://*****:******@192.168.15.1/home/testlab_bgp
                               /cron/test1.cfg
Script results location      : ftp://*****:******@192.168.15.1/home/testlab_bgp
                               /cron/res
Schedule type                : periodic
Interval                     : 0d 00:01:00 (60 seconds)
Repeat count                 : 10
Next scheduled run           : 0d 00:00:42
End time                     : none
Weekday                      : tuesday
Month                        : none
Day of month                 : none
Hour                         : none
Minute                       : none
Number of schedule runs      : 10
Last schedule run            : 2008/01/01 17:20:52
Number of schedule failures  : 0
Last schedule failure        : no error
Last failure time            : never
=============================================================================== 
A:sim1>show>cron
Table 67:  Output Fields: Cron Schedule 

Label

Description

Schedule name

Displays the schedule name

Schedule owner

Displays the owner name of the action

Description

Displays the schedule’s description

Administrative status

Enabled — The administrative status is enabled

Disabled — Administratively disabled

Operational status

Enabled — The operational status is enabled

Disabled — Operationally disabled

Script Policy

Displays the script policy name

Script Policy Owner

Displays the name of script policy owner

Script

Displays the name of the script

Script owner

Displays the name of the of script owner

Script source location

Displays the location of scheduled script

Script results location

Displays the location where the script results have been sent

Schedule type

Periodic — Displays a schedule which ran at a given interval

Calendar — Displays a schedule which ran based on a calendar

Oneshot — Displays a schedule which ran one time only

Interval

Displays the interval between runs of an event

Repeat count

Displays the total number of times a CRON “interval” schedule is run

Next scheduled run

Displays the time for the next scheduled run

End time

Displays the configured time at which the schedule ends

Weekday

Displays the configured weekday

Month

Displays the configured month

Day of Month

Displays the configured day of month

Hour

Displays the configured hour

Minute

Displays the configured minute

Number of scheduled runs

Displays the number of scheduled sessions

Last scheduled run

Displays the last scheduled session

Number of scheduled failures

Displays the number of scheduled sessions that failed to execute

Last scheduled failure

Displays the last scheduled session that failed to execute

Last failure time

Displays the system time of the last failure

global-res-profile

Syntax 
global-res-profile [detail]
global-res-profile {active | configured}
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command displays the parameters and resources configured under the global system resource-profile.

Output 

The following output is an example of global system resource profile information, and Table 68 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
*7210SASR>show>system# global-res-profile
 
============================================================================
System Global Resource Profile
============================================================================
 
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
G8032 Fast Flood           : 5
Eth-Cfm Vpls Upmeps        : 0
Mpls P2MP                  : 1
Max-ipv6-routes            : disable
System-max-ecmp            : 1
L3-max-ecmp-groups         : 1945
Ldp-max-ecmp-groups        : disable
Ldp-ecmp-percent-value     : disable
Max-ip-subnets             : 2000
port-scheduler-mode        : disable
----------------------------------------------------------------------------
*7210R>show>system#
Table 68:  Output Fields: Global System Resource Profile 

Label

Description  

G8032 Fast Flood

Displays the resources configured for use by G8032 fast-flood feature

Mpls P2MP

Displays the resources configured for NG-MVPN P2MP LSPs

Max-ipv6-routes

The amount of L3 forwarding table entries configured for IPv6 /64-bit address prefix lookups

System-max-ecmp

The maximum number of ECMP paths allowed per IP destination or LDP FEC

Max-ip-subnets

The amount of L3 forwarding entries configured for use by IP subnets of the directly connected interfaces (both IPv4 and IPv6 interfaces)

port-scheduler-mode

The scheduler mode configured for use on egress

It can be either port-based (port-scheduler-mode is enabled) or SAP-based (port-scheduler-mode is disabled).

information

Syntax 
information
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays general system information including the operating mode, basic system, SNMP server, last boot and DNS client information.

Output 

The following outputs are examples of system information, and Table 69 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
===============================================================================
System Information
===============================================================================
System Name               : PE4-M2
System Type               : 
System Version            : B-9.0.F-private
System Contact         :
System Location        :
System Coordinates     :
System Up Time            : 10 days, 06:50:01.84 (hr:min:sec)
 
SNMP Port                 : 161
SNMP Engine ID            : 0000197f0000c408416161a3
SNMP Engine Boots         : 571
SNMP Max Message Size     : 1500
SNMP Admin State          : Disabled
SNMP Oper State           : Disabled
SNMP Index Boot Status    : Not Persistent
SNMP Sync State           : N/A
 
Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP Admin    : Disabled/Disabled/Enabled/Disabled
Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP Oper     : Down/Down/Up/Down
 
BOF Source                : cf1:
Image Source              : primary
Config Source             : primary
Last Booted Config File   : cf1:\mvpn_head.cfg
Last Boot Cfg Version     : MON SEP 26 04:48:37 2016 UTC
Last Boot Config Header: N/A
Last Boot Index Version   : N/A
Last Boot Index Header : N/A
Last Saved Config         : N/A
Time Last Saved           : N/A
Changes Since Last Save   : Yes
User Last Modified        : admin
Time Last Modified        : 2016/10/25 04:07:16
Max Cfg/BOF Backup Rev    : 5
Cfg-OK Script             : ftp://dhandaym:Alcatel12#@xxx.xxx.xxx.xx/./env.cfg
Cfg-OK Script Status      : success
Cfg-Fail Script           : N/A
Cfg-Fail Script Status    : not used
 
Management IP Addr        : 10.135.6.77/24
Primary DNS Server        : N/A
Secondary DNS Server      : N/A
Tertiary DNS Server       : N/A
DNS Domain                : (Not Specified)
DNS Resolve Preference    : ipv4-only
DNSSEC AD Validation      : False
DNSSEC Response Control   : drop
BOF Static Routes         :
  To                   Next Hop
  10.0.0.0/8           10.135.6.1
 
  10.135.25.0/24       10.135.16.1
 
  10.250.0.0/16       10.135.6.1
 
  10.254.0.0/16       10.135.6.1
 
 
ICMP Vendor Enhancement   : Disabled
EFM OAM Grace Tx Enable   : False
===============================================================================
 
===============================================================================
System Oper Group Information
===============================================================================
Name                             Oper   Creation Hold   Hold   Members Monitor
                                 Status Origin   UpTime DnTime
                                                 (secs) (secs)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No Matching Entries
===============================================================================
*7210SAS>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone)
*A:dut-d>show>system# information
 
===============================================================================
System Information
===============================================================================
System Name               : dut-d
System Type               : 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE 24Tp4SFP+ (PoE)-1
Chassis-role Config value : standalone
Host-type Config value    : standalone
Chassis Operating Mode    : standalone
System Version            : B-9.0.B1-10
System Contact         :
System Location        :
System Coordinates     :
System Up Time            : 30 days, 04:02:01.66 (hr:min:sec)
 
SNMP Port                 : 161
SNMP Engine ID            : 0000197f0000a47b2cc693d3
SNMP Engine Boots         : 87
SNMP Max Message Size     : 9216
SNMP Admin State          : Enabled
SNMP Oper State           : Enabled
SNMP Index Boot Status    : Not Persistent
SNMP Sync State           : N/A
 
Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP Admin    : Enabled/Disabled/Enabled/Enabled
Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP Oper     : Up/Down/Up/Up
 
Boot-loader Source        : cf1:
BOF Source                : cf1:
Image Source              : primary
Config Source             : primary
Last Booted Config File   : cf1:\9.0_ver_4.cfg
Last Boot Cfg Version     : TUE JAN 04 23:16:48 2000 UTC
Last Boot Config Header: # TiMOS-B-9.0.B1-7 both/hops Nokia SAS-Sx 24Tp4SFP+
                         (PoE) 7210 Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Nokia. # All
                         rights reserved. All use subject to applicable
                         license agreements. # Built on Wed Sep 28 14:44:54
                         IST 2016 by builder in /home/builder/9.0B1/panos/
                         main # Generated TUE JAN 04 23:16:48 2000 UTC
Last Boot Index Version   : N/A
Last Boot Index Header : # TiMOS-B-9.0.B1-7 both/hops Nokia SAS-Sx 24Tp4SFP+
                         (PoE) 7210 Copyright (c) 2000-2016 Nokia. # All
                         rights reserved. All use subject to applicable
                         license agreements. # Built on Wed Sep 28 14:44:54
                         IST 2016 by builder in /home/builder/9.0B1/panos/
                         main # Generated TUE JAN 04 23:16:48 2000 UTC
Last Saved Config         : N/A
Time Last Saved           : N/A
Changes Since Last Save   : Yes
User Last Modified        : admin
Time Last Modified        : 2000/01/23 10:26:17
Max Cfg/BOF Backup Rev    : 5
Cfg-OK Script             : N/A
Cfg-OK Script Status      : not used
Cfg-Fail Script           : N/A
Cfg-Fail Script Status    : not used
 
Management IP Addr        : 10.135.8.152/24
Management IP Addr        : 2001:dbe::44/64
Primary DNS Server        : N/A
Secondary DNS Server      : N/A
Tertiary DNS Server       : N/A
DNS Domain                : (Not Specified)
DNS Resolve Preference    : ipv4-only
DNSSEC AD Validation      : False
DNSSEC Response Control   : drop
BOF Static Routes         :
  To                   Next Hop
  10.135.0.0/16        10.135.8.1
 
  10.0.0.0/8          10.135.8.1
 
 
ICMP Vendor Enhancement   : Disabled
EFM OAM Grace Tx Enable   : False
===============================================================================
 
===============================================================================
System Oper Group Information
===============================================================================
Name                             Oper   Creation Hold   Hold   Members Monitor
                                 Status Origin   UpTime DnTime
                                                 (secs) (secs)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No Matching Entries
===============================================================================
*A:dut-d>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE (standalone-VC)
*A:dut-d>show>system# information
 
===============================================================================
System Information
===============================================================================
System Name               : Dut-A
System Type               : 7210 SAS-VC
Chassis-role Config value : standalone-vc
Host-type Config value    : none
Chassis Operating Mode    : standalone-vc
System Version            : B-10.0.S-private
System Contact         :
System Location        :
System Coordinates     :
System Active Slot        : A
System Up Time            : 0 days, 09:32:03.18 (hr:min:sec)
SNMP Port                 : 161
SNMP Engine ID            : 0000197f0000d099d5911c41
SNMP Engine Boots         : 785
SNMP Max Message Size     : 1500
SNMP Admin State          : Enabled
SNMP Oper State           : Enabled
SNMP Index Boot Status    : Not Persistent
SNMP Sync State           : OK
Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP Admin    : Enabled/Disabled/Enabled/Enabled
Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP Oper     : Up/Down/Up/Up
Boot-loader Source        : cf1:
BOF Source                : cf1:
Image Source              : primary
Config Source             : primary
Last Booted Config File   : cf1:\default.cfg
Last Boot Cfg Version     : SAT JAN 01 19:17:10 2000 UTC
Last Boot Config Header: # TiMOS-B-0.0.private both/hops Nokia SAS-S 24F4SFP+
                         7210 Copyright (c) 2000-2018 Nokia. # All rights
                         reserved. All use subject to applicable license
                         agreements. # Built on Thu Feb 8 21:49:20 IST 2018
                         by aalapati in /home/aalapati/Work/WsHost/HEAD/panos/
                         main # Generated SAT JAN 01 19:17:10 2000 UTC
Last Boot Index Version   : N/A
Last Boot Index Header : # TiMOS-B-0.0.private both/hops Nokia SAS-S 24F4SFP+
                         7210 Copyright (c) 2000-2018 Nokia. # All rights
                         reserved. All use subject to applicable license
                         agreements. # Built on Thu Feb 8 21:49:20 IST 2018
                         by aalapati in /home/aalapati/Work/WsHost/HEAD/panos/
                         main # Generated SAT JAN 01 19:17:10 2000 UTC
Last Saved Config         : N/A
Time Last Saved           : N/A
Changes Since Last Save   : No
Max Cfg/BOF Backup Rev    : 5
Cfg-OK Script             : ftp://*:*@192.168.36.8/./images/env.cfg
Cfg-OK Script Status      : failed
Cfg-Fail Script           : N/A
Cfg-Fail Script Status    : not used
Management IP Addr        : 10.135.17.166/24
Primary DNS Server        : N/A
Secondary DNS Server      : N/A
Tertiary DNS Server       : N/A
DNS Domain                : (Not Specified)
DNS Resolve Preference    : ipv4-only
DNSSEC AD Validation      : False
DNSSEC Response Control   : drop
BOF Static Routes         :
  To                   Next Hop
  10.250.0.0/16       10.135.17.1
ICMP Vendor Enhancement   : Disabled
EFM OAM Grace Tx Enable   : False
=============================================================================
Table 69:  Output Fields: System Information 

Label

Description  

System Name

The configured system name

System Type

Indicates whether or not the node is operating in a virtual chassis

Chassis-role Config value

Supported only on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE devices. Displays the configured value for boot parameter chassis-role

Host-type Config value

Supported only on 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE devices. Displays the configured value for BOF parameter host-type

Chassis Operating Mode

The current operating mode of the node/chassis

It can be in satellite mode, standalone mode, or standalone-vc mode depending on the configuration of the chassis-role and host-type parameters.

Supported only on 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE devices

Software Version

Indicates the version of the software

System Contact

A text string that describes the system contact information

System Location

A text string that describes the system location

System Coordinates

A text string that describes the system coordinates

System Active Slot

Indicates which slot is used for the active CPM (CPM-A or CPM-B)

System Up Time

The time since the last boot

SNMP Port

The port number used by this node to receive SNMP request messages and to send replies

SNMP Engine ID

The SNMP engineID to uniquely identify the SNMPv3 node

SNMP Engine Boots

The number of time the SNMP agent has restarted

It is typically equivalent to the number of times the node has rebooted.

SNMP Max Message Size

The maximum SNMP packet size generated by this node

SNMP Admin State

Enabled — SNMP is administratively enabled and running

Disabled — SNMP is administratively shut down and not running

SNMP Oper State

Enabled — SNMP is operationally enabled

Disabled — SNMP is operationally disabled

SNMP Index Boot Status

Persistent — System indexes are saved between reboots

Not Persistent — System indexes are not saved between reboots

SNMP Sync State

Indicates whether the SNMP persistence information database has been successfully synchronized between the active and standby CPM

This field is available on 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-vc platforms.

Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP/ Admin

The administrative state of the Telnet, Telnet IPv6, SSH, and FTP sessions

Tel/Tel6/SSH/FTP/ Oper

The operational state of the Telnet, Telnet _IPv6, SSH, and FTP sessions

Boot-loader source

The location of the bootloader

BOF source

The location of the BOF

Image Source

Primary — Indicates that the directory location for runtime image file was loaded from the primary source

Secondary — Indicates that the directory location for runtime image file was loaded from the secondary source.

Tertiary — Indicates that the directory location for runtime image file was loaded from the tertiary source

Config Source

Primary — Indicates that the directory location for configuration file was loaded from the primary source

Secondary — Indicates that the directory location for configuration file was loaded from the secondary source

Tertiary — Indicates that the directory location for configuration file was loaded from the tertiary source

Last Booted Config File

The URL and filename of the last loaded configuration file

Last Boot Cfg Version

The date and time of the last boot

Last Boot Config Header

Displays header information such as image version, date built, date generated

Last Boot Index Version

The version of the persistence index file read when the card was last rebooted

Last Boot Index Header

The header of the persistence index file read when the card was last rebooted

Last Saved Config

The location and filename of the last saved configuration file

Time Last Saved

The date and time of the last time configuration file was saved

Changes Since Last Save

Yes — there are unsaved configuration file changes

No — there are no unsaved configuration file changes

Time Last Modified

The date and time of the last modification

Max Cfg/BOF Backup Rev

The maximum number of backup revisions maintained for a configuration file. This value also applies to the number of revisions maintained for the BOF file

Cfg-OK Script

URL — The location and name of the CLI script file executed following successful completion of the boot-up configuration file execution

Cfg-OK Script Status

Successful/Failed — The results from the execution of the CLI script file specified in the Cfg-OK Script location

Not used — No CLI script file was executed

Cfg-Fail Script

URL — The location and name of the CLI script file executed following a failed boot-up configuration file execution

Not used — No CLI script file was executed

Cfg-Fail Script Status

Successful/Failed — The results from the execution of the CLI script file specified in the Cfg-Fail Script location

Not used — No CLI script file was executed

Management IP Addr

The management IP address and mask

Primary DNS Server

The IP address of the primary DNS server

Secondary DNS Server

The IP address of the secondary DNS server

Tertiary DNS Server

The IP address of the tertiary DNS server

DNS Domain

The DNS domain name of the node

BOF Static Routes

To — The static route destination

Next — Hop The next hop IP address used to reach the destination

Metric — Displays the priority of this static route versus other static routes

None — No static routes are configured

memory-pools

Syntax 
memory-pools
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays system memory status.

Output 

The following output is an example of memory pool information, and Table 70 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:ALA-1# show system memory-pools
===============================================================================
Memory Pools
===============================================================================
Name               Max Allowed    Current Size      Max So Far          In Use
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
System                No limit      24,117,248      24,117,248      16,974,832
Icc                  8,388,608       1,048,576       1,048,576          85,200
RTM/Policies          No limit       5,242,912       5,242,912       3,944,104
OSPF                  No limit       3,145,728       3,145,728       2,617,384
MPLS/RSVP             No limit       9,769,480       9,769,480       8,173,760
LDP                   No limit               0               0               0
IS-IS                 No limit               0               0               0
RIP                   No limit               0               0               0
VRRP                  No limit       1,048,576       1,048,576              96
Services              No limit       2,097,152       2,097,152       1,589,824
IOM                   No limit     205,226,800     205,226,800     202,962,744
SIM                   No limit       1,048,576       1,048,576             392
IGMP                  No limit               0               0               0
MMPI                  No limit               0               0               0
MFIB                  No limit               0               0               0
PIP                   No limit      79,943,024      79,943,024      78,895,248
MBUF                67,108,864       5,837,328       5,837,328       4,834,280
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Current Total Size :    343,495,200 bytes
Total In Use       :    324,492,768 bytes
Available Memory   :    640,178,652 bytes
===============================================================================
A:ALA-1# 
Table 70:  Output Fields: Memory Pool 

Label

Description

Name

The name of the system or process

Max Allowed

Integer — The maximum allocated memory size

No — Limit No size limit

Current Size

The current size of the memory pool

Max So Far

The largest amount of memory pool used

In Use

The current amount of the memory pool currently in use

Current Total Size

The sum of the Current Size column

Total In Use

The sum of the In Use column

Available Memory

The amount of available memory

ntp

Syntax 
ntp [{peers | peer peer-address} | {servers | server server-address} |[all]] [detail]
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command displays NTP protocol configuration and state.

Output 

The following output is an example of NTP information, and Table 71 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:7210>config>system>time>ntp# show system ntp
===============================================================================
NTP Status
===============================================================================
Enabled : Yes Stratum : 3
Admin Status : up Oper Status : up
Server enabled : No Server keyId : none
System Ref Id : 192.168.15.221 Auth Check : Yes
===============================================================================
A:7210
 
A:7210# show system ntp all
===============================================================================
NTP Status
===============================================================================
Configured : Yes Stratum : 1
Admin Status : up Oper Status : up
Server Enabled : Yes Server Authenticate : No
Clock Source : PTP
Auth Check : Yes
Current Date & Time: 2013/03/19 20:18:50 UTC
===============================================================================
===============================================================================
NTP Active Associations
===============================================================================
State Reference ID St Type A Poll Reach Offset(ms)
Remote
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
chosen PTP 0 srvr - 256 YYYYYYYY 0.000
PTP
candidate GPS 1 srvr - 256 YYYYYYYY -0.054
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
===============================================================================
A:7210#
 
 
A:7210>config>system>time>ntp# show system ntp detail
===============================================================================
NTP Status
===============================================================================
Enabled : Yes Stratum : 3
Admin Status : up Oper Status : up
Server enabled : No Server keyId : none
System Ref Id : 192.168.15.221 Auth Check : Yes
Auth Errors : 0 Auth Errors Ignored : 0
Auth Key Id Errors : 0 Auth Key Type Errors : 0
===============================================================================
NTP Configured Broadcast/Multicast Interfaces
===============================================================================
vRouter Interface Address Type Auth Poll
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Base i3/1/1 Host-ones bcast yes off
management management 224.0.1.1 mcast no off
Base t2 bclnt no n/a
management management 224.0.1.1 mclnt no n/a
===============================================================================
A:7210>config>system>time>ntp#
 
 
A:7210>config>system>time>ntp# show system ntp detail all
===============================================================================
NTP Status
===============================================================================
Enabled : Yes Stratum : 3
Admin Status : up Oper Status : up
Server enabled : No Server keyId : none
System Ref Id : 192.168.15.221 Auth Check : Yes
Auth Errors : 0 Auth Errors Ignored : 0
Auth Key Id Errors : 0 Auth Key Type Errors : 0
===============================================================================
NTP Configured Broadcast/Multicast Interfaces
===============================================================================
vRouter Interface Address Type Auth Poll
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Base i3/1/1 Host-ones bcast yes off
management management 224.0.1.1 mcast no off
Base t2 bclnt no n/a
management management 224.0.1.1 mclnt no n/a
===============================================================================
NTP Active Associations
===============================================================================
State Remote Reference ID St Type Auth Poll R Offset
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
reject 192.168.15.221 192.168.14.50 2 srvr none 64 y 0.901
chosen 192.168.15.221 192.168.1.160 4 mclnt none 64 y 1.101
===============================================================================
A:7210>config>system>time>ntp#
Table 71:  Output Fields: NTP 

Label

Description  

Enabled

yes — NTP is enabled

no — NTP is disabled

Admin Status

yes — Administrative state is enabled

no — Administrative state is disabled

NTP Server

Displays NTP server state of this node

Stratum

Displays stratum level of this node

Oper Status

yes — The operational state is enabled

no — The operational state is disabled

Auth Check

Displays the authentication requirement

System Ref. ID

IP address of this node or a 4-character ASCII code showing the state

Auth Error

Displays the number of authentication errors

Auth Errors Ignored

Displays the number of authentication errors ignored

Auth key ID Errors

Displays the number of key identification errors

Auth Key Type Errors

Displays the number of authentication key type errors

Reject

The peer is rejected and will not be used for synchronization

The rejection reasons could be one of the following: the peer is unreachable, the peer is synchronized to this local server so synchronizing with it would create a sync loop, or the synchronization distance is too large. This is the normal startup state.

Invalid

The peer is not maintaining an accurate clock

This peer will not be used for synchronization.

Excess

The peer's synchronization distance is greater than ten other peers

This peer will not be used for synchronization.

Outlyer

The peer is discarded as an outlyer

This peer will not be used for synchronization.

Candidate

The peer is accepted as a possible source of synchronization

Selected

The peer is an acceptable source of synchronization, but its synchronization distance is greater than six other peers

Chosen

The peer is chosen as the source of synchronization

ChosenPPS

The peer is chosen as the source of synchronization, but the actual synchronization is occurring from a pulse-per-second (PPS) signal

Remote

The IP address of the remote NTP server or peer with which this local host is exchanging NTP packets

Reference ID

When stratum is between 0 and 15 this field shows the IP address of the remote NTP server or peer with which the remote is exchanging NTP packets

For reference clocks, this field shows the identification assigned to the clock, such as, “.GPS.”

For an NTP server or peer, if the client has not yet synchronized to a server/peer, the status cannot be determined and displays the following codes:

Peer Codes:

ACST — The association belongs to any cast server

AUTH — Server authentication failed. Wait while the association is restarted.

AUTO — Autokey sequence failed. Wait while the association is restarted.

BCST — The association belongs to a broadcast server

CRPT — Cryptographic authentication or identification failed. The details should be in the system log file or the cryptostats statistics file, if configured. No further messages will be sent to the server.

DENY — Access denied by remote server. No further messages will be sent to the server.

DROP — Lost peer in symmetric mode. Wait while the association is restarted.

RSTR — Access denied due to local policy. No further messages will be sent to the server.

INIT — The association has not yet synchronized for the first time

MCST — The association belongs to a manycast server

NKEY — No key found. Either the key was never installed or is not trusted.

RATE — Rate exceeded. The server has temporarily denied access because the client exceeded the rate threshold.

RMOT — The association from a remote host running ntpdc has had unauthorized attempted access.

STEP — A step change in system time has occurred, but the association has not yet re-synchronized.

System Codes:

INIT — The system clock has not yet synchronized for the first time

STEP — A step change in system time has occurred, but the system clock has not yet re-synchronized

St

Stratum level of this node

Auth

yes — Authentication is enabled

no — Authentication is disabled

Poll

Polling interval in seconds

R

Yes — The NTP peer or server has been reached at least once in the last 8 polls

No — The NTP peer or server has not been reached at least once in the last 8 polls

Offset

The time between the local and remote UTC time, in milliseconds

oper-group

Syntax 
oper-group [group-name]
oper-group group-name [detail]
oper-group group-name [monitoring]
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported only on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays oper-group information, member count, monitor-client count, and status in a single line for each of the configured oper-groups.

Output 

The following output is an example of oper-group information, and Table 72 describes the output fields.

Show Output
*A:7210SAS>show>system# oper-group
 
===============================================================================
System Oper Group Information
===============================================================================
Name                             Oper   Creation Hold   Hold   Members Monitor
                                 Status Origin   UpTime DnTime
                                                 (secs) (secs)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
test                             up     manual   4      0      1       1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entries found: 1
===============================================================================
*A:7210SAS>show>system#
 
*A:7210SAS>show>system# oper-group test monitoring
 
===============================================================================
System Oper Group Information
===============================================================================
Oper Group           : test
Creation Origin      : manual               Oper Status      : up
Hold DownTime        : 0 secs               Hold UpTime      : 4 secs
Members              : 0                    Monitoring       : 0
===============================================================================
*A:7210SAS>show>system#
Table 72:  Output Fields: Oper-group 

Label

Description  

Name

Displays the name of the oper-group

Oper Status

The operational status of the oper-group

Creation Origin

Displays if it was created manually

Hold Up Time

The configured HOLD UP time

Hold Dn Time

The configured HOLD down time

Members

Displays the number of members of the oper-group

Monitor

Displays the number of monitoring clients

rollback

Syntax 
rollback [rescue]
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp

Description 

This command displays rollback configuration and state.

Parameters 
rescue—
Keyword to revert to the rescue checkpoint.
Output 

The following output is an example of rollback configuration and state information, and Table 73 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:7210SAS>show>system# rollback
 
===============================================================================
Rollback Information
===============================================================================
Rollback Location            : None
Max Local  Rollback Files    : 10
Max Remote Rollback Files    : 10
Save
  Last Rollback Save Result  : None
  Last Save Completion Time  : N/A
Revert
  In Progress                : No
  Last Revert Initiated User : N/A
  Last Revert Checkpoint File: N/A
  Last Revert Result         : None
  Last Revert Initiated Time : N/A
  Last Revert Completion Time: N/A
Delete
  Last Rollback Delete Result: None
 
===============================================================================
Rollback Files
===============================================================================
Idx    Suffix    Creation Time            Release           User
         Comment
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No Matching Entries
===============================================================================
A:7210SAS>show>system#
Table 73:  Output Fields: Rollback 

Label

Description

Rollback Information

Rollback Location

The location where rollback checkpoint files will be saved

Max Local  Rollback Files

The maximum number of rollback checkpoint files that will be saved to a local server

Max Remote Rollback Files

The maximum number of rollback checkpoint files that will be saved to a remote server

Save

Last Rollback Save Result

The status of the last rollback checkpoint save

Last Save Completion Time

The date and time the last rollback checkpoint file save operation was completed

Revert

In Progress

Indicates if a system rollback reversion is in progress

Last Revert Initiated User

The username of the person who initiated the last system rollback reversion

Last Revert Checkpoint File

The location of the last rollback checkpoint file

Last Revert Result 

The result of the last system rollback reversion

Last Revert Initiated Time

The date and time when the last rollback was initiated

Last Revert Completion Time

The date and time when the last rollback was completed

Delete

Last Rollback Delete Result

The status of the last rollback checkpoint file deletion

Rollback Files

Idx

The rollback checkpoint file ID

Suffix

The rollback checkpoint file suffix

Comment

User comments about the rollback checkpoint file

Creation Time

The date and time when the file was created

Release

The software load that the checkpoint file was created in

User

The user who created the file

resource-profile

Syntax 
resource-profile [active | configured]
resource-profile [active | configured] policy-id [detail]
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays the resource-profile protocol configuration and state.

Parameters 
active | configure—
Displays active or configured values. Active values are those in use by the system currently. Configured values are those that have been changed by the user and have not taken effect. For the system resource profile parameters that need a reboot to take effect, the active and configured values can be different. It typically requires a node reboot or a card reset for it to take effect.
policy-id—
Specifies a resource profile policy. This parameter is only supported on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12.
detail—
Displays detailed information. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12.
Output 
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-M
*A:7210>show>system# resource-profile
A:SAS-MX>show>system# resource-profile
 
===============================================================================
Active System Resource Profile Information
===============================================================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv6 FIB
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ipv6-routes            : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ip-subnets             : 384
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
system-max-ecmp            : 1
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress Qos resource   : 5          Sap  Aggregate Meter       : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 Resource         : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress ACL resource   : 5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : disable    IPv6 64 bit Resource       : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth CFM                    : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
up-mep                     : disable    G8032-fast-flood           : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress ACL resource    : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mac and IPv4 Resource      : 2          Mac-only Resource          : disable
IPv6 128 bit Resource      : disable    Mac and IPv6 64 bit Resour*: disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Decommissioned Ports
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/2/1
1/2/2
1/1/5
 
===============================================================================
* indicates that the corresponding row element may have been truncated.
*A:7210>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-T
A:SAST>show>system# resource-profile
===============================================================================
Active System Resource Profile Information
===============================================================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv6 FIB
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ipv6-routes            : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ip-subnets             : 384
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress Qos resource   : 4          Sap  Aggregate Meter       : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 Resource         : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress ACL resource   : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : disable    IPv6 64 bit Resource       : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth CFM                    : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
up-mep                     : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress ACL resource    : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mac and IPv4 Resource      : 2          Mac-only Resource          : disable
IPv6 128 bit Resource      : disable    Mac and IPv6 64 bit Resour*: disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MBS pool                   : Port
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Decommissioned Ports
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
===============================================================================
* indicates that the corresponding row element may have been truncated.
A:SAST>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 devices
*A:7210SAS>show>system# resource-profile
 
======================================================================
System Resource Profile
======================================================================
Policy-Id            Description
----------------------------------------------------------------------
1                    Default System Resource Profile Policy
10
======================================================================
*A:7210SAS>show>system#
Sample Output (with ‘def’ configured)
A:dut-b>show>system# resource-profile 1 detail
 
===============================================================================
System Resource Profile Policy : 1
===============================================================================
Description  : Default System Resource Profile Policy
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
G8032 Control Sap Tags     : 0-0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress Qos resource   : def        Sap  Aggregate Meter       : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 Resource         : max        IPv4-Mac Resource          : max
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net Ingress Qos resource   : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress ACL resource   : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : max        IPv6 64 bit Resource       : max
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETH-CFM                    : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETH-CFM Down MEP           : 1          ETH-CFM Up MEP             : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress QoS resource    : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress ACL resource    : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : 2          Mac  Resource              : disable
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : disable    IPv6 64 bit Resource       : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETH-CFM                    : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BiDir MIP Egress           : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cards/Slots Associations
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Card/Slot No:              : 1
Card/Slot No:              : 2
Card/Slot No:              : 3
Card/Slot No:              : 4
Card/Slot No:              : 5
Card/Slot No:              : 6
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A:dut-b>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-R6 IMMv2
 
*7210SAS KT2>show>system# resource-profile active 1 detail
 
===============================================================================
System Resource Profile Policy : 1
===============================================================================
Description  : Default System Resource Profile Policy
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
G8032 Control Sap Tags     : 0-0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress Qos resource   : def        Sap  Aggregate Meter       : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 Resource         : max        IPv4-Mac Resource          : max
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net Ingress Qos resource   : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress ACL resource   : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : max        IPv6 64 bit Resource       : max
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETH-CFM                    : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETH-CFM Down MEP           : 1          ETH-CFM Up MEP             : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress QoS resource    : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egress Internal CAM
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress ACL resource    : def
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : 2          Mac  Resource              : disable
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : disable    IPv6 64 bit Resource       : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ETH-CFM                    : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BiDir MIP Egress           : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cards/Slots Associations
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Card/Slot No:              : 1
Card/Slot No:              : 2
Card/Slot No:              : 3
Card/Slot No:              : 4
Card/Slot No:              : 5
Card/Slot No:              : 6
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
*A:7210SAS KT2>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Mxp
*7210SAS>show>system# resource-profile
 
===============================================================================
Active System Resource Profile Information
===============================================================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv6 FIB
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ipv6-routes            : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ip-subnets             : 850
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
system-max-ecmp            : 1
L3-max-ecmp-groups         : 1024
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Internal CAM       : 11
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress Qos resource   : 5          Sap  Aggregate Meter (#)   : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 Resource         : disable    IPv4-Mac Resource          : max
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net Ingress Qos resource   : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress ACL resource   : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : disable    IPv6 64 bit Resource       : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth CFM                    : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
down-mep                   : 1          up-mep                     : disable
                           :
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress QoS resource    : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egress Internal CAM        : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress ACL resource    : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mac and IPv4 Resource      : 2          Mac-only Resource          : disable
IPv6 128 bit Resource      : disable    Mac and IPv6 64 bit Resour*: disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port Scheduler Policy      : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
===============================================================================
* indicates that the corresponding row element may have been truncated.
# indicates that the value
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE devices
 
A:7210SAS>show>system# resource-profile
 
===============================================================================
Active System Resource Profile Information
===============================================================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
system-max-ecmp            : 1
L3-max-ecmp-groups         : 1024
Ldp-max-ecmp-groups        : disable
Ldp-ecmp-percent-value     : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Internal CAM       : 8
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress Qos resource   : 4          Sap  Aggregate Meter (#)   : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 Resource         : disable    IPv4-Mac Resource          : max
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net Ingress Qos resource   : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress ACL resource   : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : disable    IPv6 64 bit Resource       : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth CFM                    : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
down-mep                   : 1          up-mep                     : disable
                           :
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egress Internal CAM        : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress ACL resource    : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mac and IPv4 Resource      : 2          Mac-only Resource          : disable
IPv6 128 bit Resource      : disable    Mac and IPv6 64 bit Resour*: disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egr sap agg-meter          : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MBS pool                   : Node
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Decommissioned Ports
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
===============================================================================
* indicates that the corresponding row element may have been truncated.
# indicates that the value will take effect only after reboot or clear card.
A:7210SAS>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE devices
*A:7210SAS>show>system# resource-profile
 
===============================================================================
Active System Resource Profile Information
===============================================================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv6 FIB
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ipv6-routes            : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
max-ip-subnets             : 2000
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
system-max-ecmp            : 1
L3-max-ecmp-groups         : 1024
Ldp-max-ecmp-groups        : disable
Ldp-ecmp-percent-value     : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Internal CAM       : 5
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress Qos resource   : 3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 Resource         : disable    IPv4-Mac Resource          : max
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Net Ingress Qos resource   : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Ingress ACL resource   : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IPv4 Resource              : max        Mac  Resource              : max
IPv4-IPv6 128 bit Resource : disable    IPv6 64 bit Resource       : disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth CFM                    : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
down-mep                   : 1          up-mep                     : disable
                           :
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egress Internal CAM        : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sap Egress ACL resource    : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mac and IPv4 Resource      : 2          Mac-only Resource          : disable
IPv6 128 bit Resource      : disable    Mac and IPv6 64 bit Resour*: disable
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Egr sap agg-meter          : disable
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MBS pool                   : Node
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Decommissioned Ports
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
===============================================================================
* indicates that the corresponding row element may have been truncated.
# indicates that the value will take effect only after reboot or clear card.
*A:7210SAS>show>system#
Table 74:  Output Fields: System Resource Profile 

Label

Description

Ingress Queue Mode

Enable — SAP ingress queuing is enabled

Disable — SAP ingress queuing is disabled

Ingress Internal CAM

Displays the applications sharing ingress CAM resource

Sap Ingress ACL resource

Displays the resources configured for use by SAP Ingress ACL policies

IPv4 Resource

Displays the resources configured for use by ingress ACL policies that use ipv4-criteria

Disable — No resources are allocated for use by this feature. Therefore, no policies of this type can be associated to a SAP.

IPv4-IPv6 Resource

Displays the resources configured for use by ingress ACL policies that use ipv6 128-bit address match-criteria

Disable — No resources are allocated for use by this feature. Hence, no policies of this type can be associated to a SAP.

Mac Resource

Displays the resources configured for use by ingress ACL policies that use mac-criteria

Disable — No resources are allocated for use by this feature. Hence, no policies of this type can be associated to a SAP.

IPv6-64 bit Resource

Displays the resources configured for use by ingress ACL policies that use ipv6 64-bit address match-criteria

Disable — No resources are allocated for use by this feature. Therefor, no policies of this type can be associated to a SAP.

Eth CFM

Groups the context for resources consumed by Ethernet CFM applications

up-mep

Displays the resources configured for use by UP MEP

Disable — No resources are allocated for use by this feature. Therefore, no UP MEPs can be created.

Sap Ingress QoS resource

The total amount of ingress internal CAM chunks configured for use by SAP ingress classification

Mac and IPv4 Resource

The total amount of egress internal CAM chunks configured for use by MAC and IPv4 egress ACL match criteria policies

Mac-only Resource

The total amount of egress internal CAM chunks configured for use only by MAC egress ACL match criteria policies

IPv6 128 bit Resource

The total amount of egress internal CAM chunks configured for use only by IPv6 egress ACL match criteria policies (128-bit IPv6 address can be specified in the match criteria)

Mac and IPv6 64 bit Resource

The total amount of egress internal CAM chunks configured for use by MAC and IPv6 egress ACL match criteria policies (only 64-bit higher order bits of the IPv6 address can be specified in the match criteria)

system-max-ecmp

Displays the maximum number of routes that will be allocated per IP destination/prefix in hardware when the user enables ECMP path sharing using multiple routes

Sap Egress ACL resource

Displays the egress ACL resource allocation configured for various match criteria

Egress Internal CAM

Displays the resource allocation configured for the egress internal CAM

IPv6 FIB

Displays the amount of IPv6 FIB size configured for use by IPv6 routing

G8032-fast-flood

Displays the resources configured for use by G8032 fast-flood feature

Disable — No resources are allocated for use by this feature

Decommissioned Ports

The list of ports which have been decommissioned by the user

Services cannot be configured on these ports

MBS pool

Displays the value configured for mbs-pool

Available only on 7210 SAS-T

BiDir MIP Egress

Displays the amount of resources allocated towards Bi-dir MIP functionality in the egress-internal-tcam resource pool Available only on 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12

Port Scheduler Policy

disabled — Indicates that SAP-based egress queues for access SAPs is configured per node

enabled — Indicates that port-based queues are configured for access SAPs

ptp

Syntax 
ptp
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command displays the parameters for IEEE 1588-2008/ Precision Time Protocol (PTP) information.

Output 

The following output is an example of PTP information, and Table 75 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:7210SAS>show>system# ptp
==============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Clock Information
===============================================================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Type        : boundary           PTP Profile        : IEEE 1588-2008
Domain            : 0                  Network Type       : sdh
Admin State       : up                 Oper State         : up
Announce Interval : 1 pkt/2 s          Announce Rx Timeout: 3 intervals
Clock Id          : 846991fffea8c8f5   Clock Class        : 248 (default)
Clock Accuracy    : unknown            Clock Variance     : ffff (not computed)
Clock Priority1   : 128                Clock Priority2    : 128
PTP Recovery State: acquiring          Last Changed       : 01/07/2020 16:57:06
Frequency Offset  : +0.000 ppb         Frequency Source   : ssu
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IP Address        : 192.168.10.5       Router             : Base
Parent Clock Id   : 00b0aefffe02e5e5   Remote PTP Port    : 1
GM Clock Id       : 00b0aefffe02e5e5   GM Clock Class     : 6
GM Clock Accuracy : within 100 ns      GM Clock Variance  : 0x6400 (3.7E-09)
GM Clock Priority1: 128                GM Clock Priority2 : 128
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Information
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Timescale           : PTP
Current Time        : 2020/01/07 17:43:58.0 (UTC)
Frequency Traceable : yes
Time Traceable      : yes
Time Source         : GPS
===============================================================================
 
*A:Dut-F>config>system>ptp# show system ptp 
========== =====================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Clock Information
===============================================================================
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Clock Type        : boundary           PTP Profile        : ITU-T G.8275.1
Domain            : 24                 Network Type       : sdh
Admin State       : up                 Oper State         : up
Announce Interval : 8 pkt/s            Announce Rx Timeout: 3 intervals
Clock Id          : 846991fffea8c8f5   Clock Class        : 248 (default)
Clock Accuracy    : unknown            Clock Variance     : ffff (not computed)
Clock Priority1   : 128                Clock Priority2    : 128
PTP Recovery State: disabled
Frequency Offset  : n/a                Frequency Source   : ssu
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port              : 1/1/13             Remote MAC Address : a0:f3:e4:1a:7f:6e
Parent Clock Id   : a0f3e4fffe1a7f5d   Remote PTP Port    : 16
GM Clock Id       : 00b0aefffe000030   GM Clock Class     : 6
GM Clock Accuracy : within 100 ns      GM Clock Variance  : 0x4e5d (1.8E-15)
GM Clock Priority1: 128                GM Clock Priority2 : 128
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Time Information                      
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Timescale           : PTP             
Current Time        : 2020/01/07 09:22:32.0 (UTC)
Frequency Traceable : yes             
Time Traceable      : yes             
Time Source         : GPS             
===============================================================================
 
*A:Dut-F>config>system>ptp# show system ptp peer 192.168.10.5 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router            : Base
IP Address        : 192.168.10.5       Announce Direction : rx
Admin State       : up                 G.82x5.1 Priority  : n/a
Sync Interval     : 16 pkt/s           
Local PTP Port    : 1                  PTP Port State     : slave
Clock Id          : 00b0aefffe02e5e5   Remote PTP Port    : 1
GM Clock Class    : 6
GM Clock Accuracy : within 100 ns      GM Clock Variance  : 0x6400 (3.7E-09)
GM Clock Priority1: 128                GM Clock Priority2 : 128
Steps Removed     : 0                  Parent Clock       : yes
===============================================================================
*A:Dut-F>config>system>ptp# 
 
*A:Dut-G>config>system>ptp# show system ptp port 1/1/1 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Information
===============================================================================
Port              : 1/1/1              
PTP Admin State   : up                 PTP Oper State     : up
Local MAC Addr    : d0:00:d5:e7:94:ef  Mulicast MAC Addr  : 01:1b:19:00:00:00
Cfg Sync Rate     : 16 pkt/s           Cfg Delay Req Rate : 16 pkt/s
Master-Only       : false              G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
PTP Port Number   : 1                  PTP Port State     : master
Neighbors         : 0                  Timestamp Point    : port
===============================================================================
*A:Dut-G>config>system>ptp#
 
show system ptp port 1/1/2 detail 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Information
===============================================================================
Port              : 1/1/2              
PTP Admin State   : up                 PTP Oper State     : up
Local MAC Addr    : d0:00:d5:e7:94:ef  Mulicast MAC Addr  : 01:1b:19:00:00:00
Cfg Sync Rate     : 16 pkt/s           Cfg Delay Req Rate : 16 pkt/s
Master-Only       : false              G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
PTP Port Number   : 1                  PTP Port State     : slave
Neighbors         : 1                  Timestamp Point    : port
===============================================================================
=============================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Neighbor Clocks
=============================================================
Port     MAC Address       Clock Id           Rx Packet Rate
-------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/2    84:69:91:a8:c8:f8 846991fffea8c8f5               33
-------------------------------------------------------------
No. of Neighbor Clocks: 1
=============================================================
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Packet Statistics
===============================================================================
                                                               Input     Output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP Packets                                                      114      15516
  Announce                                                        24       5158
  Sync                                                            47      10315
  Follow Up                                                        0          0
  Delay Request                                                    0         43
  Delay Response                                                  43          0
  Signaling                                                        0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
  Event Packets timestamped at port                                0          0
  Event Packets timestamped at cpm                                 0          0
Discards                                                           0          0
  Bad PTP domain                                                   0          0
  Alternate Master                                                 0          0
  Out Of Sequence                                                  0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
===============================================================================
 
*A:Dut-F>config>system>ptp# show system ptp statistics 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Packet Statistics
===============================================================================
                                                               Input     Output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP Packets                                                    62792      32900
  Announce                                                       972          0
  Sync                                                         30897          0
  Follow Up                                                        0          0
  Delay Request                                                    0      30883
  Delay Response                                               30883          0
  Signaling                                                       40       2017
    Request Unicast Transmission TLVs                              0       2016
      Announce                                                     0       1990
      Sync                                                         0         13
      Delay Response                                               0         13
    Grant Unicast Transmission (Accepted) TLVs                    40          0
      Announce                                                    14          0
      Sync                                                        13          0
      Delay Response                                              13          0
    Grant Unicast Transmission (Denied) TLVs                       0          0
      Announce                                                     0          0
      Sync                                                         0          0
      Delay Response                                               0          0
    Cancel Unicast Transmission TLVs                               0          1
      Announce                                                     0          1
      Sync                                                         0          0
      Delay Response                                               0          0
    Ack Cancel Unicast Transmission TLVs                           0          0
      Announce                                                     0          0
      Sync                                                         0          0
      Delay Response                                               0          0
    Other TLVs                                                     0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
Discards                                                           0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
===============================================================================
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Frequency Recovery State Statistics
===============================================================================
State                                                                   Seconds
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial                                                                       0
Acquiring                                                                    12
Phase-Tracking                                                                0
Locked                                                                     1928
Hold-over                                                                     0
===============================================================================
                                      
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Message Rates Per Second
===============================================================================
                                                UDP/IP             Ethernet    
Packet Type                                 Input    Output     Input    Output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Announce                                        0         0         0         0
Sync                                            0         0         0         0
Follow Up                                       0         0         0         0
Delay Request                                   0         0         0         0
Delay Response                                  0         0         0         0
Other                                           0         0         0         0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total                                           0         0         0         0
======================
 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Frequency Recovery State Statistics
===============================================================================
State                                                                   Seconds
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial                                                                      44
Acquiring                                                                     0
Phase-Tracking                                                                0
Locked                                                                        0
Hold-over                                                                    10
===============================================================================
 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Event Statistics
===============================================================================
Event                                                      Sync Flow Delay Flow
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Packet Loss                                                        2          3
Excessive Packet Loss                                              0          0
Excessive Phase Shift Detected                                     0          0
Too Much Packet Delay Variation                                    0          0
===============================================================================
 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Message Rates Per Second
===============================================================================
                                                UDP/IP             Ethernet    
Packet Type                                 Input    Output     Input    Output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Announce                                        0         0        16         0
Sync                                            0         0        32         0
Follow Up                                       0         0        32         0
Delay Request                                   0         0         0         4
Delay Response                                  0         0         4         0
Other                                           0         0         0         0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total                                           0         0        84         4
===============================================================================
A:7210SAS>show>system#
Table 75:  Output Fields: System PTP 

Label

Description

Clock Type

Displays the local PTP clock type:

  1. ordinarySlave — The system is always a slave clock in the master-slave hierarchy. The system derives its timing from one or more master clocks in the network.
  2. ordinaryMaster — The system is a grandmaster clock in the master-slave hierarchy. The system provides timing to multiple slave clocks in the network.
  3. boundary — The system is a boundary clock, which may be anywhere in the master-slave clock hierarchy. It can obtain timing from a master clock, and provide timing to multiple slave clocks.
  4. transparent-e2e

PTP Profile

Displays the PTP profile: ieee-1588, itu-telecom-freq, g8275dot1- 2014, or g8275dot2-2016

Domain

Displays the PTP device domain

Network Type

Indicates whether SONET or SDH values are being used for encoding synchronous status messages

Local Clock

Admin State

Up — The local PTP clock is administratively enabled

Down — The local clock is administratively shut down and not running

Oper State

Up — The local clock is operationally enabled and running

Down — The local clock is operationally disabled and not running

Announce Interval

Displays the configured announce interval value

Announce Rx Timeout

Displays the configured announce Rx timeout value

Clock Id

Displays a unique 64-bit number assigned to the clock

Clock Class

Displays the local clock class

Clock Accuracy

Displays the local clock accuracy designation

Clock Variance

Displays the local clock variance

Clock Priority1

Displays the first priority value of the local clock, used by the Best Master Clock Algorithm (BMCA) to determine which clock should provide timing for the network

Clock Priority2

Displays the second priority value of the local clock

This value is used by the BMCA to determine which clock should provide timing for the network.

Last Changed

Displays the time the PTP port state last changed

PTP Recovery State

Displays the clock recovery state: disabled, initial, acquiring, phase-tracking, or locked

Frequency Offset

Displays the frequency offset of the PTP clock in parts per billion

Frequency Source

Displays the configured clock frequency source

Parent Clock

IP Address

Displays the IP address

Base

Displays the router ID that the parent clock IP address belongs to

Parent Clock Id

Displays the parent clock identification

Remote PTP Port

Displays the PTP port number at the remote end

GM Clock Id

Displays the grand master clock ID

GM Clock Class

Displays the grand master clock class

GM Clock Accuracy

Displays the grand master clock accuracy designation

GM Clock Variance

Displays the grand master clock variance

GM Clock Priority1

Displays the grand master clock priority1 designation

GM Clock Priority2

Displays the grand master clock priority2 designation

Time Information

Timescale

Displays the PTP timescale flag sent in the 1588 announce message

Current Time

Displays the last date and time recovered by the PTP time recovery algorithm

Frequency Traceable

Displays the frequency-traceable flag sent in the 1588 announce message

Time Traceable

Displays the time-traceable flag sent in the 1588 announce message

Time Source

Displays the time-source parameter sent in the 1588 announce message

peer

Syntax 
peer ip-address [router router-instance | service-name service-name] [detail]
Context 
show>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command displays information for a specific peer.

Parameters 
ip-address—
Specifies the IP address of the peer.
Values—
a.b.c.d

 

router-instance—
Displays only the information for a specific router instance.
Values—
router-name: Base
vprn-svc-id: 1 to 2147483647

 

service-name—
Specifies the service name to identify the router instance, up to 64 characters.
detail—
Displays detailed information.
Output 

The following output is an example of PTP information for a single peer, and Table 76 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
*A:Dut-F>config>system>ptp# show system ptp  peer 192.168.10.5 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router            : Base
IP Address        : 192.168.10.5       Announce Direction : rx
Admin State       : up                 G.82x5.1 Priority  : n/a
Sync Interval     : 16 pkt/s           
Local PTP Port    : 1                  PTP Port State     : slave
Clock Id          : 00b0aefffe02e5e5   Remote PTP Port    : 1
GM Clock Class    : 6
GM Clock Accuracy : within 100 ns      GM Clock Variance  : 0x6400 (3.7E-09)
GM Clock Priority1: 128                GM Clock Priority2 : 128
Steps Removed     : 0                  Parent Clock       : yes
===============================================================================
*A:Dut-F>config>system>ptp#
 
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                             
  IP Address                 Anno Flow Admin State PTP Port State Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Base
  1.4.1.21                   tx        n/a         master         no
1
  1.2.1.20                   rx+tx     up          master         no
  1.3.1.19                   rx        up          slave          yes
2
  1.1.1.21                   tx        n/a         master         no
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of PTP Peers: 4
===============================================================================
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers router Base
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                             
  IP Address                 Anno Flow Admin State PTP Port State Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Base
  1.4.1.21                   tx        n/a         master         no
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of PTP Peers: 1
===============================================================================
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers router 1
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                             
  IP Address                 Anno Flow Admin State PTP Port State Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
  1.2.1.20                   rx+tx     up          master         no
  1.3.1.19                   rx        up          slave          yes
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of PTP Peers: 2
===============================================================================
Table 76:  Output Fields: PTP Peer 

Label

Description

Router

Displays the router

IP Address

Displays the IP address

Announce Direction

Displays the direction of flow of announce packets

Admin State

Up — the PTP peer clock is administratively enabled

Down — the PTP peer clock is administratively shut down and not running

Sync Interval

Displays the configured sync interval value

Local PTP Port

Displays the local PTP port

PTP Port State

Displays the PTP port state: initializing, listening, uncalibrated, slave, master, or passive

Remote PTP Port

Displays the PTP port number at the remote end

Clock ID

Displays the clock identity value of the local PTP clock

GM Clock Class

Displays the grand master clock class

GM Clock Accuracy

Displays the grand master clock accuracy designation

GM Clock Variance

Displays the grand master clock variance

GM Clock Priority1

Displays the grand master clock priority1 designation

GM Clock Priority2

Displays the grand master clock priority2 designation

Steps Removed

Displays the number of hops from GM

Parent Clock

yes — if the peer is the chosen parent clock

no — if the peer is not the chosen parent clock

peers

Syntax 
peers [router router-instance | service-name service-name] [detail]
Context 
show>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command displays summary information for all the PTP peers.

Parameters 
router-instance—
Displays only the information for a specific router instance.
Values—
router-name: Base
vprn-svc-id: 1 to 2147483647

 

service-name—
Specifies the service name to identify the router instance, up to 64 characters.
detail—
Displays detailed information.
Output 

The following output is an example of PTP information for all peers, and Table 77 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
 
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                             
  IP Address                 Anno Flow Admin State PTP Port State Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Base
  10.4.1.21                  tx        n/a         master         no
1
  10.2.1.20                  rx+tx     up          master         no
  10.3.1.19                  rx        up          slave          yes
2
  10.1.1.21                  tx        n/a         master         no
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of PTP Peers: 4
===============================================================================
 
 
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers router Base
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                             
  IP Address                 Anno Flow Admin State PTP Port State Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Base
  10.4.1.21                  tx        n/a         master         no
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of PTP Peers: 1
===============================================================================
 
 
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers router 1
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                             
  IP Address                 Anno Flow Admin State PTP Port State Parent Clock
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
  10.2.1.20                  rx+tx     up          master         no
  10.3.1.19                  rx        up          slave          yes
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of PTP Peers: 2
===============================================================================
 
 
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers detail 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router            : Base
IP Address        : 10.4.1.21          Announce Direction : tx
Admin State       : n/a                G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
Local PTP Port    : 3                  PTP Port State     : master
Clock Id          : ac65fffffe000000   Remote PTP Port    : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router            : 1
IP Address        : 10.2.1.20          Announce Direction : rx+tx
Admin State       : up                 G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
Local PTP Port    : 2                  PTP Port State     : master
Clock Id          : ac5efffffe000000   Remote PTP Port    : 1
Locked Out        : no                 Time Remaining     : n/a
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router            : 1
IP Address        : 10.3.1.19          Announce Direction : rx
Admin State       : up                 G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
Local PTP Port    : 1                  PTP Port State     : slave
Clock Id          : ac5dfffffe000000   Remote PTP Port    : 1
GM Clock Id       : ac5dfffffe000000   GM Clock Class     : 13
GM Clock Accuracy : unknown            GM Clock Variance  : ffff (not computed)
GM Clock Priority1: 0                  GM Clock Priority2 : 128
Steps Removed     : 0                  Parent Clock       : yes
Locked Out        : no                 Time Remaining     : n/a
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router            : 2
IP Address        : 10.1.1.21          Announce Direction : tx
Admin State       : n/a                G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
Local PTP Port    : 4                  PTP Port State     : master
Clock Id          : ac65fffffe000000   Remote PTP Port    : 1
===============================================================================
 
 
*A:bksim1618# show system ptp peers router 1 detail 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Peer Information
===============================================================================
Router            : 1
IP Address        : 10.2.1.20          Announce Direction : rx+tx
Admin State       : up                 G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
Local PTP Port    : 2                  PTP Port State     : master
Clock Id          : ac5efffffe000000   Remote PTP Port    : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Router            : 1
IP Address        : 10.3.1.19          Announce Direction : rx
Admin State       : up                 G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
Local PTP Port    : 1                  PTP Port State     : slave
Clock Id          : ac5dfffffe000000   Remote PTP Port    : 1
GM Clock Id       : ac5dfffffe000000   GM Clock Class     : 13
GM Clock Accuracy : unknown            GM Clock Variance  : ffff (not computed)
GM Clock Priority1: 0                  GM Clock Priority2 : 128
Steps Removed     : 0                  Parent Clock       : yes
===============================================================================
Table 77:  Output Fields: PTP Peers 

Label

Description

Router

Displays the router

IP Address

Displays the IP address

Announce Direction

Displays the configured announce direction

Admin State

Up — The PTP peer clock is administratively enabled

Down — The PTP peer clock is administratively shut down and not running

G.8275.1 Priority

Displays the g.8275.1 priority value

Sync Interval

Displays the configured sync interval value

Local PTP Port

Displays the local PTP port

PTP Port State

Displays the PTP port state

Remote PTP Port

Displays the PTP port number at the remote end

Clock ID

Displays the clock identity value of the local PTP clock

GM Clock Class

Displays the grand master clock class

GM Clock Accuracy

Displays the grand master clock accuracy designation

GM Clock Variance

Displays the grand master clock variance

GM Clock Priority1

Displays the grand master clock priority1 designation

GM Clock Priority2

Displays the grand master clock priority2 designation

Steps Removed

Displays the number of hops from GM

Parent Clock

yes — if the peer is the chosen parent clock

no — if the peer is not the chosen parent clock

port

Syntax 
port port-id [detail]
Context 
show>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command displays PTP port information.

Parameters 
port-id—
Specifies the port ID.
Values—
slot/mda/port

 

detail—
Displays detailed information.
Output 

The following output is an example of PTP port information, and Table 78 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:bksim1618# show system ptp port
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Summary Information
===============================================================================
Port       PTP Adm/Opr   PTP State    Neighbors   Tx Rate     Rx Rate
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10/2/16       up/up         passive         5          12312       4400
1/1/1         up/up         slave           1          12312       4400
1/1/2         up/up         master         61          12312       4400
1/1/3         up/down       disabled        0              0          0
1/1/4         up/up         listening       0              0          0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of PTP Ports : 5                            Total  99999     999999
 
show system ptp port 1/1/2 detail 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Information
===============================================================================
Port              : 1/1/2              
PTP Admin State   : up                 PTP Oper State     : up
Local MAC Addr    : d0:00:d5:e7:94:ef  Mulicast MAC Addr  : 01:1b:19:00:00:00
Cfg Sync Rate     : 16 pkt/s           Cfg Delay Req Rate : 16 pkt/s
Master-Only       : false              G.8275.1 Priority  : 128
PTP Port Number   : 1                  PTP Port State     : slave
Neighbors         : 1                  Timestamp Point    : port
===============================================================================
=============================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Neighbor Clocks
=============================================================
Port     MAC Address       Clock Id           Rx Packet Rate
-------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/2    84:69:91:a8:c8:f8 846991fffea8c8f5               33
-------------------------------------------------------------
No. of Neighbor Clocks: 1
=============================================================
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Ethernet Port Packet Statistics
===============================================================================
                                                               Input     Output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP Packets                                                      114      15516
  Announce                                                        24       5158
  Sync                                                            47      10315
  Follow Up                                                        0          0
  Delay Request                                                    0         43
  Delay Response                                                  43          0
  Signaling                                                        0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
  Event Packets timestamped at port                                0          0
  Event Packets timestamped at cpm                                 0          0
Discards                                                           0          0
  Bad PTP domain                                                   0          0
  Alternate Master                                                 0          0
  Out Of Sequence                                                  0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
===============================================================================
Table 78:  Output Fields: PTP Port 

Label

Description

Port Summary

Port

Displays the port numbers

PTP Adm/Opr

Displays the admin and oper state

PTP State

Displays the PTP state for each port: initializing, listening, uncalibrated, slave, master, or passive

Tx Rate

Displays the Tx rate for each port

Rx Rate

Displays the Rx rate for each port

Port Information

Port

Displays the PTP port number

PTP Admin State

Displays the PTP administrative state of the port

PTP Oper State

Displays the PTP operational state of the port

Local MAC Addr

Displays the local MAC address of the port

Multicast MAC Addr

Displays the multicast MAC address of the port

Cfg Sync Rate

Displays the configured sync packet rate

Cfg Delay Req Rate

Displays the configure delay request packet rate

Master-Only

Displays the master-only command value: true or false

G.8275.1 Priority

Displays the configured priority value

PTP Port Number

Displays the internal port number associated with this port

PTP Port State

Displays the PTP port state: disabled, listening, slave, master, passive, or faulty

Neighbors

Displays the number of neighbors

Timestamp Point

Displays the point at which time-stamping is done

statistics

Syntax 
statistics
Context 
show>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command displays the message and error statistics for the node.

Output 

The following output is an example of PTP statistics information, and Table 79 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
*A:Dut-F>config>system>ptp# show system ptp statistics 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Packet Statistics
===============================================================================
                                                               Input     Output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP Packets                                                   104674      53958
  Announce                                                      1616          0
  Sync                                                         51502          0
  Follow Up                                                        0          0
  Delay Request                                                    0      51489
  Delay Response                                               51489          0
  Signaling                                                       67       2469
    Request Unicast Transmission TLVs                              0       2469
      Announce                                                     0       2425
      Sync                                                         0         22
      Delay Response                                               0         22
    Grant Unicast Transmission (Accepted) TLVs                    67          0
      Announce                                                    23          0
      Sync                                                        22          0
      Delay Response                                              22          0
    Grant Unicast Transmission (Denied) TLVs                       0          0
      Announce                                                     0          0
      Sync                                                         0          0
      Delay Response                                               0          0
    Cancel Unicast Transmission TLVs                               0          1
      Announce                                                     0          1
      Sync                                                         0          0
      Delay Response                                               0          0
    Ack Cancel Unicast Transmission TLVs                           0          0
      Announce                                                     0          0
      Sync                                                         0          0
      Delay Response                                               0          0
    Other TLVs                                                     0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
Discards                                                           0          0
  Other                                                            0          0
===============================================================================
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Frequency Recovery State Statistics
===============================================================================
State                                                                   Seconds
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Initial                                                                       0
Acquiring                                                                    12
Phase-Tracking                                                                0
Locked                                                                     3219
Hold-over                                                                     0
===============================================================================
                                      
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Message Rates Per Second
===============================================================================
                                                UDP/IP             Ethernet    
Packet Type                                 Input    Output     Input    Output
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Announce                                        0         0         0         0
Sync                                            0         0         0         0
Follow Up                                       0         0         0         0
Delay Request                                   0         0         0         0
Delay Response                                  0         0         0         0
Other                                           0         0         0         0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total                                           0         0         0         0
==================================
Table 79:  Output Fields: PTP Statistics 

Label

Description

PTP Packet Statistics

The following input/output statistics are provided for PTP packets:

  1. Announce
  2. Sync
  3. Follow Up
  4. Delay Request
  5. Delay Response
  6. Signaling
  7. Other

unicast

Syntax 
unicast [router router-instance | service-name service-name]
Context 
show>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command displays unicast negotiation information.

Parameters 
router-instance—
Displays only the information for a specific router instance.
Values—
router-name: Base
vprn-svc-id: 1 to 2147483647

 

service-name—
Specifies the service name to identify the router instance, up to 64 characters.
Output 

The following output is an example of PTP unicast information, and Table 80 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
*A:Dut-C# show system ptp unicast                         
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Unicast Negotiation Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                       
  IP Address      Dir Type     Rate       Duration State    Time
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
100
  10.0.0.1        Rx  Announce 1 pkt/2 s  300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:52:35
  10.0.0.1        Rx  Sync     64 pkt/s   300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:52:39
  10.0.0.1        Tx  DelayReq 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:52:39
  10.0.0.1        Rx  DelayRsp 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:52:39
200
  192.168.0.2     Tx  Announce 1 pkt/2 s  300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:50:47
  192.168.0.2     Tx  Sync     64 pkt/s   300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:50:52
  192.168.0.2     Rx  DelayReq 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:50:52
  192.168.0.2     Tx  DelayRsp 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  02/07/2014 16:50:52
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP Peers               : 2
Total Packet Rate       : 385 packets/second
===============================================================================
 
 
A:bksim1618# show system ptp router 1 unicast 
===============================================================================
IEEE 1588/PTP Unicast Negotiation Information
===============================================================================
Router                                                       
  IP Address      Dir Type     Rate       Duration State    Time
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1
  10.2.1.20       Rx  Announce 1 pkt/2 s  300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:14:19
  10.2.1.20       Tx  Announce 1 pkt/2 s  300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:25
  10.2.1.20       Tx  Sync     64 pkt/s   300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:30
  10.2.1.20       Rx  DelayReq 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:30
  10.2.1.20       Tx  DelayRsp 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:30
  10.3.1.19       Rx  Announce 1 pkt/2 s  300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:16
  10.3.1.19       Rx  Sync     64 pkt/s   300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:21
  10.3.1.19       Tx  DelayReq 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:21
  10.3.1.19       Rx  DelayRsp 64 pkt/s   300      Granted  04/21/2013 19:13:21
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PTP Peers               : 2
Total Packet Rate       : 385 packets/second
===============================================================================
*A:bksim1618#
Table 80:  Output Fields: PTP Unicast 

Label

Description

Router IP Address

Displays the IP address of the router

Dir

Displays the direction of the unicast information: either Rx or Tx

Type

Displays the message type

Rate

Displays the rate of the unicast information, in packets per second

Duration

Displays the lease duration for the session

State

Displays the state

Time

Displays the time the unicast information was received

PTP Peers

Displays the number of PTP peers

Total Packet Rate

Displays the total packet rate, in packets per second

sntp

Syntax 
sntp
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays SNTP protocol configuration and state.

Output 

The following output is an example of SNTP information, and Table 81 describes SNTP output fields.

Sample Output
*A:pc-4.0# show system sntp 
===============================================================================
SNTP Status
===============================================================================
Admin Status : up           Oper Status : up           Mode : broadcast        
===============================================================================
===============================================================================
SNTP Servers
===============================================================================
SNTP Server            Version            Preference         Interval          
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.135.16.90           3                  Preferred          64                
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No. of SNTP Servers: 1
===============================================================================
*A:pc-4.0#
Table 81:  Output Fields: System SNTP 

Label

Description

SNTP Server

The SNTP server address for SNTP unicast client mode

Version

The SNTP version number, expressed as an integer

Preference

Normal — Indicates that this server does not have preference over another

Preferred — Indicates that this server has preference over another

Interval

The frequency, in seconds, that the server is queried

thresholds

Syntax 
thresholds
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command display system monitoring thresholds.

Output 

The following output is an example of system thresholds information, and Table 82 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:ALA-48# show system thresholds
================================================================
Threshold Alarms
================================================================
Variable: tmnxCpmFlashUsed.1.11.1
Alarm Id         : 1        Last Value : 835
Rising Event Id  : 1        Threshold  : 5000
Falling Event Id : 2        Threshold  : 2500
Sample Interval  : 2147483* SampleType : absolute
Startup Alarm    : either   Owner      : TiMOS CLI
Variable: tmnxCpmFlashUsed.1.11.1
Alarm Id         : 2        Last Value : 835
Rising Event Id  : 3        Threshold  : 10000
Falling Event Id : 4        Threshold  : 5000
Sample Interval  : 2147483* SampleType : absolute
Startup Alarm    : rising   Owner      : TiMOS CLI
Variable: sgiMemoryUsed.0
Alarm Id         : 3        Last Value : 42841056
Rising Event Id  : 5        Threshold  : 4000
Falling Event Id : 6        Threshold  : 2000
Sample Interval  : 2147836  SampleType : absolute
Startup Alarm    : either   Owner      : TiMOS CLI
================================================================
* indicates that the corresponding row element may have been truncated.
================================================================
Threshold Events
================================================================
Description: TiMOS CLI - cflash capacity alarm rising event
Event Id         : 1        Last Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:47:59
Action Type      : both     Owner      : TiMOS CLI
Description: TiMOS CLI - cflash capacity alarm falling event
Event Id         : 2        Last Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:48:00
Action Type      : both     Owner      : TiMOS CLI
Description: TiMOS CLI - cflash capacity warning rising event
Event Id         : 3        Last Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:47:59
Action Type      : both     Owner      : TiMOS CLI
Description: TiMOS CLI - cflash capacity warning falling event
Event Id         : 4        Last Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:47:59
Action Type      : both     Owner      : TiMOS CLI
Description: TiMOS CLI - memory usage alarm rising event
Event Id         : 5        Last Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:48:00
Action Type      : both     Owner      : TiMOS CLI
Description: TiMOS CLI - memory usage alarm falling event
Event Id         : 6        Last Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:47:59
Action Type      : both     Owner      : TiMOS CLI
================================================================
Threshold Events Log
================================================================
Description      : TiMOS CLI - cflash capacity alarm falling eve
                   nt : value=835, <=2500 : alarm-index 1, event
                   -index 2 alarm-variable OID tmnxCpmFlashUsed.
                   1.11.1
Event Id         : 2        Time Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:48:00
Description      : TiMOS CLI - memory usage alarm rising event :
                    value=42841056, >=4000 : alarm-index 3, even
                   t-index 5 alarm-variable OID sgiMemoryUsed.0
Event Id         : 5        Time Sent  : 10/31/2006 08:48:00
Table 82:  Output Fields: System Threshold  

Label

Description  

Variable

Displays the variable OID

Alarm Id

Displays the numerical identifier for the alarm

Last Value

Displays the last threshold value

Rising Event Id

Displays the identifier of the RMON rising event

Threshold

Displays the identifier of the RMON rising threshold

Falling Event Id

Displays the identifier of the RMON falling event

Threshold

Displays the identifier of the RMON falling threshold

Sample Interval

Displays the polling interval, in seconds, over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds

Sample Type

Displays the method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds

Startup Alarm

Displays the alarm that may be sent when this alarm is first created

Owner

Displays the owner of this alarm

Description

Displays the event cause

Event Id

Displays the identifier of the threshold event

Last Sent

Displays the date and time the alarm was sent

Action Type

log — An entry is made in the RMON-MIB log table for each event occurrence. This does not create a TiMOS logger entry. The RMON-MIB log table entries can be viewed using the show system thresholds command.

trap — A TiMOS logger event is generated. The TiMOS logger utility then distributes the notification of this event to its configured log destinations which may be CONSOLE, telnet session, memory log, cflash file, syslog, or SNMP trap destinations logs.

both — Both a entry in the RMON-MIB logTable and a TiMOS logger event are generated

none — No action is taken

Owner

Displays the owner of the event

time

Syntax 
time
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays the system time and zone configuration parameters.

Output 

The following output is an example of system time information, and Table 83 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:ALA-1# show system time
===============================================================================
Date & Time
===============================================================================
Current Date & Time : 2006/05/05 23:03:13    DST Active            : yes
Current Zone        : PDT                    Offset from UTC       : -7:00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Non-DST Zone        : PST                    Offset from UTC       : -8:00
Zone type           : standard
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DST Zone            : PDT                    Offset from Non-DST   : 0:60
Starts              : first sunday in april 02:00
Ends                : last sunday in october 02:00
============================================================================
A:ALA-1#
 
 
A:ALA-1# show system time (with no DST zone configured)
===============================================================================
Date & Time
===============================================================================
Current Date & Time : 2006/05/12 11:12:05       DST Active      :     no
Current Zone    : APA       Offset from UTC :  -8:00
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Non-DST Zone    : APA       Offset from UTC :  -8:00
Zone Type           : non-standard
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No DST zone configured
===============================================================================
A:ALA-1#
Table 83:  Output Fields: System Time 

Label

Description

Date & Time

The system date and time using the current time zone

DST Active

Yes — Daylight Savings Time is currently in effect

No — Daylight Savings Time is not currently in effect

Zone

The zone names for the current zone, the non-DST zone, and the DST zone if configured

Zone type

Non-standard — The zone is user-defined

Standard — The zone is system defined

Offset from UTC

The number of hours and minutes added to universal time for the zone, including the DST offset for a DST zone

Offset from Non-DST

The number of hours (always 0) and minutes (0—60) added to the time at the beginning of Daylight Saving Time and subtracted at the end Daylight Saving Time

Starts

The date and time Daylight Saving Time begins

Ends

The date and time Daylight Saving Time ends

vwm-shelf

Syntax 
vwm-shelf vwm-shelf-id [detail]
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

Lists all the shelves connected to the 7210 SAS node and display the administrative and operational state of the connected shelves.

Output 
Sample output for 7210 SAS-M and 7210 SAS-T (CWDM)
*A:7210SAS>show>system# vwm-shelf
 
===========================================================================
Shelf Summary
===========================================================================
Shelf-ID   USB/     Shelf           Admin       Oper        Number of
           OMC      Type            State       State       Equipped slots
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
7          OMC      CWDM            UP          UP          2
 
===========================================================================
Slot Summary
===========================================================================
Slot-ID    Provisioned        Equipped       Admin          Oper
           Type               Type           State          State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1          Not Provisioned    SFC1D          DOWN           DOWN
2          Not Provisioned    SFC2A&B        DOWN           DOWN
A          CWDM               CWDM           UP             UP
===========================================================================
*A:7210SAS>show>system#
 
show system vwm-shelf 7 detail 
 
===========================================================================
Shelf Summary
===========================================================================
Shelf-ID   USB/     Shelf           Admin       Oper        Number of
           OMC      Type            State       State       Equipped slots
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
7          OMC      CWDM            UP          UP          2
 
===========================================================================
Slot Summary
===========================================================================
Slot-ID    Provisioned        Equipped       Admin          Oper
           Type               Type           State          State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1          SFC1D              SFC1D          UP             UP
2          SFC2A&B            SFC2A&B        UP             UP
A          CWDM               CWDM           UP             UP
 
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Shelf Controller-A Hardware Data
===========================================================================
No of Slots             : 2           
Part Number             : 3KC19297AAAB01
CLEI code               : WOCUAZNUTA  
Unit Mnemonic           : EC-CW       
Serial Number           : EZ444555666     
Manufacturing Date      : 12112000    
Administrative state    : UP          
Operational state       : UP          
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared     
                                      
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Slot/Module Hardware Data    
===========================================================================
Slot Number             : 1           
Provisioned type        : SFC1D       
Equipped type           : Equipped (SFC1D)
Part Number             : 3KC19289AEAA01
CLEI code               : ----------  
Unit Mnemonic           : SFC1D       
Serial Number           : EZ121130171     
Manufacturing Date      : 03192012    
Operational state       : UP          
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared     
                                      
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Slot/Module Hardware Data    
===========================================================================
Slot Number             : 2           
Provisioned type        : SFC2A&B     
Equipped type           : Equipped (SFC2A&B)
Part Number             : 3KC19289AKAA  
CLEI code               : WOCUAZNUTA  
Unit Mnemonic           : SFC2A&B     
Serial Number           : EZ120630634     
Manufacturing Date      : 12122000    
Operational state       : UP          
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared     
===========================================================================
Sample output for 7210 SAS-M and 7210 SAS-T (DWDM)
*A:Dut-C# show system vwm-shelf 4 
 
===========================================================================
Shelf Summary
===========================================================================
Shelf-ID   USB/     Shelf           Admin       Oper        Number of
           OMC      Type            State       State       Equipped slots
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4          USB      DWDM            UP          UP          2
 
===========================================================================
Slot Summary
===========================================================================
Slot-ID    Provisioned        Equipped       Admin          Oper
           Type               Type           State          State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1          SFD4F_R            SFD4F_R        UP             UP
2          SFD8D_R            SFD8D_R        UP             UP
A          DWDM               DWDM           UP             UP/Active
B          DWDM               DWDM           UP             UP/Stanby
===========================================================================
 
*A:Dut-C# 
 
 
A:Dut-C# show system vwm-shelf 4 detail 
 
===========================================================================
Shelf Summary
===========================================================================
Shelf-ID   USB/     Shelf           Admin       Oper        Number of
           OMC      Type            State       State       Equipped slots
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
4          USB      DWDM            UP          UP          2
 
===========================================================================
Slot Summary
===========================================================================
Slot-ID    Provisioned        Equipped       Admin          Oper
           Type               Type           State          State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1          SFD4F_R            SFD4F_R        UP             UP
2          SFD8D_R            SFD8D_R        UP             UP
A          DWDM               DWDM           UP             UP/Active
B          DWDM               DWDM           UP             UP/Stanby
 
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Shelf Controller-A Hardware Data
===========================================================================
No of Slots             : 2
Part Number             : 3KC19319AAAA01
CLEI code               : WOCUA1LUTA
Unit Mnemonic           : EC-DW   
Serial Number           : EZ1242A9967     
Manufacturing Date      : 13022000
Administrative state    : UP
Operational state       : UP/Active
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared
 
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Shelf Controller-B Hardware Data
===========================================================================
No of Slots             : 2
Part Number             : 3KC19371AAAA01
CLEI code               : ----------
Unit Mnemonic           : EC-DW   
Serial Number           : RT135100009     
Manufacturing Date      : 13122000
Administrative state    : UP
Operational state       : UP/Stanby
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared
 
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Slot/Module Hardware Data
===========================================================================
Slot Number             : 1
Provisioned type        : SFD4F_R
Equipped type           : Equipped (SFD4F_R)
Part Number             : 3KC19350ADAA01
CLEI code               : WOFFAD8BAA
Unit Mnemonic           : SFD4F_R 
Serial Number           : RT135100001     
Manufacturing Date      : 13122000
Operational state       : UP
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared
 
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Slot/Module Hardware Data
===========================================================================
Slot Number             : 2
Provisioned type        : SFD8D_R
Equipped type           : Equipped (SFD8D_R)
Part Number             : 3KC19350ADAA01
CLEI code               : WOFFAD8BAA
Unit Mnemonic           : SFD8D_R 
Serial Number           : RT135100001     
Manufacturing Date      : 13122000
Operational state       : UP
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared
 
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Fan Hardware Data
===========================================================================
Slot Number             : 1
Part Number             : 
CLEI code               : 
Unit Mnemonic           : 
Serial Number           : 
Manufacturing Date      : 
Operational state       : DOWN
Firmware version        : 
===========================================================================
 
*A:Dut-C# 
Sample output for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12  (CWDM)
*A:7210SAS# show system vwm-shelf 7 
 
===========================================================================
Shelf Summary
===========================================================================
Shelf-ID   USB/     Shelf           Admin       Oper        Number of
           OMC      Type            State       State       Equipped slots
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
7          OMC      CWDM            UP          UP          2
 
===========================================================================
Slot Summary
===========================================================================
Slot-ID    Provisioned        Equipped       Admin          Oper
           Type               Type           State          State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1          SFC1D              SFC1D          UP             UP
2          SFC2A&B            SFC2A&B        UP             UP
A          CWDM               CWDM           UP             UP
===========================================================================
 
*A:7210SAS# show system vwm-shelf 7 detail 
 
===========================================================================
Shelf Summary
===========================================================================
Shelf-ID   USB/     Shelf           Admin       Oper        Number of
           OMC      Type            State       State       Equipped slots
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
7          OMC      CWDM            UP          UP          2
 
===========================================================================
Slot Summary
===========================================================================
Slot-ID    Provisioned        Equipped       Admin          Oper
           Type               Type           State          State
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
1          SFC1D              SFC1D          UP             UP
2          SFC2A&B            SFC2A&B        UP             UP
A          CWDM               CWDM           UP             UP
 
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Shelf Controller-A Hardware Data
===========================================================================
No of Slots             : 2           
Part Number             : 3KC19297AAAB01
CLEI code               : WOCUAZNUTA  
Unit Mnemonic           : EC-CW       
Serial Number           : EZ444555666     
Manufacturing Date      : 12112000    
Administrative state    : UP          
Operational state       : UP          
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared     
                                      
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Slot/Module Hardware Data    
===========================================================================
Slot Number             : 1           
Provisioned type        : SFC1D       
Equipped type           : Equipped (SFC1D)
Part Number             : 3KC19289AEAA01
CLEI code               : ----------  
Unit Mnemonic           : SFC1D       
Serial Number           : EZ121130171     
Manufacturing Date      : 03192012    
Operational state       : UP          
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared     
                                      
===========================================================================
1830 VWM Slot/Module Hardware Data    
===========================================================================
Slot Number             : 2           
Provisioned type        : SFC2A&B     
Equipped type           : Equipped (SFC2A&B)
Part Number             : 3KC19289AKAA  
CLEI code               : WOCUAZNUTA  
Unit Mnemonic           : SFC2A&B     
Serial Number           : EZ120630634     
Manufacturing Date      : 12122000    
Operational state       : UP          
Firmware version        : --------------
Current Alarm state     : Cleared     
===========================================================================
                                      
*7210SAS# 
Table 84:  Output Fields: VWM-shelf  

Label

Description

Shelf-ID

Configured shelf-ID for the 1830 VWM shelf connected to the 7210 SAS

It must match the rotary dial setting on the 1830 device

USB/l2C

Type of connection used to connect to the 1830 VWM shelf

Admin State

Up — The shelf is administratively enabled

Down — The shelf is administratively disabled

Oper State

Operational state of the shelf

It is set to Up if the admin state is Up and the 7210 SAS node is able to communicate successfully with the shelf.

Number of Equipped slots

Number of line cards in use on the shelf

Slot-ID

Card identifier used to identify the card inserted into the slot #1 of the 1830 device

Provisioned Type

User provisioned card-type to identify the module inserted into the 1830 device

Equipped Type

The card-type currently inserted into the slot on the 1830 device

No of Slots

The number of slots available on the 1830 device

Part Number

The 1830 VWM CWDM device part number

CLEI code

CLEI code of the 1830 device

Unit Mnemonic

The Mnemonic string used to identify the card

Serial Number

The 1830 device serial number

Manufacturing Date

The manufacturing date of the card

Administrative state

The administrative state of the 1830 device

If the shelf or card is provisioned and if no shutdown is executed, the this field displays UP, else it displays 'Down'.

Operational state

The operational state of the 1830 device

It is set to UP if the 7210 SAS device is able to communicate and retrieve information from the 1830 device connected to it. It is set to Down otherwise.

Current Alarm state

Displays if alarm is active or cleared

time

Syntax 
time
Context 
show
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays the current day, date, time and time zone.

The time is displayed either in the local time zone or in UTC depending on the setting of the root level time-display command for the console session.

Output 

The following output is an example of time information.

Sample Output
A:ALA-49# show time
Tue Oct 31 12:17:15 GMT 2006

tod-suite

Syntax 
tod-suite [detail]
tod-suite associations
tod-suite failed-associations
Context 
show>system>cron
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays information on the configured time-of-day suite.

Output 
Sample Output
A:7210SAS# show cron tod-suite suite_sixteen detail
===============================================================================
Cron tod-suite details
===============================================================================
Name        : suite_sixteen
Type / Id                        Time-range                       Prio  State
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ingress Qos Policy
  1160                           day                              5     Inact
  1190                           night                            6     Activ
Ingress Scheduler Policy
  SchedPolCust1_Day              day                              5     Inact
  SchedPolCust1_Night            night                            6     Activ
Egress Qos Policy
  1160                           day                              5     Inact
  1190                           night                            6     Activ
Egress Scheduler Policy
  SchedPolCust1Egress_Day        day                              5     Inact
===============================================================================
A:kerckhot_4#
Sample Output (Associations)

The following example shows output for TOD suite associations.

A:kerckhot_4# show cron tod-suite suite_sixteen associations 
=============================================================================== 
Cron tod-suite associations for suite suite_sixteen 
=============================================================================== 
Service associations 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 
Service Id  : 1                         Type   : VPLS 
 SAP 1/1/1:1 
 SAP 1/1/1:2 
 SAP 1/1/1:3 
 SAP 1/1/1:4 
 SAP 1/1/1:5 
 SAP 1/1/1:6 
 SAP 1/1/1:20 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 
Number of SAP's : 7 
Customer Multi-Service Site associations 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 
Multi Service Site: mss_1_1 
------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 
Number of MSS's: 1 
===============================================================================
A:kerckhot_4#
Sample Output (Failed Associations)

The following example shows output for TOD suite failed-associations.

A:kerckhot_4# show cron tod-suite suite_sixteen failed-associations
===============================================================================
Cron tod-suite associations failed
===============================================================================
tod-suite suite_sixteen : failed association for SAP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Service Id  : 1                         Type   : VPLS
  SAP 1/1/1:2
  SAP 1/1/1:3
  SAP 1/1/1:4
  SAP 1/1/1:5
  SAP 1/1/1:6
  SAP 1/1/1:20
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
tod-suite suite_sixteen : failed association for Customer MSS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Number of tod-suites failed/total : 1/1
===============================================================================
A:kerckhot_4#
Sample Output (Failed SAP)

Zooming in on one of the failed SAPs, the assignments of QoS and scheduler policies are shown as not as intended.

A:kerckhot_4# show service id 1 sap 1/1/1:2
===============================================================================
Service Access Points(SAP)
===============================================================================
Service Id         : 1
SAP                : 1/1/1:2                  Encap             : q-tag
Dot1Q Ethertype    : 0x8100                   QinQ Ethertype    : 0x8100
Admin State        : Up                       Oper State        : Up
Flags              : None
Last Status Change : 10/05/2006 18:11:34
Last Mgmt Change   : 10/05/2006 22:27:48
Max Nbr of MAC Addr: No Limit                 Total MAC Addr    : 0
Learned MAC Addr   : 0                        Static MAC Addr   : 0
Admin MTU          : 1518                     Oper MTU          : 1518
Ingress qos-policy : 1130                     Egress qos-policy : 1130
Intend Ing qos-pol*: 1190                     Intend Egr qos-po*: 1190
Shared Q plcy      : n/a                      Multipoint shared : Disabled
Ingr IP Fltr-Id    : n/a                      Egr IP Fltr-Id    : n/a
Ingr Mac Fltr-Id   : n/a                      Egr Mac Fltr-Id   : n/a
tod-suite          : suite_sixteen            qinq-pbit-marking : both
Egr Agg Rate Limit : max
ARP Reply Agent    : Unknown                  Host Conn Verify  : Disabled
Mac Learning       : Enabled                  Discard Unkwn Srce: Disabled
Mac Aging          : Enabled                  Mac Pinning       : Disabled
L2PT Termination   : Disabled                 BPDU Translation  : Disabled
 
Multi Svc Site     : None
I. Sched Pol       : SchedPolCust1
Intend I Sched Pol : SchedPolCust1_Night
E. Sched Pol       : SchedPolCust1Egress
Intend E Sched Pol : SchedPolCust1Egress_Night
Acct. Pol          : None                     Collect Stats     : Disabled
Anti Spoofing      : None                     Nbr Static Hosts  : 0
===============================================================================
A:kerckhot_4#
 
If a time-
range is specified for a filter entry, use the show filter command to view results:
A:kerckhot_4# show filter ip  10
===============================================================================
IP Filter
===============================================================================
Filter Id    : 10                               Applied        : No
Scope        : Template                         Def. Action    : Drop
Entries      : 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Filter Match Criteria : IP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Entry        : 1010
time-range   : day                              Cur. Status    : Inactive
Log Id       : n/a
Src. IP      : 0.0.0.0/0                        Src. Port      : None
Dest. IP     : 10.10.100.1/24                   Dest. Port     : None
Protocol     : Undefined                        Dscp           : Undefined
ICMP Type    : Undefined                        ICMP Code      : Undefined
Fragment     : Off                              Option-present : Off
Sampling     : Off                              Int. Sampling  : On
IP-Option    : 0/0                              Multiple Option: Off
TCP-syn      : Off                              TCP-ack        : Off
Match action : Forward
Next Hop     : 172.22.228.28
Ing. Matches : 0                                Egr. Matches   : 0
Entry        : 1020
time-range   : night                            Cur. Status    : Active
Log Id       : n/a
Src. IP      : 0.0.0.0/0                        Src. Port      : None
Dest. IP     : 10.10.1.1/16                     Dest. Port     : None
Protocol     : Undefined                        Dscp           : Undefined
ICMP Type    : Undefined                        ICMP Code      : Undefined
Fragment     : Off                              Option-present : Off
Sampling     : Off                              Int. Sampling  : On
IP-Option    : 0/0                              Multiple Option: Off
TCP-syn      : Off                              TCP-ack        : Off
Match action : Forward
Next Hop     : 172.22.184.101
Ing. Matches : 0                                Egr. Matches   : 0
=============================================================================== 
A:kerckhot_4#
Sample Output (Filter Associations)

If a filter is referred to in a TOD Suite assignment, use the show filter associations command to view the output.

A:kerckhot_4# show filter ip 160 associations
===============================================================================
IP Filter
===============================================================================
Filter Id    : 160                              Applied        : No
Scope        : Template                         Def. Action    : Drop
Entries      : 0
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Filter Association : IP
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tod-suite "english_suite"
 - ingress, time-range "day" (priority 5)
=============================================================================== 
A:kerckhot_4#

time-range

Syntax 
time-range name associations [detail]
Context 
show>system>cron
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays information on the configured time ranges.

Output 

The following output samples are examples of system time range information, and Table 85 describes the output fields

Sample Output
A:ala# show system cron time-range time-range2 detail
===============================================================================
Cron time-range
===============================================================================
Name     : time-range1
Periodic    : Start * * * * End * * * *
Absolute     : Start * * * * End * * * *
 

The following example shows output for time-range associations with previously created IP and MAC filters.

A:ala# show system cron time-range day associations
===============================================================================
Cron time-range associations
===============================================================================
Name          : day                            State  : Inactive
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IP Filter associations
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IP filter Id  : 10, entry 1010
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAC Filter associations
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
None
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tod-suite associations
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tod-suite : suite_sixteen, for Ingress Qos Policy "1160"
Tod-suite : suite_sixteen, for Ingress Scheduler Policy "SchedPolCust1_Day"
Tod-suite : suite_sixteen, for Egress Qos Policy "1160"
Tod-suite : suite_sixteen, for Egress Scheduler Policy "SchedPolCust1Egress_Day
===============================================================================
 
Table 85:  Output Fields: System Time Range 

Label

Description

Associations

Shows the time-range as it is associated with the TOD suites and ACL entries as well as the SAPs using them

Detail

Shows the details of this time-range

redundancy

Syntax 
redundancy
Context 
show
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command enables the context to display redundancy information.

multi-chassis

Syntax 
multi-chassis
Context 
show>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command enables the context to display multi-chassis redundancy information.

all

Syntax 
all [detail]
Context 
show>redundancy>multi-chassis
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command displays brief multi-chassis redundancy information.

Parameters 
detail—
Displays detailed multi-chassis redundancy information.
Output 

The following output is an example of redundancy multi-chassis information, and Table 86 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
B:Dut-B# show redundancy multi-chassis all
===============================================================================
Multi-chassis Peer Table
===============================================================================
Peer
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peer IP Address         : 10.10.10.2
Description             : Mc-Lag peer 10.10.10.2
Authentication          : Disabled
Source IP Address       : 0.0.0.0
Admin State             : Enabled
===============================================================================
B:Dut-B#
 
B:Dut-B# show lag detail
===============================================================================
LAG Details
===============================================================================
LAG 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Description: Description For LAG Number 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Details
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Lag-id              : 1                     Mode                 : access
Adm                 : up                    Opr                  : up
Thres. Exceeded Cnt : 9                     Port Threshold       : 0
Thres. Last Cleared : 05/20/2006 00:12:35   Threshold Action     : down
Dynamic Cost        : false                 Encap Type           : null
Configured Address  : 1c:71:ff:00:01:41     Lag-IfIndex          : 1342177281
Hardware Address    : 1c:71:ff:00:01:41     Adapt Qos            : distribute
Hold-time Down      : 0.0 sec
LACP                : enabled               Mode                 : active
LACP Transmit Intvl : fast                  LACP xmit stdby      : enabled
Selection Criteria  : highest-count         Slave-to-partner     : disabled
Number of sub-groups: 1                     Forced               : -
System Id           : 1c:71:ff:00:00:00     System Priority      : 32768
Admin Key           : 32768                 Oper Key             : 32666
Prtr System Id      : 20:f4:ff:00:00:00     Prtr System Priority : 32768
Prtr Oper Key       : 32768
 
MC Peer Address     : 10.10.10.2            MC Peer Lag-id       : 1
MC System Id        : 00:00:00:33:33:33     MC System Priority   : 32888
MC Admin Key        : 32666                 MC Active/Standby    : active
MC Lacp ID in use   : true                  MC extended timeout  : false
MC Selection Logic  : peer decided
MC Config Mismatch  : no mismatch
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port-id        Adm    Act/Stdby Opr    Primary   Sub-group     Forced   Prio
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
331/2/1          up     active    up     yes       1             -        32768
331/2/2          up     active    up               1             -        32768
331/2/3          up     active    up               1             -        32768
331/2/4          up     active    up               1             -        32768
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Port-id        Role      Exp   Def   Dist  Col   Syn   Aggr  Timeout  Activity
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
331/2/1          actor     No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
331/2/1          partner   No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
331/2/2          actor     No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
331/2/2          partner   No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
331/2/3          actor     No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
331/2/3          partner   No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
331/2/4          actor     No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
331/2/4          partner   No    No    Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes   Yes      Yes
===============================================================================
B:Dut-B#
Table 86:  Output Fields: Redundancy Multi-Chassis All 

Label

Description

Peer IP Address

Displays the multi-chassis redundancy peer

Description

The text string describing the peer

Authentication

If configured, displays the authentication key used between this node and the MC peer

Source IP Address

Displays the source address used to communicate with the MC peer.

Admin State

Displays the administrative state of the peer

mc-lag

Syntax 
mc-lag [lag lag-id]
mc-lag peer ip-address [lag lag-id]] statistics
Context 
show>redundancy>multi-chassis
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command displays multi-chassis LAG information.

Parameters 
lag lag-id
Displays information for the specified LAG identifier.
Values—
1 to 20020064

 

sync

Syntax 
sync [peer ip-address]
sync peer ip-address detail
sync [peer ip-address] statistics
Context 
show>redundancy>multi-chassis
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE, and 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE

Description 

This command displays synchronization information.

Parameters 
peer ip-address
Displays the synchronization information of the specified multi-chassis redundancy peer.
Output 

The following output is an example of redundancy multi-chassis synchronization information, and Table 87 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
*A:subscr_mgt_2# show redundancy multi-chassis sync 
===============================================================================
Multi-chassis Peer Table
===============================================================================
Peer
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Peer IP Address         : 10.10.10.20                                          
Description             : Mc-Lag peer 10.10.10.20
Authentication          : Disabled                                             
Source IP Address       : 0.0.0.0                                              
Admin State             : Enabled                                              
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sync-status
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Client Applications     : SUBMGMT                                              
Sync Admin State        : Up                                                   
Sync Oper State         : Up                                                   
DB Sync State           : inSync                                               
Num Entries             : 1                                                    
Lcl Deleted Entries     : 0                                                    
Alarm Entries           : 0                                                    
Rem Num Entries         : 1                                                    
Rem Lcl Deleted Entries : 0                                                    
Rem Alarm Entries       : 0                                                    
===============================================================================
A:subscr_mgt_2# 
Table 87:  Output Fields: Multi-Chassis Sync 

Label

Description

Peer IP Address

Displays the multi-chassis redundancy peer

Description

The text string describing the peer

Authentication

If configured, displays the authentication key used between this node and the multi-chassis peer

Source IP Address

Displays the source address used to communicate with the multi-chassis peer

Admin State

Displays the administrative state of the peer

Client Applications

Displays the list of client applications synchronized between 7210 SAS devices

Sync Admin State

Displays the administrative state of the synchronization

Sync Oper State

Displays the operation state of the synchronization

DB Sync State

Displays the database state of the synchronization

Num Entries

Displays the number of entries on local router

Lcl Deleted Entries

Displays the number of deleted entries made at the local router

Alarm Entries

Displays the alarm entries on the local router

Rem Num Entries

Displays the number of entries on the remote router

Rem Lcl Deleted Entries

Displays the number of locally deleting entries made by the remote router

Rem Alarm Entries

Displays alarm entries on the remote router

synchronization

Syntax 
synchronization
Context 
show>redundancy
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE: standalone-VC

Description 

This command displays redundancy synchronization times.

Output 

The following output is an example of redundancy synchronization information, and Table 88 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:ALA-48>show>redundancy# synchronization
===============================================================================
Synchronization Information
===============================================================================
Standby Status               : disabled
Last Standby Failure         : N/A
Standby Up Time              : N/A
Failover Time                : N/A
Failover Reason              : N/A
Boot/Config Sync Mode        : None
Boot/Config Sync Status      : No synchronization
Last Config File Sync Time   : Never
Last Boot Env Sync Time      : Never
===============================================================================
A:ALA-48>show>redundancy#
Table 88:  Output Fields: Synchronization 

Label

Description

Standby Status

Displays the status of the standby CSM

Last Standby Failure

Displays the timestamp of the last standby failure

Standby Up Time

Displays the length of time the standby CSM has been up

Failover Time

Displays the timestamp when the last redundancy failover occurred causing a switchover from active to standby CSM

If there is no redundant CSM card in this system or no failover has occurred since the system last booted, the value will be 0.

Failover Reason

Displays a text string giving an explanation of the cause of the last redundancy failover

If no failover has occurred, an empty string displays.

Boot/Config Sync Mode

Displays the type of synchronization operation to perform between the primary and secondary CSMs after a change has been made to the configuration files or the boot environment information contained in the boot options file (BOF)

Boot/Config Sync Status

Displays the results of the last synchronization operation between the primary and secondary CSMs

Last Config File Sync Time

Displays the timestamp of the last successful synchronization of the configuration files

Last Boot Env Sync Time

Displays the timestamp of the last successful synchronization of the boot environment files

uptime

Syntax 
uptime
Context 
show
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays the time since the system started.

Output 

The following output is an example of uptime information, and Table 89 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:ALA-1# show uptime
System Up Time         : 11 days, 18:32:02.22 (hr:min:sec)
A:ALA-1#
Table 89:  Output Fields: System Timing  

Label

Description

System Up Time

Displays the length of time the system has been up in days, hr:min:sec format

sync-if-timing

Syntax 
sync-if-timing
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on 7210 SAS platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command displays synchronous interface timing information.

Output 
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-M

The following is a sample output for a node locked to the active BITS input and directing the signal on ref1 to the BITS output.

*A:MTU>show>system# sync-if-timing
 
===============================================================================
System Interface Timing Operational Info
===============================================================================
System Status CPM A                : Master Free Run
    Reference Input Mode           : Non-revertive
    Quality Level Selection        : Disabled
    Reference Selected             : none
    System Quality Level           : st3
 
Reference Order                    : ref1 ref2
 
Reference Input 1
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference Input 2
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference PTP
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
===============================================================================
*A:MTU>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system# sync-if-timing
 
===============================================================================
System Interface Timing Operational Info
===============================================================================
System Status CPM A                : Master Free Run
    Reference Input Mode           : Non-revertive
    Quality Level Selection        : Disabled
    Reference Selected             : none
    System Quality Level           : st3
 
Reference Order                    : bits1 ref1 ref2 ptp
 
Reference Mate CPM
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     LOS
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     not qualified
 
Reference Input 1
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference Input 2
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference BITS 1A
    Input Admin Status             : down
    Rx Quality Level               : stu
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Interface Type                 : DS1
    Framing                        : ESF
    Line Coding                    : B8ZS
    Line Length                    : 0-110ft
    Output Admin Status            : down
    Output Source                  : internal clock
    Output Reference Selected      : none
    Tx Quality Level               : N/A
 
Reference PTP
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
===============================================================================
*A:sasr_dutb>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp
*A:7210SAS>show>system# sync-if-timing
 
===============================================================================
System Interface Timing Operational Info
===============================================================================
System Status CPM A                : Master Free Run
    Reference Input Mode           : Non-revertive
    Quality Level Selection        : Disabled
    Reference Selected             : none
    System Quality Level           : st3
 
Reference Order                    : bits1 bits2 ref1 ref2 ptp
 
Reference Input 1
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference Input 2
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference BITS 1
    Input Admin Status             : down
    Rx Quality Level               : stu
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Interface Type                 : DS1
    Framing                        : ESF
    Line Coding                    : B8ZS
    Line Length                    : 0-110ft
    Output Admin Status            : down
    Output Source                  : internal clock
    Output Reference Selected      : none
    Tx Quality Level               : N/A
 
Reference BITS 2
    Input Admin Status             : down
    Rx Quality Level               : stu
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Interface Type                 : DS1
    Framing                        : ESF
    Line Coding                    : B8ZS
    Line Length                    : 0-110ft
    Output Admin Status            : down
    Output Source                  : internal clock
    Output Reference Selected      : none
    Tx Quality Level               : N/A
 
Reference PTP
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
===============================================================================
*A:7210SAS>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
A:7210Sx>show>system# sync-if-timing
 
===============================================================================
System Interface Timing Operational Info
===============================================================================
System Status CPM A                : Master Free Run
    Reference Input Mode           : Non-revertive
    Quality Level Selection        : Disabled
    Reference Selected             : none
    System Quality Level           : st3
 
Reference Order                    : ref1 ref2
 
Reference Input 1
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference Input 2
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
===============================================================================
A:7210Sx>show>system#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
*A:7210SAS>show>system# sync-if-timing
 
===============================================================================
System Interface Timing Operational Info
===============================================================================
System Status CPM A                : Master Free Run
    Reference Input Mode           : Non-revertive
    Quality Level Selection        : Disabled
    Reference Selected             : none
    System Quality Level           : st3
 
Reference Order                    : ref1 ref2
 
Reference Input 1
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
 
Reference Input 2
    Admin Status                   : down
    Rx Quality Level               : unknown
    Quality Level Override         : none
    Qualified For Use              : No
        Not Qualified Due To       :     disabled
    Selected For Use               : No
        Not Selected Due To        :     disabled
    Source Port                    : None
===============================================================================
*A:7210SAS>show>system#
Table 90:  Output Fields: Sync Interface Timing 

Label

Description  

System Status CPM A

Indicates the system status of CPM A

Reference Input Mode

Indicates the reference input mode

Reference Order

Indicates the reference order

Reference Input 1

Displays information about reference input 1

Admin Status

Indicates the Admin status of reference input 1

down — Indicates the ref1 or ref2 configuration is administratively shutdown

up — Indicates the ref1 or ref2 configuration is administratively enabled

diag — Indicates the reference has been forced using the force-reference command

Qualified For Use

Indicates if the reference input 1 is qualified for use

Selected For Use

Indicates if reference input 1 is selected for use

Source Port

Displays the source port information

Reference Input 2

Displays information about reference input 2

Admin Status

Indicates the Admin status of reference input 2

down — Indicates the ref1 or ref2 configuration is administratively shutdown

up — Indicates the ref1 or ref2 configuration is administratively enabled

diag — Indicates the reference has been forced using the force-reference command

Qualified For Use

Indicates if the reference input 2 is qualified for use

Selected For Use

Indicates if reference input 2 is selected for use

Not Selected Due To

Indicates the reason if reference input 2 is not selected

Source Port

Displays the source port information

Interface Type

The interface type configured for the BITS port

Framing

The framing configured for the BITS port

Line Coding

The line coding configured for the BITS port

Line Length

The line length value of the BITS output

Output Admin Status

down — The BITS output is administratively shutdown

up — The BITS output is administratively enabled

diag — Indicates the BITS output has been forced using the force-reference command

Output Reference Selected

The reference selected as the source for the BITS output signal (ref1 or ref2)

TX Quality Level

QL value for BITS output signal

Quality Level Selection

Indicates whether the ql-selection command has been enabled or disabled

If this command is enabled, the reference is selected first using the QL value, then by the priority reference order. If this command is not enabled, the reference is selected by the priority reference order.

System Quality Level

Indicates the quality level being generated by the system clock

Rx Quality Level

Indicates the QL value received on the interface

inv — SSM received on the interface indicates an invalid code for the interface type

unknown — No QL value was received on the interface

script-control

Syntax 
script-control
Context 
show>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to display script information.

script

Syntax 
script [script-name] [owner script-owner]
Context 
show>system>script-control
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays script parameters.

Parameters 
script-name—
Displays information for the specified script.
script-owner
Displays information for the specified script owner.
Output 

The following output is an example of script information, and Table 91 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
7210SAS>show>system>script-control# script
===============================================================================
Script Information
===============================================================================
Script                       : test
Owner name                   : TiMOS CLI
Description                  : asd
Administrative status        : enabled
Operational status           : enabled
Script source location       : ftp://*****:******@xxx.xxx.xxx.x/home/testlab_bgp
                               /test1.cfg
Last script error            : none
Last change                  : 2015/01/07 17:10:03
=============================================================================== 
7210SAS>show>cron#
Table 91:  Output Fields: Script  

Label

Description  

Script

Displays the name of the script

Owner name

Displays the owner name of the script

Description

Displays the description of the script

Administrative status

Enabled — Administrative status is enabled

Disabled — Administrative status is disabled

Operational status

Enabled — Operational status is enabled

Disabled — Operational status is disabled

Script source location

Displays the location of the scheduled script

Last script error

Displays the system time of the last error

Last change

Displays the system time of the last change

script-policy

Syntax 
script-policy script-policy-name [owner owner-name]
script-policy run-history [run-state]
Context 
show>system>script-control
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays script policy information.

Parameters 
script-policy-name—
Displays policy information for the specified script.
owner-name
Displays information for the specified script owner.
Default—
“TiMOS CLI”
run-state—
Displays information for script policies in the specified state.
Values—
executing, initializing, terminated

 

Output 

The following output is an example of script policy information, and Table 92 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
show system script-control script-policy run-history terminated
===============================================================================
Script-policy Run History
===============================================================================
Script policy "test"
Owner "TiMOS CLI"
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Script Run #17
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start time : 2006/11/06 20:30:09 End time : 2006/11/06 20:35:24
Elapsed time : 0d 00:05:15 Lifetime : 0d 00:00:00
State : terminated Run exit code : noError
Result time : 2006/11/06 20:35:24 Keep history : 0d 00:49:57
Error time : never
Results file : ftp://*:*@192.168.15.18/home/testlab_bgp/cron/_20061106-203008.
out
Run exit : Success
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Script Run #18
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start time : 2006/11/06 20:35:24 End time : 2006/11/06 20:40:40
Elapsed time : 0d 00:05:16 Lifetime : 0d 00:00:00
State : terminated Run exit code : noError
Result time : 2006/11/06 20:40:40 Keep history : 0d 00:55:13
Error time : never
Results file : ftp://*:*@192.168.15.18/home/testlab_bgp/cron/_20061106-203523.
out
Run exit : Success
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
*A:Redundancy#
 
*A:Redundancy# show system script-control script-policy run-history executing
===============================================================================
Script-policy Run History
===============================================================================
Script policy "test"
Owner "TiMOS CLI"
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Script Run #20
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start time : 2006/11/06 20:46:00 End time : never
Elapsed time : 0d 00:00:56 Lifetime : 0d 00:59:04
State : executing Run exit code : noError
Result time : never Keep history : 0d 01:00:00
Error time : never
Results file : ftp://*:*@192.168.15.18/home/testlab_bgp/cron/_20061106-204559.
out
===============================================================================
*A:show#
 
*A:# show system script-control script-policy run-history initializing
===============================================================================
Script-policy Run History
===============================================================================
Script policy "test"
Owner "TiMOS CLI"
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Script Run #21
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start time : never End time : never
Elapsed time : 0d 00:00:00 Lifetime : 0d 01:00:00
State : initializing Run exit code : noError
Result time : never Keep history : 0d 01:00:00
Error time : never
Results file : none
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Script Run #22
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start time : never End time : never
Elapsed time : 0d 00:00:00 Lifetime : 0d 01:00:00
State : initializing Run exit code : noError
Result time : never Keep history : 0d 01:00:00
Error time : never
Results file : none
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Script Run #23
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Start time : never End time : never
Elapsed time : 0d 00:00:00 Lifetime : 0d 01:00:00
State : initializing Run exit code : noError
Result time : never Keep history : 0d 01:00:00
Error time : never
Results file : none
===============================================================================
*A:show#
Table 92:  Output Fields: Script Policy  

Label

Description 

Script policy

Displays the name of the script policy

Script policy owner

Displays the name of the script policy owner

Administrative status

Enabled — Administrative status is enabled

Disabled — Administrative status is disabled

Script

Displays the name of the script

Script owner

Displays the name of the script owner

Script source location

Displays the location of the scheduled script

Max running allowed

Displays the maximum number of allowed sessions

Max completed run histories

Displays the maximum number of sessions previously run

Max lifetime allowed

Displays the maximum length of time the script may run

Completed run histories

Displays the number of completed sessions

Executing run histories

Displays the number of sessions in the process of executin.

Initializing run histories

Displays the number of sessions ready to run/queued but not executed

Max time run history saved

Displays the maximum length of time to keep the results from a script run

Last change

Displays the system time that a change was made to the configuration

chassis

Syntax 
chassis [environment] [power-supply]
Context 
show
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays general chassis status information.

For a virtual chassis (VC), this command displays information about the entire VC. Hardware information can be displayed for individual CPMs, IMMs, power supplies, and fans.

Parameters 
environment—
Displays chassis environmental status information.
Default—
all chassis information
power-supply—
Displays only power-supply information.
Output 
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-M
A:7210-SAS-M# show chassis power-supply 
===============================================================================
Chassis Information
===============================================================================
Power Supply Information
    Number of power supplies      : 2
 
    Power supply number           : 1
    Configured power supply type  : ac single
    Status                        : up
    AC power                      : within range
 
    Power supply number           : 2
    Configured power supply type  : dc (+24V)
    Status                        : not equipped
===============================================================================
A:7210-SAS-M# 
 
 
A:7210-SAS-M# show chassis power-supply 
===============================================================================
Chassis Information
===============================================================================
Power Supply Information
    Number of power supplies      : 2
 
    Power supply number           : 1
    Configured power supply type  : dc (+24V)
    Status                        : up
    DC power                      : within range
    Input power                   : within range
    Output power                  : within range
 
    Power supply number           : 2
    Configured power supply type  : dc (+24V)
    Status                        : up
    DC power                      : within range
    Input power                   : within range
    Output power                  : within range
===============================================================================
A:7210-SAS-M#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-T
*A:SAST>show# chassis
 
===============================================================================
Chassis Information
===============================================================================
  Name                              : SAST
  Type                              : 7210 SAS-T 12F10T 4XFP ETR-1
  Location                          :
  Coordinates                       :
  CLLI code                         :
  Number of slots                   : 2
  Number of ports                   : 26
  Critical LED state                : Red
  Major LED state                   : Off
  Over Temperature state            : OK
  Low Temperature state             : OK
  Base MAC address                  : 4c:5f:d2:7d:13:f6
  Number of MAC addresses           : 16
  Hardware Data
    Part number                     : 3HE08117AAAA01
    CLEI code                       :
    Serial number                   : NS1310C2056
    Manufacture date                : 03252013
    Manufacturing string            : (Not Specified)
    Manufacturing deviations        : (Not Specified)
    Manufacturing assembly number   :
    Temperature                     : 39C
    Time of last boot               : 2000/05/31 23:24:58
    Current alarm state             : alarm active
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Environment Information
 
  Number of fan trays               : 1
  Number of fans                    : 3
 
  Fan tray number                   : 1
    Speed                           : unknown
    Status                          : failed
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power Supply Information
  Number of power supplies          : 2
 
  Power supply number               : 1
    Configured power supply type    : ac single
    Status                          : up
    AC power                        : within range
 
  Power supply number               : 2
    Configured power supply type    : none
    Status                          : not equipped
===============================================================================
*A:SAST>show#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE
A:7210Sx>show# chassis
 
===============================================================================
Chassis Information
===============================================================================
  Name                              : hw_sass_duth
  Type                              : 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE 48Tp4SFP+ (PoE)-1
  Location                          :
  Coordinates                       :
  CLLI code                         :
  Number of slots                   : 2
  Number of ports                   : 52
      System LED state              : Green
  Over Temperature state            : OK
  Base MAC address                  : a4:7b:2c:c6:69:d3
  Number of MAC addresses           : 512
  Hardware Data
    Part number                     : 1160400046
    CLEI code                       :
    Serial number                   : 01160400046
    Manufacture date                :
    Manufacturing deviations        : (Not Specified)
    Manufacturing assembly number   : 82-0827-01
    Temperature                     : 59C
    Time of last boot               : 2000/01/01 01:32:34
    Current alarm state             : alarm cleared
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Environment Information
 
  Number of fan trays               : 1
  Number of fans                    : 1
 
  Fan tray number                   : 1
    Speed                           : half speed
    Status                          : up
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power Supply Information
  Number of power supplies          : 2
 
  Power supply number               : 1
    Configured power supply type    : ac single
    Status                          : up
    AC power                        : within range
 
  Power supply number               : 2
    Configured power supply type    : none
    Status                          : failed
    DC power                        : out of range
===============================================================================
A:7210Sx>show#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE
*A:7210SAS>show# chassis
 
===============================================================================
Chassis Information
===============================================================================
  Name                              : NS1633T0067
  Type                              : 7210 SAS-Sx 64SFP+4CFP4-1
  Location                          :
  Coordinates                       :
  CLLI code                         :
  Number of slots                   : 2
  Number of ports                   : 68
      System LED state              : Red
  Over Temperature state            : OK
  Base MAC address                  : d0:99:d5:8f:5e:41
  Number of MAC addresses           : 16
  Hardware Data
    Part number                     : AABBCCDD-11
    CLEI code                       :
    Serial number                   : NS1633T0067
    Manufacture date                :
    Manufacturing deviations        : (Not Specified)
    Manufacturing assembly number   :
    Temperature                     : 60C
    Time of last boot               : 2000/01/01 00:29:06
    Current alarm state             : alarm active
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Environment Information
 
  Number of fan trays               : 1
  Number of fans                    : 3
 
  Fan tray number                   : 1
    Speed                           : unknown
    Status                          : failed
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Power Supply Information
  Number of power supplies          : 2
 
  Power supply number               : 1
    Configured power supply type    : none
    Status                          : failed
    DC power                        : out of range
 
  Power supply number               : 2
    Configured power supply type    : ac single
    Status                          : up
    AC power                        : within range
===============================================================================
*A:7210SAS>show#
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE with RPS
A:Dut-P# show chassis power-supply 
===============================================================================
Chassis Information
===============================================================================
Power Supply Information
  Number of power supplies          : 3
  
  Power supply number               : 1
    Configured power supply type    : none
  
  Power supply number               : 2
    Configured power supply type    : none
  
  Power supply number               : 3
    Configured power supply type    : rps dc (+55V)
    Status                          : up
    DC power                        : within range
===============================================================================
A:Dut-P#
Sample Output for a 7210 SAS Virtual Chassis
A:NS1653T0051# show chassis
=============================================================================
Chassis Information
=============================================================================
  Name                              : NS1653T0051
  Type                              : 7210 SAS-VC
  Location                          :
  Coordinates                       :
  CLLI code                         :
  Number of slots                   : 16
  Number of ports                   : 136
  System LED state                  : Red
  Over Temperature state            : OK
  Base MAC address                  : d0:99:d5:92:70:41
  Number of MAC addresses           : 512
  VC-NAME                           : ABCDEFGHIJK
  Number of VC nodes                : 1-8
  Number of IMM-only nodes          : 2-8
  Number of CPM-IMM nodes           : 1-2
  VC Oper Status                    : OK 
    Time of last boot               : 2000/01/01 00:51:31
    Power Status (all nodes)        : OK
    Fan Status (all nodes)          : OK 
    Current alarm state             : alarm active
=============================================================================
Sample Output for 7210 SAS-Sx/S 1/10GE in Standalone VC Mode
A:NS1# show chassis 
===============================================================================
Chassis Information
===============================================================================
  Name                              : NS1
  Type                              : 7210 SAS-VC
  HW Type                           : SAS-S 48F4SFP+
  Location                          : 
  Coordinates                       : 
  CLLI code                         :            
  Number of slots                   : 10
  Number of ports                   : 216
      System LED state              : Red
  Over Temperature state            : OK
  VC Stack name                     : VCmix
  Number of VC Nodes                : 6
  Number of IMM-only Nodes          : 5
  Number of CPM-IMM Nodes           : 1
  VC Chassis MAC address (active)   : ab:cd:ef:ab:cd:ef
  Number of MAC addresses (active)  : 10
  VC Chassis MAC address (config)   : ab:cd:ef:ab:cd:ef
  Number of MAC addresses (config)  : 10
  Temperature                       : 67C
  Current alarm state               : alarm active
  Fan Status                        : Ok
  Power Status                      : Failed(Slots:7)
=============================================================================== 
Table 93:  Output Fields: Chassis  

Label

Description  

Name

The system name for the router

Type

The router series model number

Location

The system location for the device

Coordinates

A user-configurable string that indicates the Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates for the location of the chassis

For example:

N 45 58 23, W 34 56 12

N37 37' 00 latitude, W122 22' 00 longitude

N36*39.246' W121*40.121'

CLLI Code

The Common Language Location Identifier (CLLI) that uniquely identifies the geographic location of places and certain functional categories of equipment unique to the telecommunications industry

Number of slots

The number of slots in this chassis that are available for plug-in cards

The total number includes card slots

Number of ports

The total number of ports currently installed in this chassis

Critical LED state

The current state of the Critical LED in this chassis

Major LED state

The current state of the Major LED in this chassis

Minor LED state

The current state of the Minor LED in this chassis

Base MAC address

The base chassis Ethernet MAC address

Hardware Data

Part number

The part number

CLEI code

The code used to identify the router

Serial number

The part number

Not user modifiable

Manufacture date

The chassis manufacture date

Not user modifiable

Manufacturing string

Factory-inputted manufacturing text string

Not user modifiable

Time of last boot

The date and time the most recent boot occurred

Current alarm state

Displays the alarm conditions for the specific board

Environment Information

Number of fan trays

The total number of fan trays installed in this chassis

Number of fans

The total number of fans installed in this chassis

Operational status

Current status of the fan tray

Fan speed

Half speed — The fans are operating at half speed

Full speed — The fans are operating at full speed

Power Supply Information

Number of power supplies

The number of power supplies installed in the chassis

Power supply number

The ID for each power supply installed in the chassis

Configured power supply type

The power supply type that is configured

AC power

Within range — AC voltage is within range

Out of range — AC voltage is out of range

DC power

Within range — DC voltage is within range

Out of range — DC voltage is out of range

Over temp

Within range — The current temperature is within the acceptable range

Out of range — The current temperature is above the acceptable range

Status

Up — The specified power supply is up

Down — The specified power supply is down

alarm-contact-input

Syntax 
alarm-contact-input all
Context 
show>alarm-contact-input
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (netowrk and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, and, 7210 SAS-R12

Description 

This command displays information of all the alarm contact input pins.

Output 

The following output is an example of alarm contact input information, and Table 94 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
*A:7210-2# show alarm-contact-input 1 
===============================================================================
Alarm Contact Input
===============================================================================
    Alarm Input Pin Number        : 1
    Alarm Input Pin Current State : Disabled
    Alarm Output Pin Used         : Major
===============================================================================
*A:7210-2# 
 
 
*A:7210-2# show alarm-contact-input 1 detail 
===============================================================================
Alarm Contact Input
===============================================================================
    Alarm Input Pin Number        : 1
    Alarm Input Pin Description   : 
    Alarm Input Pin Current State : Disabled
    Alarm Output Pin Used         : Major
    Last State Change             : 05/19/2010 11:28:09
===============================================================================
*A:7210-2# 
 
 
*A:7210-2# show alarm-contact-input all 
===============================================================================
Alarm Contact Input
===============================================================================
    Alarm Input Pin Number        : 1
    Alarm Input Pin Description   : 
    Alarm Input Pin Current State : Disabled
    Alarm Output Pin Used         : Major
    Last State Change             : 05/19/2010 11:28:09
    Alarm Input Pin Number        : 2
    Alarm Input Pin Description   : 
    Alarm Input Pin Current State : Disabled
    Alarm Output Pin Used         : Major
    Last State Change             : 05/19/2010 11:28:09
    Alarm Input Pin Number        : 3
    Alarm Input Pin Description   : 
    Alarm Input Pin Current State : Disabled
    Alarm Output Pin Used         : Major
    Last State Change             : 05/19/2010 11:28:09
    Alarm Input Pin Number        : 4
    Alarm Input Pin Description   : 
    Alarm Input Pin Current State : Disabled
    Alarm Output Pin Used         : Major
    Last State Change             : 05/19/2010 11:28:09
===============================================================================
*A:7210-2# 
Table 94:  Output Fields: Alarm Contact Input 

Label

Description  

Alarm input pin Number

Indicates the pin alarm input pin number

Alarm input pin Description

Describes the alarm indicating its usage or attribute

Alarm input pin current state

Indicates the current state of the alarm contact input pin

Alarm output pin used

Indicates the alarm output pin used

Last state change time

Indicates the previous state change time

pools

Syntax 
pools
Context 
show
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command displays information on the buffer allocation and buffer usage per port.

Output 

The following output is an example of pools information, and Table 95 describes the output fields.

Sample Output
A:7210SAS# show pools 1/1/2 access-egress 
 
===============================================================================
Pool Information
===============================================================================
Port                 : 1/1/2             
Application          : Acc-Egr           Slope Policy       : default
Resv CBS             : Sum               
MMU Pool Total In Use: 1256 KB           MMU Pool Shared In*: 1236 KB
 
Pool Total           : 910 KB            
Pool Shared          : 842 KB            Pool Resv          : 68 KB
 
Pool Total In Use    : 579 KB            
Pool Shared In Use   : 570 KB            Pool Resv In Use   : 9 KB
 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
ID                         FC-MAPS/      CBS (B)     Depth  A.CIR     A.PIR
                                                            O.CIR     O.PIR
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1/1/2                           be       8698      573      0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
1/1/2                           l2       8698      0        0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
1/1/2                           af       8698      0        0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
1/1/2                           l1       8698      0        0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
1/1/2                           h2       8698      0        0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
1/1/2                           ef       8698      0        0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
1/1/2                           h1       8698      0        0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
1/1/2                           nc       8698      0        0         1000000
                                                            0         Max
===============================================================================
* indicates that the corresponding row element may have been truncated.
Table 95:  Output Fields: Pools  

Label

Description

Port

Displays the Port ID of the port

Application

Indicates whether its access, network or access-uplink buffer pool

Resv CBS

The amount of CBS reserved per port

Sum — Indicates it is the sum of the CBS allocated to each queue on this port

MMU Pool Total In Use

Number of system wide buffers in use

This includes the shared buffers as well as the per queue committed buffers.

Pool Total

The total amount of buffer allocated to this pool

Pool Shared

The total amount of buffers allocated towards MBS portion, which is shared by all the queues

Pool Total In Use

The total amount of buffers in use

Pool Shared In Use

The total amount of shared buffers in use

Slope Policy

The slope policy ID in use

MMU Pool Shared In

Number of system wide shared buffers currently in use

This does not include the committed buffers allocated to each queue.

Pool Resv

The total amount of buffers allocated towards CBS for all the queues

Pool Resv In Use

Total amount of CBS buffers in use

ID

Identifies the port

FC-MAPS

Identifies the FC

Depth

The current depth of the queue

CBS

The CBS portion allocated to the queue

A.CIR/PIR

Configured values of CIR and PIR rates (that is, value before adaptation rule is applied)

O.CIR/PIR

Operational value of CIR/PIR after applying the adaptation rule

6.12.2.3. Clear Commands

screen

Syntax 
screen
Context 
clear
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command allows an operator to clear the Telnet or console screen.

ptp

Syntax 
ptp inactive-peers
ptp statistics
ptp peer ip-address statistics
Context 
clear>system
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command clears PTP statistics.

Parameters 
inactive-peers—
Keyword to remove PTP peers which are not currently exchanging PTP packets with the router
peer ip-address statistics—
Clears statistics for the specified peer.
statistics—
Clears all PTP statistics.

port

Syntax 
port port-id statistics
Context 
clear>system>ptp
Supported Platforms 

7210 SAS-M (network and access-uplink), 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-Sx 10/100GE, 7210 SAS-T (network and access-uplink)

Description 

This command clears PTP port information.

Parameters 
port-id—
Clears information for the specified port.
statistics—
Clears statistics information for the specified port.

script-control

Syntax 
script-control
Context 
clear>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to clear script information.

script-policy

Syntax 
script-policy
Context 
clear>system>script-control
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to clear script policy information.

completed

Syntax 
completed [script-policy-name] [owner owner-name]
Context 
clear>system>script-control>script-policy
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command clears completed script run history entries.

Parameters 
script-policy-name—
Clears history entries only for the specified script-policy.
owner-name
Clears history entries only for script-policies with the specified owner.
Default—
“TiMOS CLI”

sync-if-timing

Syntax 
sync-if-timing {ref1 | ref2 | bits1 | bits2}
Context 
clear>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on platforms configured in the standalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to individually clear (re-enable) a previously failed reference. As long as the reference is one of the valid options, this command is always executed. An inherent behavior enables the reverted mode which causes a re-evaluation of all available references.

Parameters 
ref1—
Clears the first timing reference.
ref2—
Clears the second timing reference.
bits1—
Clears the BITS1 port reference. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 platforms.
bits2—
Clears the BITS2 port reference. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-T and 7210 SAS-Mxp platforms.

trace

Syntax 
trace log
Context 
clear
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document

Description 

This command allows an operator to clear the trace log.

6.12.2.4. Debug Commands

sync-if-timing

Syntax 
sync-if-timing
Context 
debug
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to debug synchronous interface timing references.

force-reference

Syntax 
force-reference {ref1 | ref2 | bits1 | bits2 | ptp}
no force-reference
Context 
debug>sync-if-timing
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode; not supported on platforms configured in the satndalone-VC operating mode

Description 

This command enables the context to force the system synchronous timing output to use a specific reference.

Note:

This command should be used for testing and debugging purposes only. After the system timing reference input has been forced, it will not revert back to another reference at any time. The state of this command is not persistent between system boots.

When the debug force-reference command is executed, the current system synchronous timing output is immediately referenced from the specified reference input. If the specified input is not available (shutdown), or in a disqualified state, the timing output will enter the holdover state based on the previous input reference.

Parameters 
ref1
Specifies that the clock will use the first timing reference.
ref2
Specifies that the clock will use the second timing reference.
ptp
Specifies that the clock will use ptp as a timing reference. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-M, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-Sx 1/10GE, 7210 SAS-R6, 7210 SAS-R12, and 7210 SAS-Mxp platforms.
bits1
Specifies that the clock will use the BITS1 port as timing reference. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-Mxp, 7210 SAS-T, 7210 SAS-R6 and 7210 SAS-R12 platforms.
bits2
Specifies that the clock will use BITS2 port as the timing reference. This keyword is only supported on 7210 SAS-M and 7210 SAS-T platforms.

system

Syntax 
[no] system
Context 
debug
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command displays system debug information.

ntp

Syntax 
ntp [router router-name] [interface ip-int-name]
Context 
debug>system
Supported Platforms 

Supported on all 7210 SAS platforms as described in this document, including platforms configured in the access-uplink operating mode

Description 

This command enables and configures debugging for NTP.

The no form of this command disables debugging for NTP.

Parameters 
router-name—
Base, management
Default—
Base
ip-int-name—
Specifies the name of the IP interface. The name can be up to 32 characters and must begin with a letter. If the string contains special characters (#, $, spaces, and so on), the entire string must be enclosed within double quotes.